US20170355761A1 - Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species - Google Patents

Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20170355761A1
US20170355761A1 US15/601,945 US201715601945A US2017355761A1 US 20170355761 A1 US20170355761 A1 US 20170355761A1 US 201715601945 A US201715601945 A US 201715601945A US 2017355761 A1 US2017355761 A1 US 2017355761A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
acidic species
media
adalimumab
acidic
composition
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US15/601,945
Inventor
Kartik Subramanian
Xiaobei Zeng
Diane D. Dong
Wen Chung LIM
Kathreen A. Gifford
Christopher CHUMSAE
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
AbbVie Inc
Original Assignee
AbbVie Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=48045072&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=US20170355761(A1) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Application filed by AbbVie Inc filed Critical AbbVie Inc
Priority to US15/601,945 priority Critical patent/US20170355761A1/en
Assigned to ABBVIE INC. reassignment ABBVIE INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: CHUMSAE, CHRISTOPHER, ZENG, Xiaobei, DONG, DIANE D., GIFFORD, KATHREEN A., LIM, WEN CHUNG, SUBRAMANIAN, KARTIK
Publication of US20170355761A1 publication Critical patent/US20170355761A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • C07K16/18Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans
    • C07K16/24Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against cytokines, lymphokines or interferons
    • C07K16/241Tumor Necrosis Factors
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/395Antibodies; Immunoglobulins; Immune serum, e.g. antilymphocytic serum
    • A61K39/39591Stabilisation, fragmentation
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K1/00General methods for the preparation of peptides, i.e. processes for the organic chemical preparation of peptides or proteins of any length
    • C07K1/14Extraction; Separation; Purification
    • C07K1/16Extraction; Separation; Purification by chromatography
    • C07K1/165Extraction; Separation; Purification by chromatography mixed-mode chromatography
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K1/00General methods for the preparation of peptides, i.e. processes for the organic chemical preparation of peptides or proteins of any length
    • C07K1/14Extraction; Separation; Purification
    • C07K1/16Extraction; Separation; Purification by chromatography
    • C07K1/18Ion-exchange chromatography
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K1/00General methods for the preparation of peptides, i.e. processes for the organic chemical preparation of peptides or proteins of any length
    • C07K1/14Extraction; Separation; Purification
    • C07K1/16Extraction; Separation; Purification by chromatography
    • C07K1/20Partition-, reverse-phase or hydrophobic interaction chromatography
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K1/00General methods for the preparation of peptides, i.e. processes for the organic chemical preparation of peptides or proteins of any length
    • C07K1/14Extraction; Separation; Purification
    • C07K1/16Extraction; Separation; Purification by chromatography
    • C07K1/22Affinity chromatography or related techniques based upon selective absorption processes
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12PFERMENTATION OR ENZYME-USING PROCESSES TO SYNTHESISE A DESIRED CHEMICAL COMPOUND OR COMPOSITION OR TO SEPARATE OPTICAL ISOMERS FROM A RACEMIC MIXTURE
    • C12P21/00Preparation of peptides or proteins
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/10Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by their source of isolation or production
    • C07K2317/14Specific host cells or culture conditions, e.g. components, pH or temperature
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/20Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by taxonomic origin
    • C07K2317/21Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by taxonomic origin from primates, e.g. man

Definitions

  • the instant invention relates to the field of protein production, and in particular to compositions and processes for controlling the amount of acidic species generated during expression of a protein of interest by host cells, as well as the reduction of acidic species present in the clarified cell culture broth.
  • controlling the amount of acidic species generated during expression of a protein of interest is achieved by modifying the culture media of the cells.
  • controlling the amount of acidic species generated during expression of a protein of interest is achieved by modifying the culture process parameters.
  • controlling the amount of acidic species of a protein of interest is achieved by modifying a cell culture clarified harvest comprising the protein of interest.
  • the production of proteins for biopharmaceutical applications typically involves the use of cell cultures that are known to produce proteins exhibiting varying levels of product-related substance heterogeneity.
  • heterogeneity includes, but is not limited to, the presence of acidic species.
  • acidic species heterogeneities can be detected by various methods, such as WCX-10 HPLC (a weak cation exchange chromatography) or IEF (isoelectric focusing).
  • the acidic species identified using such techniques comprise a range of product-related impurities such as antibody product fragments (e.g., Fc and Fab fragments), and/or post-translation modifications of the antibody product, such as, deamidated and/or glycoslyated antibodies.
  • the present invention is directed to compositions and methods that control (modulate or limit) acidic species heterogeneity in a population of proteins.
  • the presence of such acidic species corresponds to heterogeneity of the distribution of charged impurities, e.g., a mixture of protein fragments (e.g., Fc and Fab fragments of antibodies), and/or post-translation modifications of the proteins, such as, deamidated and/or glycoslyated proteins, in the population of proteins, and such heterogeneity particularly of interest when it arises in the context of recombinant protein production.
  • the acidic species heterogeneity arises from differences in the amount and/or type of acidic species in a population of proteins.
  • the acidic species heterogeneity is present in a population of proteins produced by cell culture.
  • control is exerted over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture.
  • the control is exerted over the amount of acidic species formed while the protein is present in a cell culture broth, while the culture is actively maintained or while the cells are removed.
  • the protein is an antibody.
  • control over the amount of acidic species produced by cell culture is exerted by employing certain media components during production of a protein, for example, an antibody, of interest.
  • control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing the media of cells expressing the protein of interest with one or more amino acids.
  • the one or more amino acids are arginine, lysine, ornithine, histidine or combinations thereof.
  • control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing the media of cells expressing the protein of interest with calcium, for example, by supplementing the media with calcium chloride dihydrate.
  • control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing the media of cells expressing the protein of interest with vitamin niacinamide.
  • control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing the media of cells expressing the protein of interest with suitable combinations of arginine, lysine, calcium chloride and niacinamide.
  • control over the amount of acidic species produced by cell culture is exerted by ensuring that the production of a protein, for example, an antibody, of interest occurs under specific conditions, including specific pH.
  • control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing the media of cells expressing the protein of interest with arginine and lysine and by controlling the pH of the cell culture.
  • the pH of the cell culture is adjusted to a pH of about 6.9. In certain embodiments, the pH of the cell culture is adjusted to a lower pH of about 6.8.
  • control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing the media of cells expressing the protein of interest with arginine and lysine and by choice of cell culture harvest criteria.
  • the harvest criterion is a particular culture day. In certain embodiments, the harvest criterion is based on harvest viability.
  • control over the amount of acidic species produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing a cell culture clarified harvest comprising a protein or antibody of interest with one or more amino acids.
  • the one or more amino acids is arginine, histidine, or combinations thereof.
  • control over the amount of acidic species produced by cell culture is exerted by adjusting the pH of a cell culture clarified harvest comprising a protein or antibody of interest.
  • the pH of the cell culture clarified harvest is adjusted to a pH of about 5.
  • the pH of the cell culture clarified harvest is adjusted to a pH of about 6.
  • control over the amount of acidic species produced by cell culture is exerted by the use of a continuous or perfusion technology. In certain embodiments, this may be attained through choice of medium exchange rate. In certain, non-limiting, embodiments, maintenance of the medium exchange rates (working volumes/day) of a cell culture run between 0 and 20, or between 0.5 and 12 or between 1 and 8 or between 1.5 and 6 can be used to achieve the desired reduction in acidic species. In certain embodiments, the choice of cell culture methodology that allows for control of acidic species heterogeneity can also include, for example, but not by way of limitation, employment of an intermittent harvest strategy or through use of cell retention device technology.
  • the methods of culturing cells expressing a protein of interest reduces the amount of acidic species present in the resulting composition.
  • the resulting composition is substantially free of acidic species.
  • the sample comprises a cell culture harvest wherein the cell culture is employed to produce specific proteins of the present invention.
  • the sample matrix is prepared from a cell line used to produce anti-TNF- ⁇ antibodies.
  • the purity of the proteins of interest in the resultant sample product can be analyzed using methods well known to those skilled in the art, e.g., weak cation exchange chromatography (WCX), capillary isoelectric focusing (cIEF), size-exclusion chromatography, PorosTM A HPLC Assay, HCP ELISA, Protein A ELISA, and western blot analysis.
  • WCX weak cation exchange chromatography
  • cIEF capillary isoelectric focusing
  • size-exclusion chromatography size-exclusion chromatography
  • PorosTM A HPLC Assay HCP ELISA
  • Protein A ELISA Protein A ELISA
  • western blot analysis e.g., Western blot analysis.
  • the invention is directed to one or more pharmaceutical compositions comprising an isolated protein, such as an antibody or antigen-binding portion thereof, and an acceptable carrier.
  • the compositions further comprise one or more pharmaceutical agents.
  • FIG. 50 depicts the effect of total ornithine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions.
  • FIG. 106 depicts an acidification sample preparation scheme.
  • FIG. 107 depicts an arginine sample preparation scheme.
  • FIG. 108 depicts a histidine sample preparation scheme.
  • FIG. 109 depicts a lysine sample preparation scheme.
  • FIG. 110 depicts a methionine sample preparation scheme.
  • FIG. 111 depicts an amino acid sample preparation scheme.
  • FIG. 112 depicts a CDM clarified harvest sample preparation scheme.
  • FIG. 113 depicts an acid-type pH study sample preparation scheme.
  • FIG. 114 depicts the effect of low pH treatment with subsequent neutralization on initial acidic variant content.
  • FIG. 115 depicts the effect of low pH treatment with subsequent neutralization on acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 116 depicts the effect of sample preparation method on initial acidic variant content.
  • FIG. 117 depicts the effect of sample preparation method on initial acidic variant content.
  • FIG. 118 depicts the dose dependent effect of arginine on reduction of acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 119 depicts the effect of histidine concentration on initial acidic variant content.
  • FIG. 120 depicts the effect of histidine concentration on acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 121 depicts the effect of lysine on initial acid variant content.
  • FIG. 122 depicts the effect of lysine on acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 123 depicts the effect of methionine on initial acid variant content.
  • FIG. 124 depicts the effect of methionine on acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 125 depicts the effect of amino acids on initial acid variant content.
  • FIG. 126 depicts the effect of amino acids on acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 127 depicts the effect of alternative additives on initial acid variant content.
  • FIG. 128 depicts the effect of alternative additives on acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 129 depicts the effect of low pH/arginine treatment on D2E7 CDM initial acid variant content.
  • FIG. 130 depicts the effect of low pH/arginine treatment on D2E7 CDM acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 131 depicts the effect of low pH/arginine treatment on mAb B hydrolysate initial acid variant content.
  • FIG. 132 depicts the effect of low pH/arginine treatment on mAb B hydrolysate acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 133 depicts the effect of low pH/arginine treatment on mAb C hydrolysate initial acid variant content.
  • FIG. 134 depicts the effect of low pH/arginine treatment on mAb C hydrolysate acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 135 depicts the effect of acid type/pH on acid variant content.
  • FIG. 136 depicts the effect of acid concentration on acid variant content.
  • FIG. 137 depicts the effect of acid concentration on acid variant content.
  • FIG. 138 depicts the effect of neutralization on acid variant content.
  • FIG. 139 depicts the effect of neutralization on acid variant content.
  • FIG. 140 depicts LC/MS peptide mapping analysis of exemplary antibodies expressed in the context of the cell culture conditions of the instant invention, including preparation of specific mass traces for both modified and non-modified peptides in order to accurately quantify the total amount of MGO modification. Mass spectra are also analyzed for the specific region of the chromatogram to confirm the peptide identity.
  • FIG. 141 depicts a chromatogram wherein the total acidic species associated with the expression of Adalimiumab is divided into a first acidic species region (AR1) and a second acidic species region (AR2).
  • FIG. 142 depicts the AR Growth at 25° C. of low and high AR containing samples.
  • the instant invention relates to the field of protein production.
  • the instant invention relates to compositions and processes for controlling the amount of acidic species expressed by host cells when used to produce a protein of interest.
  • Certain embodiments of the invention relate to culturing said cells to express said proteins under conditions that limit the amount of acidic species that are expressed by the cells.
  • the methods described herein employ culturing said cells in media supplemented with one or more amino acids and/or calcium (e.g., as calcium chloride dihydrate) and/or niacinamide.
  • the methods described herein employ culturing said cells in a culture with appropriate control of process parameters, such as pH.
  • methods described herein employ culturing cells at a lower process pH.
  • control of acidic species heterogeneity can be attained by the choice of cell culture methodology.
  • use of a continuous or perfusion technology may be utilized to achieve the desired control over acidic species heterogeneity. In certain embodiments, this may be attained through choice of medium exchange rate.
  • the present invention is directed toward pharmaceutical compositions comprising one or more proteins, such as, but not limited to an antibody or antigen-binding portion thereof, purified by a method described herein.
  • the terms “acidic species” and “acidic species heterogeneity” refer to a characteristic of a population of proteins wherein the population includes a distribution of product-related impurities identifiable by the presence of charge heterogeneities.
  • acidic species heterogeneities can be detected by various methods, such as, for example, WCX-10 HPLC (a weak cation exchange chromatography), or IEF (isoelectric focusing).
  • the acidic species identified using such techniques comprise a mixture of product-related impurities containing antibody product fragments (e.g., Fc and Fab fragments), chemical modifications (e.g., methylglyoxal modified species (as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/078,181), glycated species) and/or post-translation modifications of the antibody product, such as, deamidated and/or glycoslyated antibodies.
  • product-related impurities containing antibody product fragments e.g., Fc and Fab fragments
  • chemical modifications e.g., methylglyoxal modified species (as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/078,181), glycated species
  • post-translation modifications of the antibody product such as, deamidated and/or glycoslyated antibodies.
  • the acidic species heterogeneity comprises a difference in the type of acidic species present in the population of proteins.
  • the population of proteins may comprise more than one acidic species variant.
  • the total acidic species can be divided based on chromatographic residence time.
  • FIG. 141 depicts a non-limiting example of such a division wherein the total acidic species associated with the expression of Adalimiumab is divided into a first acidic species region (AR1) and a second acidic species region (AR2).
  • the compositions of particular acidic species regions may differ depending on the particular antibody of interest, as well as the particular cell culture, purification, and/or chromatographic conditions employed.
  • the heterogeneity of the distribution of acidic species comprises a difference in the amount of acidic species in the population of proteins.
  • the population of proteins may comprise more than one acidic species variant, and each of the variants may be present in different amounts.
  • antibody includes an immunoglobulin molecule comprised of four polypeptide chains, two heavy (H) chains and two light (L) chains inter-connected by disulfide bonds.
  • Each heavy chain is comprised of a heavy chain variable region (abbreviated herein as HCVR or VH) and a heavy chain constant region (CH).
  • the heavy chain constant region is comprised of three domains, CH1, CH2 and CH3.
  • Each light chain is comprised of a light chain variable region (abbreviated herein as LCVR or VL) and a light chain constant region.
  • the light chain constant region is comprised of one domain, CL.
  • VH and VL regions can be further subdivided into regions of hypervariability, termed complementarity determining regions (CDRs), interspersed with regions that are more conserved, termed framework regions (FR).
  • CDRs complementarity determining regions
  • FR framework regions
  • Each VH and VL is composed of three CDRs and four FRs, arranged from amino-terminus to carboxy-terminus in the following order: FR1, CDR1, FR2, CDR2, FR3, CDR3, FR4.
  • antibody portion includes fragments of an antibody that retain the ability to specifically bind to an antigen (e.g., in the case of Adalimumab, hTNF ⁇ ). It has been shown that the antigen-binding function of an antibody can be performed by fragments of a full-length antibody.
  • binding fragments encompassed within the term “antigen-binding portion” of an antibody include (i) a Fab fragment, a monovalent fragment comprising the VL, VH, CL and CH1 domains; (ii) a F(ab′)2 fragment, a bivalent fragment comprising two Fab fragments linked by a disulfide bridge at the hinge region; (iii) a Fd fragment comprising the VH and CH1 domains; (iv) a Fv fragment comprising the VL and VH domains of a single arm of an antibody, (v) a dAb fragment (Ward et al., (1989) Nature 341:544-546, the entire teaching of which is incorporated herein by reference), which comprises a VH domain; and (vi) an isolated complementarity determining region (CDR).
  • a Fab fragment a monovalent fragment comprising the VL, VH, CL and CH1 domains
  • a F(ab′)2 fragment a bivalent fragment comprising two
  • the two domains of the Fv fragment, VL and VH are coded for by separate genes, they can be joined, using recombinant methods, by a synthetic linker that enables them to be made as a single protein chain in which the VL and VH regions pair to form monovalent molecules (known as single chain Fv (scFv); see, e.g., Bird et al. (1988) Science 242:423-426; and Huston et al. (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:5879-5883, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference).
  • Such single chain antibodies are also intended to be encompassed within the term “antigen-binding portion” of an antibody.
  • Diabodies are bivalent, bispecific antibodies in which VH and VL domains are expressed on a single polypeptide chain, but using a linker that is too short to allow for pairing between the two domains on the same chain, thereby forcing the domains to pair with complementary domains of another chain and creating two antigen binding sites (see, e.g., Holliger, P., et al. (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:6444-6448; Poljak, R. J., et al. (1994) Structure 2:1121-1123, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference).
  • an antibody or antigen-binding portion thereof may be part of a larger immunoadhesion molecule, formed by covalent or non-covalent association of the antibody or antibody portion with one or more other proteins or peptides.
  • immunoadhesion molecules include use of the streptavidin core region to make a tetrameric scFv molecule (Kipriyanov, S. M., et al.
  • Antibody portions such as Fab and F(ab′)2 fragments, can be prepared from whole antibodies using conventional techniques, such as papain or pepsin digestion, respectively, of whole antibodies.
  • antibodies, antibody portions and immunoadhesion molecules can be obtained using standard recombinant DNA techniques, as described herein.
  • the antigen binding portions are complete domains or pairs of complete domains.
  • the phrase “clarified harvest” refers to a liquid material containing a protein of interest, for example, an antibody of interest such as a monoclonal or polyclonal antibody of interest, that has been extracted from cell culture, for example, a fermentation bioreactor, after undergoing centrifugation to remove large solid particles and subsequent filtration to remove finer solid particles and impurities from the material.
  • a protein of interest for example, an antibody of interest such as a monoclonal or polyclonal antibody of interest
  • human antibody includes antibodies having variable and constant regions corresponding to human germline immunoglobulin sequences as described by Kabat et al. (See Kabat, et al. (1991) Sequences of proteins of Immunological Interest, Fifth Edition, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, NIH Publication No. 91-3242).
  • the human antibodies of the invention may include amino acid residues not encoded by human germline immunoglobulin sequences (e.g., mutations introduced by random or site-specific mutagenesis in vitro or by somatic mutation in vivo), e.g., in the CDRs and in particular CDR3.
  • the mutations can be introduced using the “selective mutagenesis approach.”
  • the human antibody can have at least one position replaced with an amino acid residue, e.g., an activity enhancing amino acid residue which is not encoded by the human germline immunoglobulin sequence.
  • the human antibody can have up to twenty positions replaced with amino acid residues which are not part of the human germline immunoglobulin sequence. In other embodiments, up to ten, up to five, up to three or up to two positions are replaced. In one embodiment, these replacements are within the CDR regions.
  • the term “human antibody”, as used herein, is not intended to include antibodies in which CDR sequences derived from the germline of another mammalian species, such as a mouse, have been grafted onto human framework sequences.
  • recombinant human antibody includes human antibodies that are prepared, expressed, created or isolated by recombinant means, such as antibodies expressed using a recombinant expression vector transfected into a host cell, antibodies isolated from a recombinant, combinatorial human antibody library, antibodies isolated from an animal (e.g., a mouse) that is transgenic for human immunoglobulin genes (see, e.g., Taylor, L. D., et al. (1992) Nucl. Acids Res. 20:6287-6295, the entire teaching of which is incorporated herein by reference) or antibodies prepared, expressed, created or isolated by any other means that involves splicing of human immunoglobulin gene sequences to other DNA sequences.
  • recombinant means such as antibodies expressed using a recombinant expression vector transfected into a host cell, antibodies isolated from a recombinant, combinatorial human antibody library, antibodies isolated from an animal (e.g., a mouse) that is transgenic for human immunoglobul
  • Such recombinant human antibodies have variable and constant regions derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences (see, Kabat, E. A., et al. (1991) Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest, Fifth Edition, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, NIH Publication No. 91-3242).
  • such recombinant human antibodies are subjected to in vitro mutagenesis (or, when an animal transgenic for human Ig sequences is used, in vivo somatic mutagenesis) and thus the amino acid sequences of the VH and VL regions of the recombinant antibodies are sequences that, while derived from and related to human germline VH and VL sequences, may not naturally exist within the human antibody germline repertoire in vivo.
  • such recombinant antibodies are the result of selective mutagenesis approach or back-mutation or both.
  • an “isolated antibody” includes an antibody that is substantially free of other antibodies having different antigenic specificities (e.g., an isolated antibody that specifically binds hTNF ⁇ is substantially free of antibodies that specifically bind antigens other than hTNF ⁇ ).
  • An isolated antibody that specifically binds hTNF ⁇ may bind TNF ⁇ molecules from other species.
  • an isolated antibody may be substantially free of other cellular material and/or chemicals.
  • a suitable anti-TNF ⁇ antibody is Adalimumab (Abbott Laboratories).
  • adalimumab also known by its trade name Humira® (AbbVie) refers to a human IgG antibody that binds the human form of tumor necrosis factor alpha.
  • the heavy chain constant domain 2 (CH2) of the adalimumab IgG-Fc region is glycosylated through covalent attachment of oligosaccharide at asparagine 297 (Asn-297).
  • WCX weak cation-exchange chromatography
  • activity includes activities such as the binding specificity/affinity of an antibody for an antigen, and includes activities such as the binding specificity/affinity of an anti-TNF ⁇ antibody for its antigen, e.g., an anti-TNF ⁇ antibody that binds to a TNF ⁇ antigen and/or the neutralizing potency of an antibody, e.g., an anti-TNF ⁇ antibody whose binding to hTNF ⁇ inhibits the biological activity of hTNF ⁇ .
  • nucleic acid molecule includes DNA molecules and RNA molecules.
  • a nucleic acid molecule may be single-stranded or double-stranded, but in one aspect is double-stranded DNA.
  • isolated nucleic acid molecule includes a nucleic acid molecule in which the nucleotide sequences encoding the antibody or antibody portion are free of other nucleotide sequences encoding antibodies or antibody portions that bind antigens other than hTNF ⁇ , which other sequences may naturally flank the nucleic acid in human genomic DNA.
  • an isolated nucleic acid of the invention encoding a VH region of an anti-TNF ⁇ antibody contains no other sequences encoding other VH regions that bind antigens other than, for example, hTNF ⁇ .
  • isolated nucleic acid molecule is also intended to include sequences encoding bivalent, bispecific antibodies, such as diabodies in which VH and VL regions contain no other sequences other than the sequences of the diabody.
  • recombinant host cell includes a cell into which a recombinant expression vector has been introduced. It should be understood that such terms are intended to refer not only to the particular subject cell but to the progeny of such a cell. Because certain modifications may occur in succeeding generations due to either mutation or environmental influences, such progeny may not, in fact, be identical to the parent cell, but are still included within the scope of the term “host cell” as used herein.
  • the term “recombinant protein” refers to a protein produced as the result of the transcription and translation of a gene carried on a recombinant expression vector that has been introduced into a host cell.
  • the recombinant protein is an antibody, preferably a chimeric, humanized, or fully human antibody.
  • the recombinant protein is an antibody of an isotype selected from group consisting of: IgG (e.g., IgG1, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4), IgM, IgA1, IgA2, IgD, or IgE.
  • the antibody molecule is a full-length antibody (e.g., an IgG1 or IgG4 immunoglobulin) or alternatively the antibody can be a fragment (e.g., an Fc fragment or a Fab fragment).
  • the term “cell culture” refers to methods and techniques employed to generate and maintain a population of host cells capable of producing a recombinant protein of interest, as well as the methods and techniques for optimizing the production and collection of the protein of interest. For example, once an expression vector has been incorporated into an appropriate host, the host can be maintained under conditions suitable for high level expression of the relevant nucleotide coding sequences, and the collection and purification of the desired recombinant protein. Mammalian cells are preferred for expression and production of the recombinant protein of the present invention, however other eukaryotic cell types can also be employed in the context of the instant invention.
  • Suitable mammalian host cells for expressing recombinant proteins according to the invention include Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO cells) (including dhfr ⁇ CHO cells, described in Urlaub and Chasin, (1980) PNAS USA 77:4216-4220, used with a DHFR selectable marker, e.g., as described in Kaufman and Sharp (1982) Mol. Biol. 159:601-621, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference), NS0 myeloma cells, COS cells and SP2 cells.
  • Chinese Hamster Ovary CHO cells
  • dhfr ⁇ CHO cells described in Urlaub and Chasin, (1980) PNAS USA 77:4216-4220, used with a DHFR selectable marker, e.g., as described in Kaufman and Sharp (1982) Mol. Biol. 159:601-621, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference
  • NS0 myeloma cells COS cells and SP2
  • ⁇ mammalian host cell lines are monkey kidney CV1 line transformed by SV40 (COS-7, ATCC CRL 1651); human embryonic kidney line (293 or 293 cells subcloned for growth in suspension culture, Graham et al., J. Gen Virol. 36:59 (1977)); baby hamster kidney cells (BHK, ATCC CCL 10); Chinese hamster ovary cells/ ⁇ DHFR (CHO, Urlaub et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77:4216 (1980)); mouse sertoli cells (TM4, Mather, Biol. Reprod.
  • COS-7 monkey kidney CV1 line transformed by SV40
  • human embryonic kidney line (293 or 293 cells subcloned for growth in suspension culture, Graham et al., J. Gen Virol. 36:59 (1977)
  • baby hamster kidney cells BHK, ATCC CCL 10
  • Chinese hamster ovary cells/ ⁇ DHFR CHO, Urlaub et al., Proc. Natl
  • monkey kidney cells (CV1 ATCC CCL 70); African green monkey kidney cells (VERO-76, ATCC CRL-1587); human cervical carcinoma cells (HELA, ATCC CCL 2); canine kidney cells (MDCK, ATCC CCL 34); buffalo rat liver cells (BRL 3A, ATCC CRL 1442); human lung cells (W138, ATCC CCL 75); human liver cells (Hep G2, HB 8065); mouse mammary tumor (MMT 060562, ATCC CCL51); TRI cells (Mather et al., Annals N.Y. Acad. Sci. 383:44-68 (1982)); MRC 5 cells; FS4 cells; and a human hepatoma line (Hep G2), the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • CV1 ATCC CCL 70 African green monkey kidney cells (VERO-76, ATCC CRL-1587); human cervical carcinoma cells (HELA, ATCC CCL 2); canine kidney cells (MDCK, ATCC CCL 34); buffalo rat
  • the protein of interest can be produced intracellularly, in the periplasmic space, or directly secreted into the medium.
  • the particulate debris either host cells or lysed cells (e.g., resulting from homogenization)
  • supernatants from such expression systems can be first concentrated using a commercially available protein concentration filter, e.g., an AmiconTM or Millipore PelliconTM ultrafiltration unit, which can then be subjected to one or more additional purification techniques, including but not limited to affinity chromatography, including protein A affinity chromatography, ion exchange chromatography, such as anion or cation exchange chromatography, and hydrophobic interaction chromatography.
  • a commercially available protein concentration filter e.g., an AmiconTM or Millipore PelliconTM ultrafiltration unit
  • additional purification techniques including but not limited to affinity chromatography, including protein A affinity chromatography, ion exchange chromatography, such as anion or cation exchange chromatography, and hydrophobic interaction chromatography.
  • on-line refers to processes that are accomplished in the context of an on-going cell culture run. For example, the administration of a particular nutrient or changes in temperature, pH, or dissolved oxygen level occur on-line when such administrations or changes are implemented in an existing cell culture run. Similarly, measurements of certain data are considered on-line if that data is being collected in the context of a particular cell culture run. For example, on-line gas analysis refers to the measurement of gases introduced into or released from a particular cell culture run.
  • off-line refers to actions taken outside the context of a particular cell culture run. For example, the production of cell culture media comprising specific concentrations of particular components is an example of an off-line activity.
  • modifying is intended to refer to changing one or more amino acids in the antibodies or antigen-binding portions thereof.
  • the change can be produced by adding, substituting or deleting an amino acid at one or more positions.
  • the change can be produced using known techniques, such as PCR mutagenesis.
  • control is intended to refer to both limitation as well as to modulation.
  • the instant invention provides methods for controlling diversity that decrease the diversity of certain characteristics of protein populations, including, but not limited to, the presence of acidic species. Such decreases in diversity can occur by: (1) promotion of a desired characteristic; (2) inhibition of an unwanted characteristic; or (3) a combination of the foregoing.
  • control also embraces contexts where heterogeneity is modulated, i.e., shifted, from one diverse population to a second population of equal, or even greater diversity, where the second population exhibits a distinct profile of the characteristic of interest.
  • antibody refers to an intact antibody or an antigen binding fragment thereof.
  • the antibodies of the present disclosure can be generated by a variety of techniques, including immunization of an animal with the antigen of interest followed by conventional monoclonal antibody methodologies e.g., the standard somatic cell hybridization technique of Kohler and Milstein (1975) Nature 256: 495. Although somatic cell hybridization procedures are preferred, in principle, other techniques for producing monoclonal antibody can be employed e.g., viral or oncogenic transformation of B lymphocytes.
  • hybridomas One preferred animal system for preparing hybridomas is the murine system.
  • Hybridoma production is a very well-established procedure. Immunization protocols and techniques for isolation of immunized splenocytes for fusion are known in the art. Fusion partners (e.g., murine myeloma cells) and fusion procedures are also known.
  • An antibody preferably can be a human, a chimeric, or a humanized antibody.
  • Chimeric or humanized antibodies of the present disclosure can be prepared based on the sequence of a non-human monoclonal antibody prepared as described above.
  • DNA encoding the heavy and light chain immunoglobulins can be obtained from the non-human hybridoma of interest and engineered to contain non-murine (e.g., human) immunoglobulin sequences using standard molecular biology techniques.
  • murine variable regions can be linked to human constant regions using methods known in the art (see e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567 to Cabilly et al.).
  • murine CDR regions can be inserted into a human framework using methods known in the art (see e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,225,539 to Winter, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,530,101; 5,585,089; 5,693,762 and 6,180,370 to Queen et al.).
  • the antibodies of this disclosure are human monoclonal antibodies.
  • Such human monoclonal antibodies can be generated using transgenic or transchromosomic mice carrying parts of the human immune system rather than the mouse system.
  • transgenic and transchromosomic mice include mice referred to herein as the HuMAb Mouse® (Medarex, Inc.), KM Mouse® (Medarex, Inc.), and XenoMouse® (Amgen).
  • mice carrying both a human heavy chain transchromosome and a human light chain transchromosome referred to as “TC mice” can be used; such mice are described in Tomizuka et al. (2000) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 97:722-727.
  • cows carrying human heavy and light chain transchromosomes have been described in the art (e.g., Kuroiwa et al. (2002) Nature Biotechnology 20:889-894 and PCT application No. WO 2002/092812) and can be used to raise antibodies of this disclosure.
  • Recombinant human antibodies of the invention can be isolated by screening of a recombinant combinatorial antibody library, e.g., a scFv phage display library, prepared using human VL and VH cDNAs prepared from mRNA derived from human lymphocytes.
  • a recombinant combinatorial antibody library e.g., a scFv phage display library
  • kits for generating phage display libraries e.g., the Pharmacia Recombinant Phage Antibody System, catalog no. 27-9400-01; and the Stratagene SurfZAPTM phage display kit, catalog no. 240612, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein
  • examples of methods and reagents particularly amenable for use in generating and screening antibody display libraries can be found in, e.g., Ladner et al. U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,409; Kang et al. PCT Publication No. WO 92/18619; Dower et al. PCT Publication No.
  • Human monoclonal antibodies of this disclosure can also be prepared using SCID mice into which human immune cells have been reconstituted such that a human antibody response can be generated upon immunization.
  • SCID mice into which human immune cells have been reconstituted such that a human antibody response can be generated upon immunization.
  • Such mice are described in, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,476,996 and 5,698,767 to Wilson et al.
  • the methods of the invention include anti-TNF ⁇ antibodies and antibody portions, anti-TNF ⁇ -related antibodies and antibody portions, and human antibodies and antibody portions with equivalent properties to anti-TNF ⁇ , such as high affinity binding to hTNF ⁇ with low dissociation kinetics and high neutralizing capacity.
  • the invention provides treatment with an isolated human antibody, or an antigen-binding portion thereof, that dissociates from hTNF ⁇ with a Kd of about 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 8 M or less and a Koff rate constant of 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 3 s ⁇ 1 or less, both determined by surface plasmon resonance.
  • an anti-TNF ⁇ antibody purified according to the invention competitively inhibits binding of Adalimumab to TNF ⁇ under physiological conditions.
  • Antibodies or fragments thereof can be altered wherein the constant region of the antibody is modified to reduce at least one constant region-mediated biological effector function relative to an unmodified antibody.
  • the immunoglobulin constant region segment of the antibody can be mutated at particular regions necessary for Fc receptor (FcR) interactions (see, e.g., Canfield and Morrison (1991) J. Exp. Med. 173:1483-1491; and Lund et al. (1991) J. of Immunol. 147:2657-2662, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein).
  • Reduction in FcR binding ability of the antibody may also reduce other effector functions which rely on FcR interactions, such as opsonization and phagocytosis and antigen-dependent cellular cytotoxicity.
  • DNAs encoding the protein are inserted into one or more expression vector such that the genes are operatively linked to transcriptional and translational control sequences.
  • operatively linked is intended to mean that a gene encoding the protein of interest is ligated into a vector such that transcriptional and translational control sequences within the vector serve their intended function of regulating the transcription and translation of the gene.
  • the expression vector and expression control sequences are chosen to be compatible with the expression host cell used.
  • the protein of interest will comprising multiple polypeptides, such as the heavy and light chains of an antibody.
  • genes encoding multiple polypeptides, such as antibody light chain genes and antibody heavy chain genes can be inserted into a separate vector or, more typically, the genes are inserted into the same expression vector.
  • Genes are inserted into expression vectors by standard methods (e.g., ligation of complementary restriction sites on the gene fragment and vector, or blunt end ligation if no restriction sites are present).
  • the expression vector may already carry additional polypeptide sequences, such as, but no limited to, antibody constant region sequences.
  • one approach to converting the anti-TNF ⁇ antibody or anti-TNF ⁇ antibody-related VH and VL sequences to full-length antibody genes is to insert them into expression vectors already encoding heavy chain constant and light chain constant regions, respectively, such that the VH segment is operatively linked to the CH segment(s) within the vector and the VL segment is operatively linked to the CL segment within the vector.
  • the recombinant expression vector can encode a signal peptide that facilitates secretion of the protein from a host cell.
  • the gene can be cloned into the vector such that the signal peptide is linked in-frame to the amino terminus of the gene.
  • the signal peptide can be an immunoglobulin signal peptide or a heterologous signal peptide (i.e., a signal peptide from a non-immunoglobulin protein).
  • a recombinant expression vector of the invention can carry one or more regulatory sequence that controls the expression of the protein coding genes in a host cell.
  • the term “regulatory sequence” is intended to include promoters, enhancers and other expression control elements (e.g., polyadenylation signals) that control the transcription or translation of the protein coding genes.
  • Such regulatory sequences are described, e.g., in Goeddel; Gene Expression Technology: Methods in Enzymology 185, Academic Press, San Diego, Calif. (1990), the entire teaching of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • Suitable regulatory sequences for mammalian host cell expression include viral elements that direct high levels of protein expression in mammalian cells, such as promoters and/or enhancers derived from cytomegalovirus (CMV) (such as the CMV promoter/enhancer), Simian Virus 40 (SV40) (such as the SV40 promoter/enhancer), adenovirus, (e.g., the adenovirus major late promoter (AdMLP)) and polyoma.
  • CMV cytomegalovirus
  • SV40 Simian Virus 40
  • AdMLP adenovirus major late promoter
  • a recombinant expression vector of the invention may carry one or more additional sequences, such as a sequence that regulates replication of the vector in host cells (e.g., origins of replication) and/or a selectable marker gene.
  • the selectable marker gene facilitates selection of host cells into which the vector has been introduced (see e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,399,216, 4,634,665 and 5,179,017, all by Axel et al., the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference).
  • the selectable marker gene confers resistance to drugs, such as G418, hygromycin or methotrexate, on a host cell into which the vector has been introduced.
  • Suitable selectable marker genes include the dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) gene (for use in dhfr ⁇ host cells with methotrexate selection/amplification) and the neo gene (for G418 selection).
  • DHFR dihydrofolate reductase
  • An antibody, or antibody portion, of the invention can be prepared by recombinant expression of immunoglobulin light and heavy chain genes in a host cell.
  • a host cell is transfected with one or more recombinant expression vectors carrying DNA fragments encoding the immunoglobulin light and heavy chains of the antibody such that the light and heavy chains are expressed in the host cell and secreted into the medium in which the host cells are cultured, from which medium the antibodies can be recovered.
  • Standard recombinant DNA methodologies are used to obtain antibody heavy and light chain genes, incorporate these genes into recombinant expression vectors and introduce the vectors into host cells, such as those described in Sambrook, Fritsch and Maniatis (eds), Molecular Cloning; A Laboratory Manual, Second Edition, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., (1989), Ausubel et al. (eds.) Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Greene Publishing Associates, (1989) and in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,816,397 & 6,914,128, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein.
  • the expression vector(s) encoding the protein is (are) transfected into a host cell by standard techniques.
  • the various forms of the term “transfection” are intended to encompass a wide variety of techniques commonly used for the introduction of exogenous DNA into a prokaryotic or eukaryotic host cell, e.g., electroporation, calcium-phosphate precipitation, DEAE-dextran transfection and the like.
  • Suitable host cells for cloning or expressing the DNA in the vectors herein are the prokaryote, yeast, or higher eukaryote cells described above.
  • Suitable prokaryotes for this purpose include eubacteria, such as Gram-negative or Gram-positive organisms, e.g., Enterobacteriaceae such as Escherichia , e.g., E. coli, Enterobacter, Erwinia, Klebsiella, Proteus, Salmonella , e.g., Salmonella typhimurium, Serratia , e.g., Serratia marcescans , and Shigella , as well as Bacilli such as B. subtilis and B.
  • Enterobacteriaceae such as Escherichia , e.g., E. coli, Enterobacter, Erwinia, Klebsiella, Proteus
  • Salmonella e.g., Salmonella typhimurium
  • E. coli cloning host is E. coli 294 (ATCC 31,446), although other strains such as E. coli B, E. coli X1776 (ATCC 31,537), and E. coli W3110 (ATCC 27,325) are suitable. These examples are illustrative rather than limiting.
  • eukaryotic microbes such as filamentous fungi or yeast are suitable cloning or expression hosts for polypeptide encoding vectors.
  • Saccharomyces cerevisiae or common baker's yeast, is the most commonly used among lower eukaryotic host microorganisms.
  • a number of other genera, species, and strains are commonly available and useful herein, such as Schizosaccharomyces pombe; Kluyveromyces hosts such as, e.g., K. lactis, K. fragilis (ATCC 12,424), K. bulgaricus (ATCC 16,045), K. wickeramii (ATCC 24,178), K.
  • waltii ATCC 56,500
  • K. drosophilarum ATCC 36,906
  • K. thermotolerans K. marxianus
  • yarrowia EP 402,226
  • Pichia pastoris EP 183,070
  • Candida Trichoderma reesia
  • Neurospora crassa Schwanniomyces such as Schwanniomyces occidentalis
  • filamentous fungi such as, e.g., Neurospora, Penicillium, Tolypocladium , and Aspergillus hosts such as A. nidulans and A. niger.
  • Suitable host cells for the expression of glycosylated proteins are derived from multicellular organisms.
  • invertebrate cells include plant and insect cells.
  • Numerous baculoviral strains and variants and corresponding permissive insect host cells from hosts such as Spodoptera frugiperda (caterpillar), Aedes aegypti (mosquito), Aedes albopictus (mosquito), Drosophila melanogaster (fruitfly), and Bombyx mori have been identified.
  • a variety of viral strains for transfection are publicly available, e.g., the L-1 variant of Autographa californica NPV and the Bm-5 strain of Bombyx mori NPV, and such viruses may be used as the virus herein according to the present invention, particularly for transfection of Spodoptera frugiperda cells.
  • Plant cell cultures of cotton, corn, potato, soybean, petunia, tomato, and tobacco can also be utilized as hosts.
  • Suitable mammalian host cells for expressing the recombinant proteins of the invention include Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO cells) (including dhfr ⁇ CHO cells, described in Urlaub and Chasin, (1980) PNAS USA 77:4216-4220, used with a DHFR selectable marker, e.g., as described in Kaufman and Sharp (1982) Mol. Biol. 159:601-621, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference), NS0 myeloma cells, COS cells and SP2 cells.
  • Chinese Hamster Ovary CHO cells
  • dhfr ⁇ CHO cells described in Urlaub and Chasin, (1980) PNAS USA 77:4216-4220, used with a DHFR selectable marker, e.g., as described in Kaufman and Sharp (1982) Mol. Biol. 159:601-621, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference
  • NS0 myeloma cells COS cells and SP2
  • the antibodies are produced by culturing the host cells for a period of time sufficient to allow for expression of the antibody in the host cells or secretion of the antibody into the culture medium in which the host cells are grown.
  • useful mammalian host cell lines are monkey kidney CV1 line transformed by SV40 (COS-7, ATCC CRL 1651); human embryonic kidney line (293 or 293 cells subcloned for growth in suspension culture, Graham et al., J. Gen Virol. 36:59 (1977)); baby hamster kidney cells (BHK, ATCC CCL 10); Chinese hamster ovary cells/ ⁇ DHFR (CHO, Urlaub et al., Proc.
  • mice sertoli cells TM4, Mather, Biol. Reprod. 23:243-251 (1980)); monkey kidney cells (CV1 ATCC CCL 70); African green monkey kidney cells (VERO-76, ATCC CRL-1587); human cervical carcinoma cells (HELA, ATCC CCL 2); canine kidney cells (MDCK, ATCC CCL 34); buffalo rat liver cells (BRL 3A, ATCC CRL 1442); human lung cells (W138, ATCC CCL 75); human liver cells (Hep G2, HB 8065); mouse mammary tumor (MMT 060562, ATCC CCL51); TRI cells (Mather et al., Annals N.Y. Acad. Sci. 383:44-68 (1982)); MRC 5 cells; FS4 cells; and a human hepatoma line (Hep G2), the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • Host cells are transformed with the above-described expression or cloning vectors for protein production and cultured in conventional nutrient media modified as appropriate for inducing promoters, selecting transformants, or amplifying the genes encoding the desired sequences.
  • the host cells used to produce a protein may be cultured in a variety of media.
  • Commercially available media such as Ham's F10TM (Sigma), Minimal Essential MediumTM (MEM), (Sigma), RPMI-1640 (Sigma), and Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's MediumTM (DMEM), (Sigma) are suitable for culturing the host cells.
  • any of these media may be supplemented as necessary with hormones and/or other growth factors (such as insulin, transferrin, or epidermal growth factor), salts (such as sodium chloride, calcium, magnesium, and phosphate), buffers (such as HEPES), nucleotides (such as adenosine and thymidine), antibiotics (such as gentamycin drug), trace elements (defined as inorganic compounds usually present at final concentrations in the micromolar range), and glucose or an equivalent energy source. Any other necessary supplements may also be included at appropriate concentrations that would be known to those skilled in the art.
  • the culture conditions such as temperature, pH, and the like, are those previously used with the host cell selected for expression, and will be apparent to the ordinarily skilled artisan.
  • Host cells can also be used to produce portions of intact proteins, for example, antibodies, including Fab fragments or scFv molecules. It is understood that variations on the above procedure are within the scope of the present invention. For example, in certain embodiments it may be desirable to transfect a host cell with DNA encoding either the light chain or the heavy chain (but not both) of an antibody. Recombinant DNA technology may also be used to remove some or all of the DNA encoding either or both of the light and heavy chains that is not necessary for binding to an antigen. The molecules expressed from such truncated DNA molecules are also encompassed by the antibodies of the invention.
  • bifunctional antibodies may be produced in which one heavy and one light chain are an antibody of the invention and the other heavy and light chain are specific for an antigen other than the target antibody, depending on the specificity of the antibody of the invention, by crosslinking an antibody of the invention to a second antibody by standard chemical crosslinking methods.
  • a recombinant expression vector encoding the protein for example, both an antibody heavy chain and an antibody light chain, is introduced into dhfr-CHO cells by calcium phosphate-mediated transfection.
  • the protein gene(s) are each operatively linked to CMV enhancer/AdMLP promoter regulatory elements to drive high levels of transcription of the gene(s).
  • the recombinant expression vector also carries a DHFR gene, which allows for selection of CHO cells that have been transfected with the vector using methotrexate selection/amplification.
  • the selected transformant host cells are cultured to allow for expression of the protein, for example, the antibody heavy and light chains, and intact protein, for example, an antibody, is recovered from the culture medium.
  • Standard molecular biology techniques are used to prepare the recombinant expression vector, transfect the host cells, select for transformants, culture the host cells and recover the protein from the culture medium.
  • the protein for example, antibodies or antigen binding fragments thereof, can be produced intracellularly, in the periplasmic space, or directly secreted into the medium.
  • the particulate debris either host cells or lysed cells (e.g., resulting from homogenization)
  • supernatants from such expression systems can be first concentrated using a commercially available protein concentration filter, e.g., an AmiconTM or Millipore PelliconTM ultrafiltration unit.
  • Numerous populations of proteins expressed by host cells may comprise a number of acidic species, and are therefore amenable to the instant invention's methods for control of acidic species heterogeneity.
  • adalimumab may comprise a number of acidic species, and are therefore amenable to the instant invention's methods for control of acidic species heterogeneity.
  • weak cation-exchange chromatography (WCX) analysis of adalimumab has shown the presence of acidic regions. These acidic species are classified as product-related impurities that are relatively acidic when compared to the adalimumab protein population. The presence of these acidic species provides an exemplary system to identify those cell culture conditions that allow for control over acidic species heterogeneity.
  • the variation in raw materials used in cell culture, particularly in the context of media preparation, can vary product quality significantly.
  • control of acidic species heterogeneity can be attained by adjustment of the media composition of the cell culture run.
  • such adjustment will be to increase the amount of one or more amino acids in the media
  • the necessary adjustment to achieve the desired control over acidic species heterogeneity will involve a decrease in the amount of one or more amino acids in the media.
  • Such increases or decreases in the amount of the one or more amino acids can be of a magnitude of 1%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, and ranges within one or more of the preceding, of the original amount.
  • a cell culture media will include one or more of the amino acids, or other compositions, described herein as facilitating a reduction in acidic species.
  • the amount of the amino acid, or other composition, that is necessary to be supplemented may be adjusted to account for the amount present in the media prior to supplementation.
  • the cell culture media is supplemented with one or more amino acids wherein each of the one or more amino acids is supplemented in an amount of between about 0.025 and 20 g/L, or between about 0.05 and 15 g/L, or between about 0.1 and 14 g/L, or between about 0.2 and 13 g/L, or between about 0.25 and 12 g/L, or between about 0.5 and 11 g/L, or between about 1 and 10 g/L, or between about 1.5 and 9.5 g/L, or between about 2 and 9 g/L, or between about 2.5 and 8.5 g/L, or between about 3 and 8 g/L, or between about 3.5 and 7.5 g/L, or between about 4 and 7 g/L, or between about 4.5 and 6.5 g/L, or between about 5 and 6 g/L.
  • the cell culture media is supplemented with one or more amino acids wherein each of the one or more amino acids is supplemented in an amount of about 0.25 g/L, or about 0.5 g/L, or about 1 g/L, or about 2 g/L, or about 4 g/L, or about 8 g/L.
  • the cell culture media is supplemented with one or more amino acids wherein each of the one or more amino acids is supplemented in an amount effective to reduce the amount of acidic species heterogeneity in a protein or antibody sample by about 1%, 1.2%, 1.5%, 2%, 2.2%, 2.5%, 3%, 3.2%, 3.5%, 4%, 4.2%, 4.5%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, and ranges within one or more of the preceding.
  • the one or more amino acids used to supplement the cell culture media is a basic amino acid.
  • the one or more amino acids is arginine, lysine, histidine, ornithine, or certain combinations of arginine or lysine with ornithine or of all four amino acids.
  • the amino acids are provided as single peptides, as dipeptides, as tripeptides or as longer oligopeptides.
  • the di-, tri-, and/or oligopeptides are individually composed of a single amino acid, while in alternative embodiments, the di-, tri-, and/or oligopeptides are individually composed of two or more particular amino acids.
  • the amount of amino acid supplemented to the cell culture to achieve concentrations of about 0 to about 9 g/l for arginine, about 0 to about 11 g/l for lysine, about 0 to about 11 g/l histidine, and about 0 to about 11 g/l ornithine.
  • concentrations of about 0 to about 9 g/l for arginine, about 0 to about 11 g/l for lysine, about 0 to about 11 g/l histidine, and about 0 to about 11 g/l ornithine.
  • Example 6.1 when the production medium employed in the example was supplemented with arginine to achieve a total concentration of 9 g/L arginine, the total amount of acidic species of adalimumab present in a cell culture sample after purification was reduced from 19.7% of a control sample to 12.2% of the sample purified from the cells cultured with the arginine supplemented media.
  • the production medium employed in the example was supplemented with lysine, or histidine, or ornithine to achieve total concentrations of 11 g/L lysine, 10 g/L ornithine or 10 g/L histidine, respectively, the total amount of acidic species of adalimumab present in a cell culture sample after purification was reduced by 11.5%, 10.4% and 10.9%, respectively, compared to a control sample.
  • control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing the media of cells expressing the protein of interest medium supplements described herein such that they can be included in the medium at the start of culture, or can be added in a fed-batch or in a continuous manner.
  • the feed amounts may be calculated to achieve a certain concentration based on offline or online measurements.
  • the supplements may be added as multimers, e.g., arg-arg, his-his, arg-his-orn, etc., and/or as chemical variants, e.g., of amino acids or analogs of amino acids, salt forms of amino acids, controlled release of amino acids by immobilizing in gels, etc, and/or in fully or partially dissolved form.
  • the addition of one or more supplement may be based on measured amount of acidic species.
  • the resulting media can be used in various cultivation methods including, but not limited to, batch, fed-batch, chemostat and perfusion, and with various cell culture equipment including, but not limited to, shake flasks with or without suitable agitation, spinner flasks, stirred bioreactors, airlift bioreactors, membrane bioreactors, reactors with cells retained on a solid support or immobilized/entrapped as in microporous beads, and any other configuration appropriate for optimal growth and productivity of the desired cell line.
  • the harvest criterion for these cultures may be chosen, for example based on choice of harvest viability or culture duration, to further optimize a certain targeted acidic species profile.
  • the cell culture media is supplemented with calcium (e.g., as calcium chloride dihydrate), wherein the calcium is supplemented to achieve a calcium concentration of between about 0.05 and 2.5 mM, or between about 0.05 and 1 mM, or between about 0.1 and 0.8 mM, or between about 0.15 and 0.7 mM, or between about 0.2 and 0.6 mM, or between about 0.25 and 0.5 mM, or between about 0.3 and 0.4 mM.
  • calcium e.g., as calcium chloride dihydrate
  • the cell culture media is supplemented with calcium (e.g., as calcium chloride dihydrate) wherein the calcium is supplemented in an amount effective to reduce the amount of acidic species heterogeneity in a protein or antibody sample by about 1%, 1.2%, 1.5%, 2%, 2.2%, 2.5%, 3%, 3.2%, 3.5%, 4%, 4.2%, 4.5%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, and ranges within one or more of the preceding.
  • calcium e.g., as calcium chloride dihydrate
  • Example 6.3 when the production medium employed in the example was supplemented with calcium (e.g., as calcium chloride dihydrate) at a concentration of 1.05 mM, the total amount of acidic species of adalimumab present in a cell culture sample after purification was reduced from 23.2% of a control sample to 16.5% of the sample purified from the cells cultured with the calcium supplemented media.
  • calcium e.g., as calcium chloride dihydrate
  • the cell culture can be supplemented with a combination of calcium, e.g., CaCl 2 , and one or more a basic amino acids.
  • the one or more basic amino acids is arginine, lysine, histidine, ornithine, or combinations of arginine or lysine with ornithine or of all four amino acids.
  • the amino acids are provided as single peptides, as dipeptides, as tripeptides or as longer oligopeptides.
  • the di-, tri-, and/or oligopeptides are individually composed of a single amino acid, while in alternative embodiments, the di-, tri-, and/or oligopeptides are individually composed of two or more particular amino acids.
  • the amount of basic amino acid concentrations in combination with calcium in the cell culture is between about 0 to about 9 g/l for arginine, about 0 to about 11 g/l for lysine, about 0 to about 11 g/l histidine, and about 0 to about 11 g/l ornithine.
  • the cell culture media is supplemented with niacinamide, wherein the niacinamide is supplemented to achieve a niacinamide concentration of between about 0.2 and 3.0 mM, or between about 0.4 and 3.0 mM, or between about 0.8 and 3.0 mM.
  • the cell culture media is supplemented with niacinamide wherein the niacinamide is supplemented in an amount effective to reduce the amount of acidic species heterogeneity in a protein or antibody sample by about 1%, 1.2%, 1.5%, 2%, 2.2%, 2.5%, 3%, 3.2%, 3.5%, 4%, 4.2%, 4.5%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, and ranges within one or more of the preceding.
  • Example 6.3 when the production medium employed in the example was supplemented with niacinamide at a concentration of 1.6 mM, the total amount of acidic species of adalimumab present in a cell culture sample after purification was reduced from 19.9% of a control sample to 15.9% of the sample purified from the cells cultured with the niacinamide supplemented media.
  • the total amount of acidic species of adalimumab present in a cell culture sample after purification was reduced from 27.0% of a control sample to 19.8% of the sample purified from the cells cultured with the niacinamide supplemented media.
  • the cell culture can be supplemented with a combination of niacinamide, calcium, e.g., CaCl 2 , and/or one or more a basic amino acids.
  • the one or more basic amino acids is arginine, lysine, histidine, ornithine, or combinations of arginine or lysine with ornithine or of all four amino acids.
  • the amino acids are provided as single peptides, as dipeptides, as tripeptides or as longer oligopeptides.
  • the di-, tri-, and/or oligopeptides are individually composed of a single amino acid, while in alternative embodiments, the di-, tri-, and/or oligopeptides are individually composed of two or more particular amino acids.
  • the amount of basic amino acid concentrations (after supplementation) in combination with calcium in the cell culture is between about 0 to about 9 g/l for arginine, about 0 to about 11 g/l for lysine, about 0 to about 11 g/l histidine, and about 0 to about 11 g/l ornithine.
  • control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing the media of cells expressing the protein of interest medium supplements described herein such that they can be included in the medium at the start of culture, or can be added in a fed-batch or in a continuous manner.
  • the feed amounts may be calculated to achieve a certain concentration based on offline or online measurements.
  • the addition of the supplement may be based on measured amount of acidic species.
  • Other salts of particular supplements, e.g., calcium may also be used, for example Calcium Nitrate.
  • the resulting media can be used in various cultivation methods including, but not limited to, batch, fed-batch, chemostat and perfusion, and with various cell culture equipment including, but not limited to, shake flasks with or without suitable agitation, spinner flasks, stirred bioreactors, airlift bioreactors, membrane bioreactors, reactors with cells retained on a solid support or immobilized/entrapped as in microporous beads, and any other configuration appropriate for optimal growth and productivity of the desired cell line.
  • various cell culture equipment including, but not limited to, shake flasks with or without suitable agitation, spinner flasks, stirred bioreactors, airlift bioreactors, membrane bioreactors, reactors with cells retained on a solid support or immobilized/entrapped as in microporous beads, and any other configuration appropriate for optimal growth and productivity of the desired cell line.
  • control over amount and/or rate of formation of acidic species is achieved by supplementing a clarified harvest.
  • a clarified harvest can be supplemented as described above (e.g., with calcium, niacinamide, and/or basic amino acids) to achieve a reduction the amount of acidic species and/or a reduction in the rate such acidic species form.
  • control of acidic species heterogeneity can be attained by adjustment of pH of the cell culture run.
  • such adjustment will be to decrease in the pH of the cell culture.
  • Such decreases in the pH can be of a magnitude of 1%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, and ranges within one or more of the preceding, of the original amount.
  • pH is either increased or decreased in order to increase or decrease the amount of acidic species and/or the rate at which such acidic species form.
  • a reduction in pH to 6.7 from a control pH of 7.1 can be employed to decrease the acidic species during cell culture and the rate of acidic species formation in the context of a clarified harvest.
  • the pH is maintained in such a manner as to reduce the amount of acidic species in a protein or antibody sample by about 1%, 1.2%, 1.5%, 2%, 2.2%, 2.5%, 3%, 3.2%, 3.5%, 4%, 4.2%, 4.5%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, and ranges within one or more of the preceding.
  • control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture can be exerted by maintaining the pH of the cell culture expressing the protein of interest as described herein along with choice of suitable temperature or temperature shift strategies, for example, but not limited to, lower process temperature of operation, temperature shift to a lower temperature or a temperature shift at an earlier culture time point.
  • culture conditions can be used in various cultivation methods including, but not limited to, batch, fed-batch, chemostat and perfusion, and with various cell culture equipment including, but not limited to, shake flasks with or without suitable agitation, spinner flasks, stirred bioreactors, airlift bioreactors, membrane bioreactors, reactors with cells retained on a solid support or immobilized/entrapped as in microporous beads, and any other configuration appropriate for optimal growth and productivity of the desired cell line.
  • cell culture equipment including, but not limited to, shake flasks with or without suitable agitation, spinner flasks, stirred bioreactors, airlift bioreactors, membrane bioreactors, reactors with cells retained on a solid support or immobilized/entrapped as in microporous beads, and any other configuration appropriate for optimal growth and productivity of the desired cell line.
  • These may also be used in combination with supplementation of culture media with amino acids, niacinamide, and/or calcium salt, as described
  • control of acidic species heterogeneity can be attained by the choice of cell culture methodology.
  • use of a continuous or perfusion technology may be utilized to achieve the desired control over acidic species heterogeneity.
  • this may be attained through choice of medium exchange rate (where the exchange rate is the rate of exchange of medium in/out of a reactor).
  • medium exchange rate where the exchange rate is the rate of exchange of medium in/out of a reactor.
  • Such increases or decreases in medium exchange rates may be of magnitude of 1%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, and ranges within one or more of the preceding, of the original amount.
  • maintenance of the medium exchange rates (working volumes/day) of a cell culture run between 0 and 20, or between 0.5 and 12 or between 1 and 8 or between 1.5 and 6 can be used to achieve the desired reduction in acidic species.
  • Example 6.4 when the medium exchange rate was chosen to be 1.5, the acidic species was 8.1%. With further increase in exchange rates to 6, a further reduction in acidic species to 6% was obtained.
  • the choice of cell culture methodology that allows for control of acidic species heterogeneity can also include, for example, but not by way of limitation, employment of an intermittent harvest strategy or through use of cell retention device technology.
  • the methods of the present invention can be used in combination with techniques for protein purification to provide for the production of a purified protein preparation, for example, a preparation comprising an antibody or an antigen binding fragment thereof, from a mixture comprising a protein and at least one process-related impurity or product-related substance.
  • separation of the protein of interest from the process-related impurities and/or product-related substances can be performed using a combination of different purification techniques, including, but not limited to, affinity separation steps, ion exchange separation steps, mixed mode separation steps, and hydrophobic interaction separation steps.
  • the separation steps separate mixtures of proteins on the basis of their charge, degree of hydrophobicity, or size.
  • separation is performed using chromatography, including cationic, anionic, and hydrophobic interaction.
  • each of the separation methods is that proteins can be caused either to traverse at different rates down a column, achieving a physical separation that increases as they pass further down the column, or to adhere selectively to the separation medium, being then differentially eluted by different solvents.
  • the antibody is separated from impurities when the impurities specifically adhere to the column and the antibody does not, i.e., the antibody is present in the flow through.
  • the separation steps of employed in connection with the cell culture methods of the instant invention facilitate the separation of an antibody from one or more process-related impurity and/or product-related substance.
  • Antibodies that can be successfully purified using the methods described herein include, but are not limited to, human IgA1, IgA2, IgD, IgE, IgG1, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, and IgM antibodies.
  • Protein A affinity chromatography can be useful, however, in certain embodiments, the use of Protein A affinity chromatography would prove useful, for example in the context of the purification of IgG3 antibodies, as IgG3 antibodies bind to Protein A inefficiently.
  • Other factors that allow for specific tailoring of a purification scheme include, but are not limited to: the presence or absence of an Fc region (e.g., in the context of full length antibody as compared to an Fab fragment thereof) because Protein A binds to the Fc region; the particular germline sequences employed in generating to antibody of interest; and the amino acid composition of the antibody (e.g., the primary sequence of the antibody as well as the overall charge/hydrophobicity of the molecule).
  • Antibodies sharing one or more characteristic can be purified using purification strategies tailored to take advantage of that characteristic.
  • the primary recovery process can also be a point at which to reduce or inactivate viruses that can be present in the sample mixture.
  • any one or more of a variety of methods of viral reduction/inactivation can be used during the primary recovery phase of purification including heat inactivation (pasteurization), pH inactivation, solvent/detergent treatment, UV and ⁇ -ray irradiation and the addition of certain chemical inactivating agents such as ⁇ -propiolactone or e.g., copper phenanthroline as in U.S. Pat. No. 4,534,972, the entire teaching of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the primary recovery may also include one or more centrifugation steps to further clarify the sample mixture and thereby aid in purifying the protein of interest.
  • Centrifugation of the sample can be run at, for example, but not by way of limitation, 7,000 ⁇ g to approximately 12,750 ⁇ g.
  • centrifugation can occur on-line with a flow rate set to achieve, for example, but not by way of limitation, a turbidity level of 150 NTU in the resulting supernatant. Such supernatant can then be collected for further purification.
  • the primary recovery may also include the use of one or more depth filtration steps to further clarify the sample matrix and thereby aid in purifying the antibodies produced using the cell culture techniques of the present invention.
  • Depth filters contain filtration media having a graded density. Such graded density allows larger particles to be trapped near the surface of the filter while smaller particles penetrate the larger open areas at the surface of the filter, only to be trapped in the smaller openings nearer to the center of the filter.
  • the depth filtration step can be a delipid depth filtration step.
  • certain embodiments employ depth filtration steps only during the primary recovery phase, other embodiments employ depth filters, including delipid depth filters, during one or more additional phases of purification.
  • Non-limiting examples of depth filters that can be used in the context of the instant invention include the CunoTM model 30/60ZA depth filters (3M Corp.), and 0.45/0.2 ⁇ m SartoporeTM bi-layer filter cartridges.
  • the chromatographic material is capable of selectively or specifically binding to the protein of interest.
  • Non-limiting examples of such chromatographic material include: Protein A, Protein G, chromatographic material comprising, for example, an antigen bound by an antibody of interest, and chromatographic material comprising an Fc binding protein.
  • the affinity chromatography step involves subjecting the primary recovery sample to a column comprising a suitable Protein A resin.
  • Protein A resin is useful for affinity purification and isolation of a variety of antibody isotypes, particularly IgG1, IgG2, and IgG4.
  • Protein A is a bacterial cell wall protein that binds to mammalian IgGs primarily through their Fc regions. In its native state, Protein A has five IgG binding domains as well as other domains of unknown function.
  • Protein A resin there are several commercial sources for Protein A resin.
  • One suitable resin is MabSelectTM from GE Healthcare.
  • a non-limiting example of a suitable column packed with MabSelectTM is an about 1.0 cm diameter ⁇ about 21.6 cm long column ( ⁇ 17 mL bed volume). This size column can be used for small scale purifications and can be compared with other columns used for scale ups. For example, a 20 cm ⁇ 21 cm column whose bed volume is about 6.6 L can be used for larger purifications. Regardless of the column, the column can be packed using a suitable resin such as MabSelectTM.
  • Ion exchange separation includes any method by which two substances are separated based on the difference in their respective ionic charges, and can employ either cationic exchange material or anionic exchange material.
  • a cationic exchange material versus an anionic exchange material is based on the localized charges of the protein. Therefore, it is within the scope of this invention to employ an anionic exchange step prior to the use of a cationic exchange step, or a cationic exchange step prior to the use of an anionic exchange step.
  • the initial protein mixture can be contacted with the ion exchange material by using any of a variety of techniques, e.g., using a batch purification technique or a chromatographic technique.
  • Anionic or cationic substituents may be attached to matrices in order to form anionic or cationic supports for chromatography.
  • anionic exchange substituents include diethylaminoethyl (DEAE), quaternary aminoethyl (QAE) and quaternary amine (Q) groups.
  • Cationic substituents include carboxymethyl (CM), sulfoethyl (SE), sulfopropyl (SP), phosphate (P) and sulfonate (S).
  • Cellulose ion exchange resins such as DE23TM, DE32TM, DE52TM, CM-23TM, CM-32TM, and CM-52TM are available from Whatman Ltd.
  • SEPHADEX®-based and -locross-linked ion exchangers are also known.
  • DEAE-, QAE-, CM-, and SP-SEPHADEX® and DEAE-, Q-, CM- and S-SEPHAROSE® and SEPHAROSE® Fast Flow are all available from Pharmacia AB.
  • DEAE and CM derivitized ethylene glycol-methacrylate copolymer such as TOYOPEARLTM DEAE-650S or M and TOYOPEARLTM CM-650S or M are available from Toso Haas Co., Philadelphia, Pa.
  • ultrafiltration and/or diafiltration it will be advantageous to subject a sample produced by the techniques of the instant invention to ultrafiltration and/or diafiltration in order to purify the protein of interest away from process-related impurities and/or product-related substances.
  • Ultrafiltration is described in detail in: Microfiltration and Ultrafiltration: Principles and Applications, L. Zeman and A. Zydney (Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., 1996); and in: Ultrafiltration Handbook, Munir Cheryan (Technomic Publishing, 1986; ISBN No. 87762-456-9).
  • a preferred filtration process is Tangential Flow Filtration as described in the Millipore catalogue entitled “Pharmaceutical Process Filtration Catalogue” pp. 177-202 (Bedford, Mass., 1995/96).
  • Ultrafiltration is generally considered to mean filtration using filters with a pore size of smaller than 0.1 ⁇ m. By employing filters having such small pore size, the volume of the sample can be reduced through permeation of the sample buffer through the filter while antibodies are retained behind the filter.
  • Diafiltration is a method of using ultrafilters to remove and exchange salts, sugars, and non-aqueous solvents, to separate free from bound species, to remove low molecular-weight material, and/or to cause the rapid change of ionic and/or pH environments.
  • Microsolutes are removed most efficiently by adding solvent to the solution being ultrafiltered at a rate approximately equal to the ultratfiltration rate. This washes microspecies from the solution at a constant volume, effectively purifying the retained protein.
  • a diafiltration step is employed to exchange the various buffers used in connection with the instant invention, optionally prior to further chromatography or other purification steps, as well as to remove impurities from the protein preparations.
  • hydrophobic interaction chromatography it will be advantageous to subject a sample produced by the techniques of the instant invention to hydrophobic interaction chromatography in order to purify the protein of interest away from process-related impurities and/or product-related substances.
  • a first eluate obtained from an ion exchange column can be subjected to a hydrophobic interaction material such that a second eluate having a reduced level of impurity is obtained.
  • Hydrophobic interaction chromatography (HIC) steps such as those disclosed herein, are generally performed to remove protein aggregates, such as antibody aggregates, and process-related impurities.
  • the sample mixture is contacted with the HIC material, e.g., using a batch purification technique or using a column.
  • HIC purification it may be desirable to remove any chaotropic agents or very hydrophobic substances, e.g., by passing the mixture through a pre-column.
  • hydrophobic interaction chromatography uses the hydrophobic properties of the protein. Hydrophobic groups on the protein interact with hydrophobic groups on the column. The more hydrophobic a protein is the stronger it will interact with the column. Thus the HIC step removes host cell derived impurities (e.g., DNA and other high and low molecular weight product-related species).
  • Hydrophobic interactions are strongest at high ionic strength, therefore, this form of separation is conveniently performed following salt precipitations or ion exchange procedures.
  • Adsorption of the protein of interest to a HIC column is favored by high salt concentrations, but the actual concentrations can vary over a wide range depending on the nature of the protein and the particular HIC ligand chosen.
  • Various ions can be arranged in a so-called soluphobic series depending on whether they promote hydrophobic interactions (salting-out effects) or disrupt the structure of water (chaotropic effect) and lead to the weakening of the hydrophobic interaction.
  • Cations are ranked in terms of increasing salting out effect as Ba ++ ; Ca ++ ; Mg ++ ; Li + ; Cs + ; Na + ; K + ; Rb + ; NH4 + , while anions may be ranked in terms of increasing chaotropic effect as PO ⁇ ; SO 4 ⁇ ; CH 3 CO 3 ⁇ ; Cl ⁇ ; Br ⁇ ; NO 3 ⁇ ; ClO 4 ⁇ ; I ⁇ ; SCN ⁇ .
  • Na, K or NH 4 sulfates effectively promote ligand-protein interaction in HIC.
  • Salts may be formulated that influence the strength of the interaction as given by the following relationship: (NH 4 ) 2 SO 4 >Na 2 SO 4 >NaCl>NH 4 Cl>NaBr>NaSCN.
  • salt concentrations of between about 0.75 and about 2 M ammonium sulfate or between about 1 and 4 M NaCl are useful.
  • HIC columns normally comprise a base matrix (e.g., cross-linked agarose or synthetic copolymer material) to which hydrophobic ligands (e.g., alkyl or aryl groups) are coupled.
  • a suitable HIC column comprises an agarose resin substituted with phenyl groups (e.g., a Phenyl SepharoseTM column).
  • phenyl groups e.g., a Phenyl SepharoseTM column.
  • Many HIC columns are available commercially.
  • Examples include, but are not limited to, Phenyl SepharoseTM 6 Fast Flow column with low or high substitution (Pharmacia LKB Biotechnology, AB, Sweden); Phenyl SepharoseTM High Performance column (Pharmacia LKB Biotechnology, AB, Sweden); Octyl SepharoseTM High Performance column (Pharmacia LKB Biotechnology, AB, Sweden); FractogelTM EMD Propyl or FractogelTM EMD Phenyl columns (E. Merck, Germany); Macro-PrepTM Mehyl or Macro-PrepTM t-Butyl Supports (Bio-Rad, California); WP HI-Propyl (C3)TM column (J. T. Baker, New Jersey); and ToyopearlTM ether, phenyl or butyl columns (TosoHaas, PA).
  • Phenyl SepharoseTM 6 Fast Flow column with low or high substitution Pharmacia LKB Biotechnology, AB, Sweden
  • Multimodal chromatography is chromatography that utilizes a multimodal media resin.
  • a resin comprises a multimodal chromatography ligand.
  • a ligand refers to a ligand that is capable of providing at least two different, but co-operative, sites which interact with the substance to be bound. One of these sites gives an attractive type of charge-charge interaction between the ligand and the substance of interest. The other site typically gives electron acceptor-donor interaction and/or hydrophobic and/or hydrophilic interactions.
  • Electron donor-acceptor interactions include interactions such as hydrogen-bonding, ⁇ - ⁇ , cation- ⁇ , charge transfer, dipole-dipole, induced dipole etc.
  • Multimodal chromatography ligands are also known as “mixed mode” chromatography ligands.
  • the multimodal chromatography resin is comprised of multimodal ligands coupled to an organic or inorganic support, sometimes denoted a base matrix, directly or via a spacer.
  • the support may be in the form of particles, such as essentially spherical particles, a monolith, filter, membrane, surface, capillaries, etc.
  • the support is prepared from a native polymer, such as cross-linked carbohydrate material, such as agarose, agar, cellulose, dextran, chitosan, konjac, carrageenan, gellan, alginate etc.
  • the support can be porous, and ligands are then coupled to the external surfaces as well as to the pore surfaces.
  • Such native polymer supports can be prepared according to standard methods, such as inverse suspension gelation (S Hjerten: Biochim Biophys Acta 79(2), 393-398 (1964).
  • the support can be prepared from a synthetic polymer, such as cross-linked synthetic polymers, e.g. styrene or styrene derivatives, divinylbenzene, acrylamides, acrylate esters, methacrylate esters, vinyl esters, vinyl amides etc.
  • Such synthetic polymers can be produced according to standard methods, see e.g. “Styrene based polymer supports developed by suspension polymerization” (R Arshady: Chimica e L'Industria 70(9), 70-75 (1988)).
  • Porous native or synthetic polymer supports are also available from commercial sources, such as Amersham Biosciences, Uppsala, Sweden.
  • the proteins for example, antibodies and antibody-portions, produced using the cell culture techniques of the instant invention can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration to a subject.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises a protein of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carrier includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like that are physiologically compatible.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include one or more of water, saline, phosphate buffered saline, dextrose, glycerol, ethanol and the like, as well as combinations thereof.
  • isotonic agents e.g., sugars, polyalcohols such as mannitol, sorbitol, or sodium chloride in the composition.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers may further comprise minor amounts of auxiliary substances such as wetting or emulsifying agents, preservatives or buffers, which enhance the shelf life or effectiveness of the antibody or antibody portion.
  • the protein compositions of the invention can be incorporated into a pharmaceutical composition suitable for parenteral administration.
  • the protein can be prepared as an injectable solution containing, e.g., 0.1-250 mg/mL antibody.
  • the injectable solution can be composed of either a liquid or lyophilized dosage form in a flint or amber vial, ampule or pre-filled syringe.
  • the buffer can be L-histidine approximately 1-50 mM, (optimally 5-10 mM), at pH 5.0 to 7.0 (optimally pH 6.0).
  • Other suitable buffers include but are not limited to sodium succinate, sodium citrate, sodium phosphate or potassium phosphate.
  • Sodium chloride can be used to modify the toxicity of the solution at a concentration of 0-300 mM (optimally 150 mM for a liquid dosage form).
  • Cryoprotectants can be included for a lyophilized dosage form, principally 0-10% sucrose (optimally 0.5-1.0%).
  • Other suitable cryoprotectants include trehalose and lactose.
  • Bulking agents can be included for a lyophilized dosage form, principally 1-10% mannitol (optimally 24%).
  • Stabilizers can be used in both liquid and lyophilized dosage forms, principally 1-50 mM L-methionine (optimally 5-10 mM).
  • Other suitable bulking agents include glycine, arginine, can be included as 0-0.05% polysorbate-80 (optimally 0.005-0.01%).
  • Additional surfactants include but are not limited to polysorbate 20 and BRIJ surfactants.
  • the pharmaceutical composition includes the protein at a dosage of about 0.01 mg/kg-10 mg/kg.
  • the dosages of the protein include approximately 1 mg/kg administered every other week, or approximately 0.3 mg/kg administered weekly. A skilled practitioner can ascertain the proper dosage and regime for administering to a subject.
  • compositions of this invention may be in a variety of forms. These include, e.g., liquid, semi-solid and solid dosage forms, such as liquid solutions (e.g., injectable and infusible solutions), dispersions or suspensions, tablets, pills, powders, liposomes and suppositories.
  • liquid solutions e.g., injectable and infusible solutions
  • dispersions or suspensions tablets, pills, powders, liposomes and suppositories.
  • Typical compositions are in the form of injectable or infusible solutions, such as compositions similar to those used for passive immunization of humans with other antibodies.
  • One mode of administration is parenteral (e.g., intravenous, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular).
  • the protein is administered by intravenous infusion or injection.
  • the protein is administered by intramuscular or subcutaneous injection.
  • compositions typically must be sterile and stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage.
  • the composition can be formulated as a solution, microemulsion, dispersion, liposome, or other ordered structure suitable to high drug concentration.
  • Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the active compound (i.e., protein, antibody or antibody portion) in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization.
  • dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle that contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above.
  • the methods of preparation are vacuum drying and spray-drying that yields a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
  • the proper fluidity of a solution can be maintained, e.g., by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants.
  • Prolonged absorption of injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent that delays absorption, e.g., monostearate salts and gelatin.
  • the protein of the present invention can be administered by a variety of methods known in the art, one route/mode of administration is subcutaneous injection, intravenous injection or infusion. As will be appreciated by the skilled artisan, the route and/or mode of administration will vary depending upon the desired results.
  • the active compound may be prepared with a carrier that will protect the compound against rapid release, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants, transdermal patches, and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • a controlled release formulation including implants, transdermal patches, and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Many methods for the preparation of such formulations are patented or generally known to those skilled in the art. See, e.g., Sustained and Controlled Release Drug Delivery Systems, J. R. Robinson, ed., Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, 1978, the entire teaching of which is
  • a protein of the invention may be orally administered, e.g., with an inert diluent or an assimilable edible carrier.
  • the compound (and other ingredients, if desired) may also be enclosed in a hard or soft shell gelatin capsule, compressed into tablets, or incorporated directly into the subject's diet.
  • the compounds may be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of ingestible tablets, buccal tablets, troches, capsules, elixirs, suspensions, syrups, wafers, and the like.
  • Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions.
  • a protein of the invention is co-formulated with and/or co-administered with one or more additional therapeutic agents that are useful for treating disorders.
  • an antibody or antibody portion of the invention may be co-formulated and/or co-administered with one or more additional antibodies that bind other targets (e.g., antibodies that bind other cytokines or that bind cell surface molecules).
  • one or more antibodies of the invention may be used in combination with two or more of the foregoing therapeutic agents.
  • Such combination therapies may advantageously utilize lower dosages of the administered therapeutic agents, thus avoiding possible toxicities or complications associated with the various monotherapies.
  • a lower dosage of protein may be desirable than when the protein alone is administered to a subject (e.g., a synergistic therapeutic effect may be achieved through the use of combination therapy which, in turn, permits use of a lower dose of the protein to achieve the desired therapeutic effect).
  • the protein of the invention can be used alone or in combination with an additional agent, e.g., a therapeutic agent, said additional agent being selected by the skilled artisan for its intended purpose.
  • the additional agent can be a therapeutic agent art-recognized as being useful to treat the disease or condition being treated by the protein of the present invention.
  • the additional agent also can be an agent which imparts a beneficial attribute to the therapeutic composition, e.g., an agent which effects the viscosity of the composition.
  • Dosage regimens may be adjusted to provide the optimum desired response (e.g., a therapeutic or prophylactic response). For example, a single bolus may be administered, several divided doses may be administered over time or the dose may be proportionally reduced or increased as indicated by the exigencies of the therapeutic situation. In certain embodiments it is especially advantageous to formulate parenteral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage.
  • Dosage unit form as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the mammalian subjects to be treated; each unit comprising a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier.
  • An exemplary, non-limiting range for a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a protein of the invention is 0.01-20 mg/kg, or 1-10 mg/kg, or 0.3-1 mg/kg. It is to be noted that dosage values may vary with the type and severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions, and that dosage ranges set forth herein are exemplary only and are not intended to limit the scope or practice of the claimed composition.
  • Production of recombinant proteins by host cells can result in product-related charge heterogeneities present in the population of proteins produced by the cells.
  • the presence of acidic species in the population of proteins is an example of a product-related charge heterogeneity.
  • Control of the amount of acidic species present in the population of proteins produced by the host cells can be accomplished by modifying the culture conditions of the host cells.
  • adalimumab producing cell lines Three adalimumab producing cell lines, one mAb1 producing cell line and one mAb2 producing were employed in the studies covered here.
  • adalimumab producing cell lines cells were cultured in their respective growth media (chemically defined media (media 1) or a hydrolysate based media (media 2 or media 3)) in a combination of vented non-baffled shake flasks (Corning) on a shaker platform at 110 RPM (cell line 1), 180 RPM (cell line 2), 140 RPM (cell line 3) and 10 L or 20 L wave bags (GE).
  • RPM cell line 1
  • GE 10 L or 20 L wave bags
  • mAb1 producing cell line cells were cultured in chemically defined growth media (media 1) in a combination of vented non-baffled shake flasks (Corning) on a shaker platform at 130 RPM and 20 L wave bags (GE). Cultures were propagated in a 36° C., 5% CO 2 incubator to obtain the required number of cells to be able to initiate production stage cultures.
  • media 1 chemically defined growth media
  • GE vented non-baffled shake flasks
  • mAb2 producing cell line cells were cultured in chemically defined growth media (media 1) in a combination of vented non-baffled shake flasks (Corning) on a shaker platform at 140 RPM and 20 L wave bags (GE). Cultures were propagated in a 35° C., 5% CO 2 incubator to obtain the required number of cells to be able to initiate production stage cultures.
  • media 1 chemically defined growth media
  • GE vented non-baffled shake flasks
  • Growth and production media were prepared from either a chemically defined media formulation (media 1) or hydrolysate-based medium formulations (media 2 and media 3).
  • media 1 the media (IVGN GIA-1, a proprietary basal media formulation from Invitrogen) was supplemented with L-glutamine, sodium bicarbonate, sodium chloride, and methotrexate solution.
  • Production media consisted of all the components in the growth medium, excluding methotrexate.
  • both growth and production medium were also supplemented with insulin.
  • the growth medium were also supplemented with insulin.
  • the growth media was composed of PFCHO (proprietary chemically defined formulation from SAFC), Dextrose, L-Glutamine, L-Asparagine, HEPES, Poloxamer 188, Ferric Citrate, Recombinant Human Insulin, Yeastolate (BD), Phytone Peptone (BD), Mono- and Di-basic Sodium Phosphate, Sodium Bicarbonate, Sodium Chloride and methotrexate.
  • Production media consisted of all the components listed in the growth medium, excluding methotrexate.
  • the growth media was composed of OptiCHO (Invitrogen), L-Glutamine, Yeastolate (BD), Phytone Peptone (BD) and methotrexate. Production media consisted of all the components listed in the growth medium, excluding methotrexate.
  • Amino acids used for the experiments were reconstituted in Milli-Q water to make a 100 g/L stock solution, which was subsequently supplemented to both growth and production basal media. After addition of amino acids, media was brought to a pH similar to unsupplemented (control) media using 5N hydrochloric acid/5N NaOH, and it was brought to an osmolality similar to unsupplemented (control) media by adjusting the concentration of sodium chloride.
  • Calcium Chloride Dihydrate (Sigma or Fluka) used for the experiments were reconstituted in Milli-Q water to make a stock solution, which was subsequently supplemented to the production basal media. After addition of calcium chloride, media was brought to a pH similar to non-supplemented (control) media using 6N hydrochloric acid/5N NaOH, and it was brought to an osmolality similar to non-supplemented (control) media by adjusting the concentration of sodium chloride.
  • Niacinamide (Sigma or Calbiochem) used for the experiments were reconstituted in Milli-Q water to make a stock solution, which was subsequently supplemented to the production basal media. After addition of niacinamide, media was brought to a pH similar to non-supplemented (control) media using 6N hydrochloric acid/5N NaOH, and it was brought to an osmolality similar to non-supplemented (control) media by adjusting the concentration of sodium chloride.
  • Cultures were run in either batch or fed-batch mode. In the batch mode, cells were cultured in the respective production medium. 1.25% (v/v) of 40% glucose stock solution was fed when the media glucose concentration reduced to less than 3 g/L. In the fed-batch mode, cultures were run with either the IVGN feed (proprietary chemically defined feed formulation from Invitrogen) as per the following feed schedule—(4% (v/v)—day 6, day 7, and day 8, respectively) along with 10 ⁇ Ex-Cell PFCHO feed (proprietary chemically defined formulation)—3% (v/v) on day 3. The cultures were also fed with 1.25% (v/v) of 40% glucose stock solution when the glucose concentration was below 3.0 g/l.
  • IVGN feed proprietary chemically defined feed formulation from Invitrogen
  • Retention samples for titer analysis were collected daily for the bioreactor experiments (section 2.2.4) beginning on Day 8, and frozen at ⁇ 80° C. The samples taken from each were later submitted for titer analysis.
  • the harvest procedure of the shake flasks and reactors involved centrifugation of the culture sample at 3,000 RPM for 30 min and storage of supernatant in PETG bottles at ⁇ 80° C. before submission for protein A purification and WCX-10 analysis.
  • the mobile phases used were 10 mM Sodium Phosphate dibasic pH 7.5 (Mobile phase A) and 10 mM Sodium Phosphate dibasic, 500 mM Sodium Chloride pH 5.5 (Mobile phase B).
  • a binary gradient (94% A, 6% B: 0-20 min; 84% A, 16% B: 20-22 min; 0% A, 100% B: 22-28 min; 94% A, 6% B: 28-34 min) was used with detection at 280 nm.
  • the mobile phases used were 20 mM (4-Morpholino)ethanesulfonic Acid Monohydrate (MES) pH 6.5 (Mobile phase A) and 20 mM MES, 500 mM Sodium Chloride pH 6.5 (Mobile phase B).
  • MES 4-Morpholino)ethanesulfonic Acid Monohydrate
  • MES MES
  • 500 mM Sodium Chloride pH 6.5 Mobile phase B
  • An optimized gradient (minute/% B): 0/3, 1/3, 46/21, 47/100, 52/100, 53/3, 58/3 was used with detection at 280 nm.
  • Quantitation is based on the relative area percent of detected peaks.
  • the peaks that elute at relative residence time earlier than the main peak corresponding to the drug product are together represented as the acidic peaks ( FIG. 1 ).
  • Typical trypsin digestion employed almost universally for peptide mapping cuts a denatured, reduced and alkylated protein at the carboxyl side of the two basic amino acids, lysine and arginine.
  • Methylglyoxal is a small molecule metabolite derived as a glycolysis byproduct which can modify arginine residues.
  • a modification of an arginine prevents trypsin from cutting this site and results in a mis-cleavage.
  • the challenge of quantifying the amount of MGO modified peptide is that it is not compared to an equivalent non-modified peptide but rather two parental cleaved peptides which will likely have different ionization potential than the modified peptide.
  • Samples are diluted to a nominal concentration of 4 mg/mL. 8 M guanidine-HCl is added to the sample in a 3:1 ratio resulting in a 1 mg/mL concentration in 6M guanidine-HCl. The samples are reduced with 10 mM final conc. DTT for 30 minutes at 37° C. followed by an alkylation with 25 mM final conc. iodoacetic acid for 30 minutes at 37° C. in the dark. The samples are then buffer exchanged into 10 mM Tris pH 8.0 using NAP-5 columns. The samples are then digested for 4 hours at 37° C. using endoproteinase Lys-C at an enzyme to protein ratio of 1:20.
  • the digest is quenched by adding 5 ⁇ L of formic acid to each sample.
  • Samples are analyzed by LC/MS peptide mapping. Briefly, 50 ⁇ L of sample is loaded onto a Waters BEH C18 1.7 ⁇ 1.0 ⁇ 150 mm UPLC column with 98% 0.08% formic acid, 0.02% TFA in water and 2% 0.08% formic acid, 0.02% TFA in acetonitrile. The composition is changed to 65% 0.08% formic acid, 0.02% TFA in water and 35% 0.08% formic acid, 0.02% TFA in acetonitrile in 135 minutes using a Waters Acquity UPLC system.
  • arginine was tested in several experimental systems covering multiple cell lines, media and monoclonal antibodies. Following is a detailed description of two representative experiments where two different adalimumab producing cell lines were cultured in a chemically defined media (media 1).
  • Cell line 2 was cultured in media 1 with different total amounts of arginine (1 (control), 1.25, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 9 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 18-22 ⁇ 10 6 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. The growth and viability profiles were comparable between the different test conditions, although a slight decrease in viable cell density profile was observed in samples with the 9 g/l arginine test condition ( FIGS. 1, 2 ). The harvest titers were comparable between the conditions ( FIG. 3 ).
  • Cell line 3 was cultured in media 1 with different total amounts of arginine (1 (control), 3, 5, 7, 9 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 7-10 ⁇ 10 6 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. The growth and viability profiles were comparable between the different test conditions, although a slight decrease in viable cell density and viability profiles was observed in samples with the 9 g/l arginine condition ( FIG. 6, 7 ). The product titer was also comparable between all conditions ( FIG. 8 ).
  • VCD viable cell densities
  • lysine was tested in several experimental systems covering multiple cell lines, media and monoclonal antibodies. Following is a detailed description of two representative experiments where two different cell lines were cultured in a chemically defined media (media 1) for the production of adalimumab.
  • Cell line 2 was cultured in media 1 with different total concentrations of lysine (1 (control), 5, 7, 9, 11 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 17-23 ⁇ 10 6 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. A slight dose dependent decrease in viable cell density profile was observed in all samples with respect to the control sample ( FIG. 17 ). The viability profiles were comparable between the conditions ( FIG. 18 ). On Days 10 and 11 of culture samples were collected for titer analysis ( FIG. 19 ). The titers for all conditions were comparable.
  • VCD viable cell densities
  • Cell line 3 was cultured in media 1 with different total concentrations of lysine (1 (control), 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 9.5-11.5 ⁇ 10 6 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. The growth and viability profiles were comparable between the different test conditions, although a slight decrease in viable cell density and viability profiles was observed in samples with higher lysine concentrations than that in the control sample ( FIG. 21, 22 ). On Days 10, 11 and 12 of culture samples were collected for titer analysis ( FIG. 23 ). The titers for all conditions were comparable.
  • VCD viable cell densities
  • the carboxypeptidase treatment of the samples resulted in the cleavage of the C-terminal lysine residues as demonstrated by the conversion of Lys1/Lys2 to Lys 0 in each of these samples (data not shown here).
  • the acidic species quantified in these samples corresponded to an aggregate sum of acidic species that would be expected to also include those species that may have previously shifted corresponding to the lysine variant shift and perhaps gone unaccounted for in the samples that were not treated with carboxypeptidase prior to WCX-10.
  • histidine was tested in several experimental systems covering multiple cell lines, media and monoclonal antibodies. Following is a detailed description of two representative experiments where two different cell lines were cultured in a chemically defined media (media 1) for the production of adalimumab.
  • Cell line 2 was cultured in media 1 with different total concentrations of histidine (0 (control), 4, 6, 8, 10 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 12-22 ⁇ 10 6 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. A dose dependent decrease in viable cell density profile was observed with the 10 g/l histidine condition having significant reduction in growth ( FIG. 32 ). A corresponding effect on viability was also observed ( FIG. 33 ). On Days 10, 11 and 12 of culture samples were collected for titer analysis and reported for the harvest day for each sample ( FIG. 34 ).
  • VCD viable cell densities
  • Cell line 3 was cultured in media 1 with different total concentrations of histidine (0 (control), 2, 4, 6, 8 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 6-10 ⁇ 10 6 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. A dose dependent decrease in viable cell density profile was observed in all conditions with histidine concentrations higher than that in the control ( FIG. 36 ). The viability profiles were more comparable between conditions with this cell line ( FIG. 37 ). On Day 12 of culture, samples were collected for titer analysis ( FIG. 38 ). The titers for all conditions were comparable.
  • VCD viable cell densities
  • FIGS. 40, 41, 42 The summaries of results of the different experiments performed for adalimumab are summarized in FIGS. 40, 41, 42 .
  • a reduction in acidic species with increased histidine concentration was observed with cell line 1 in media 1 ( FIG. 40 ) and with cell line 2 in media 3 ( FIG. 42 ).
  • cell line 2 in media 3 For cell line 2 in media 3, a dose dependent reduction in acidic species was observed upto 4 g/l histidine, with no further significant reduction at higher concentrations of histidine ( FIG. 42 ).
  • ornithine was tested in several experimental systems covering multiple cell lines, media and monoclonal antibodies. Following is a detailed description of two representative experiments where two different cell lines were employed in a chemically defined media (media 1) for the production of adalimumab.
  • Cell line 2 was cultured in media 1 with different total concentrations of ornithine (0 (control), 4, 6, 8, 10 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 15-22 ⁇ 10 6 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. A slight decrease in viable cell density with ornithine supplementation was observed ( FIG. 47 ). Corresponding differences in the viability profiles were also observed ( FIG. 48 ). On Day 11 of culture, samples were collected for titer analysis ( FIG. 49 ). The titers for all conditions were comparable.
  • VCD maximum viable cell densities
  • Cell line 3 was cultured in media 1 supplemented with different total concentrations of ornithine (0 (control), 2, 4, 6, 8 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 9.5-11.5 ⁇ 10 6 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. The viable cell density and viability profiles were comparable ( FIG. 51, 52 ). On Day 12 of culture, samples were collected for titer analysis ( FIG. 53 ). The titers for all conditions were comparable.
  • VCD viable cell densities
  • the increase of the amino acid (arginine, lysine) concentration in basal media may also be combined with choice of when to harvest a culture to achieve optimal reduction in total acidic species.
  • a study was carried out in 3 L bioreactors with cell line 1 (producing adalimumab) in media 1. Two sets of conditions were tested: Control condition (Arginine 1 g/l, Lysine 1 g/l); Test condition 1 (Arginine 3 g/l, Lysine 5 g/l). Cell growth, viability and titer profiles were comparable between the conditions ( FIG. 63, 64, 65 ).
  • a small amount of cell culture harvests were collected every day from day 4 to day 10 from each of the reactors and submitted for protein A purification and WCX-10 analysis.
  • the percentage of acidic species in the control condition increased from 12.1% (on day 4) to 24.6% (on day 10) ( FIG. 66 ).
  • the percentage of acidic species in the test condition 1 was lower than that observed in the control condition at each corresponding culture day.
  • the percentage of acidic species in the test condition also increased from 8.7% (day 4) to 18.8% (day 10).
  • the rate of increase in acidic species with culture duration also correlated with the drop in viability for both conditions, with a sharp increase on day 8.
  • choice of harvest day/harvest viability can be used in combination to achieve a desired acidic species reduction.
  • the increase of the amino acid (arginine, lysine) concentration in basal media may be combined with process pH modulation to achieve further reduction in total acidic species.
  • process pH modulation to achieve further reduction in total acidic species.
  • a study was carried out in 3 L bioreactors with cell line 1 (producing adalimumab) in media 1.
  • Control condition (Arginine (1 g/l), Lysine (1 g/l), pH 7.1->6.9 in 3 days, pH 6.9 thereafter); Test condition 1 (Arginine (3 g/l), Lysine (3 g/l), pH 7.1->6.9 in 3 days, pH 6.9 thereafter); Test condition 2 (Arginine (3 g/l), Lysine (3 g/l), pH 7.1->6.8 in 3 days, pH 6.8 thereafter).
  • Test condition 2 (Arginine (3 g/l), Lysine (3 g/l), pH 7.1->6.8 in 3 days, pH 6.8 thereafter).
  • a slight decrease in VCD profile and harvest titer was observed for condition 2 ( FIG. 67, 68, 69 ).
  • the cultures were harvested when the viability was less than 50% and the culture harvests were submitted for protein A and WCX-10 analysis.
  • the percentage of acidic species in the control sample was 19.1%.
  • the percentage of acidic species was reduced to 14.3% in test condition 1 and to 12.8% in test condition 2 ( FIG. 70 ).
  • this demonstrates that the increase of amino acid concentration along with choice of lower final process pH can be used in combination for further reducing the extent of acidic species.
  • Cell line 2 was cultured in media 1 with different concentrations of calcium (0.14, 0.84 and 1.54 mM). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 22-24.5 ⁇ 10 6 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. The viable cell density and viability profiles for all test conditions were comparable ( FIG. 71, 72 ). On Day 10 of culture samples were collected for titer analysis ( FIG. 73 ). The titers for all conditions were comparable.
  • VCD viable cell densities
  • Cell line 3 was cultured in media 1 with different total concentrations of calcium (0.14, 0.49, 0.84, 1.19, 1.54, 1.89 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 9.5-10.5 ⁇ 10 6 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. The viable cell density and viability profiles for all test conditions were comparable ( FIG. 75, 76 ). On Day 11 of culture, samples were collected for titer analysis. The harvest titers for all conditions were comparable ( FIG. 77 ).
  • VCD viable cell densities
  • Niacinamide Supplementation to Cell Culture Media for Acidic Species Reduction
  • niacinamide in addition to the use of niacinamide in combination with other supplements described in the previous section, niacinamide addition may also be used independent of the other supplements as demonstrated in the experiments below for two mAbs: adalimumab and mAb1.
  • Cell line 1 was cultured in media 1 supplemented with different amounts of niacinamide (0, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 and 1.6 mM). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 8.5-11 ⁇ 10 6 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. A slight decrease in the viable cell density profile was observed with the maximum niacinamide supplementation (1.6 mM for this experiment) ( FIG. 85 ). The viability profile for the test conditions were comparable ( FIG. 86 ). On Day 12 of culture, samples were collected for titer analysis.
  • VCD maximum viable cell densities
  • a mAB2 producing cell line was cultured in media 1 supplemented with different amounts of niacinamide (0, 0.1, 0.5, 1.0, 3.0 and 6.0 mM).
  • the cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods.
  • the cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 14-21.5 ⁇ 10 6 cells/ml for the different conditions tested.
  • VCD maximum viable cell densities
  • a slight decrease in the viable cell density profile was observed for the conditions with 3.0 mM and 6.0 mM niacinamide concentrations ( FIG. 90 ).
  • the viability profiles for all test conditions were comparable (FIG. 91 ).
  • medium additives may be used to specifically reduce particular acidic variants within the larger fraction of total acidic species.
  • Table 4 a summary of the extent of some of the sub-species of the acidic species fraction have been presented for a representative set of experiments for adalimumab.
  • the methods presented in this section may also be used for reduction of sub-species that include, but not limited to, AR1, AR2 and MGO (methylglyoxal) modified product variants.
  • the different experiments above demonstrate that supplementation of cell culture medium with supplemental amounts of amino acids, calcium chloride and niacinamide enhances product quality by decreasing the amount of acidic species in the culture harvest.
  • the amino acids included in the study were arginine, lysine, ornithine and histidine and belong to group of amino acids that are basic.
  • the study covered examples from multiple cell lines/molecules, in shake flasks and bioreactors and in batch and fed-batch culture formats. A dose dependent effect in the extent of reduction of acidic species with increasing concentrations of the supplements was observed.
  • the possibility to supplement these medium additives individually or in suitable combinations for acidic species reduction was also demonstrated.
  • adalimumab producing CHO cell lines and a mAB2 producing cell line were employed in the studies covered here.
  • adalimumab producing cell line 3 was cultured in chemically defined growth media (media 1) in a combination of vented shake flasks on a shaker platform @140 rpm and 20 L wave bags. Cultures were propagated in a 36° C., 5% CO 2 incubator to obtain the required number of cells to be able to initiate production stage cultures.
  • adalimumab producing cell line 1 was cultured in a hydrolysate based growth media (media 2) in a combination of vented shake flasks on a shaker platform @ 110 rpm and 20 L wavebags in a 35° C., 5% CO 2 incubator.
  • the culture might be transferred into a seed reactor with pH 7.1, 35° C. and 30% DO.
  • the culture would be adapted to either media for media 2 by propagated in a 10 L or 20 L wavebag for 7-13 days with one or two passages before initiating production stage cultures.
  • mAb2 producing cells were cultured in media 1 in a combination of vented non-baffled shake flasks (Corning) on a shaker platform at 140 RPM and 20 L wave bags (GE). Cultures were propagated in a 35° C., 5% CO 2 incubator to obtain the required number of cells to be able to initiate production stage cultures.
  • Media 1 the chemical defined growth or production media, was prepared from basal IVGN CD media (proprietary formulation).
  • the proprietary media was supplemented with L-glutamine, sodium bicarbonate, sodium chloride, and methotrexate solution.
  • Production media consisted of all the components in the growth medium, excluding methotrexate.
  • the medium was also supplemented with insulin.
  • 10 mM or 5 mM of Galactose (Sigma, G5388) and 0.2 ⁇ M or 1004 of Manganese (Sigma, M1787) were supplemented into production medium for cell line 3 or 1, respectively. Osmolality was adjusted by the concentration of sodium chloride. All media was filtered through filter systems (0.22 ⁇ m PES) and stored at 4° C. until usage.
  • Media 2 is the hydrolysate based media, which contains basal proprietary media, Bacto TC Yeastolate and Phytone Peptone.
  • the harvest procedure of reactors involved centrifugation of the culture sample at 3,000 RPM for 30 min and storage of supernatant in PETG bottles at ⁇ 80° C. before submission for protein A purification and WCX-10 analysis.
  • the WCX-10 method used for mAb B used different buffers.
  • the mobile phases used were 20 mM (4-Morpholino) ethanesulfonic Acid Monohydrate (MES) pH 6.5 (Mobile phase A) and 20 mM MES, 500 mM Sodium Chloride pH 6.5 (Mobile phase B).
  • Quantitation is based on the relative area percent of detected peaks.
  • the peaks that elute at relative residence time earlier than the main peak corresponding to the drug product are together represented as the acidic peaks.
  • the present study describes a process for reducing and controlling levels of acidic species in antibody preparations.
  • the invention provides a method for reducing the acidic variant content in clarified harvest, as well as a method for reducing the formation rate of acidic species in clarified harvest.
  • the method involves adding additives like various amino acids to clarified harvest or adjusting the pH of the clarified harvest using acidic substances.
  • Clarified harvest is liquid material containing a monoclonal antibody of interest that has been extracted from a fermentation bioreactor after undergoing centrifugation to remove large solid particles and subsequent filtration to remove finer solid particles and impurities from the material. Clarified harvest was used for low pH treatment studies described herein. Clarified harvest was also used for the experiments to study the effect of amino acid concentration on the presence of acidic species in clarified harvest, and for acid type-pH treatment studies described herein. Different batches of mAB-B and mAb-C clarified harvest material were employed for experiments to study the effect of amino acid and low pH treatment studies on the presence of acidic species described herein.
  • the clarified harvest material was first adjusted to pH 4 using 3M citric acid.
  • the material at pH 4 was then agitated for 60 minutes before adjusting the pH to a target pH of 5, 6 or 7 with 3M sodium hydroxide.
  • the material was then agitated for a further 60 minutes.
  • the samples were then subjected to centrifugation at 7300 ⁇ g for 15 minutes in a Sorvall Evolution RC with an SLA-3000 centrifuge bowl.
  • the supernatants obtained from the centrifuged material were then depth filtered using B1HC depth filters (Millipore) followed by 0.22 ⁇ m sterile filters.
  • the filtrates of different pH were then subjected to holding for different period of time for evaluating the formation rate of acidic variants.
  • the material was purified with Protein A affinity column and the eluate was sampled and analyzed using the WCX 10 method.
  • the preparation scheme is shown below in FIG. 106 .
  • the material to study the effect of arginine on acidic species was prepared in two ways. For lower target arginine concentrations of 5 mM, 10 mM, 30 mM and 100 mM, they were made by adding the appropriate amount of 0.5M arginine stock buffer at pH 7 (pH adjusted with acetic acid) to attain the target arginine concentrations needed. For higher target arginine concentrations of 50 mM, 100 mM, 300 mM, 500 mM, 760 mM, 1M and 2M, they were made by adding the appropriate amount of arginine (solid) to the samples to attain the target arginine concentrations, with subsequent titration to a final pH of 7 using glacial acetic acid.
  • Arginine was adjusted to a final concentration of 100 mM using the two methods to determine if the method of preparation would result in different effects.
  • treated clarified harvests were held at room temperature for the indicated duration followed by purification with Protein A column and analysis of charge variants. This study provided two results; (1) data of samples from Day 0 gave the effects of arginine on reducing acidic species in clarified harvest, (2) data of samples with different holding days gave effect of arginine on reducing the formation rate of acidic species.
  • the preparation scheme is shown in FIG. 107 .
  • the material to study the effect of histidine was prepared with target concentrations of 5 mM, 10 mM, 30 mM 50 mM, 100 mM, 200 mM and 250 mM.
  • the samples were prepared by adding the appropriate amount of histidine (solid) to the samples to attain the target histidine concentrations, with subsequent titration to a final pH of 7 using glacial acetic acid.
  • the sample preparation scheme is shown in FIG. 108 .
  • the material to study the effect of Lysine was prepared with target concentrations of 5 mM, 10 mM, 30 mM 50 mM, 100 mM, 200 mM, 300 mM, 500 mM and 1000 mM.
  • the samples were prepared by adding the appropriate amount of lysine hydrochloride (solid) to the samples to attain the target Lysine concentrations, with subsequent titration to a final pH of 7 using hydrochloric acid.
  • the sample preparation scheme is shown below in FIG. 109 .
  • the material to study the effect of methionine was prepared with target concentrations of 5 mM, 10 mM, 30 mM 50 mM, 100 mM, 200 mM and 300 mM.
  • the samples were prepared by adding the appropriate amount of methionine (solid) to the samples to attain the target methionine concentrations, with subsequent titration to a final pH of 7 using glacial acetic acid.
  • the sample preparation scheme is shown in FIG. 110 .
  • the material to study the effect of different amino acids was prepared with different target concentrations for each of the 20 amino acids evaluated as well as two controls using sodium acetate in place of an amino acid, and the other simply bringing the pH of the clarified harvest down to pH 7 using glacial acetic acid.
  • the target concentrations for the amino acids are shown below in Table 6.
  • the samples were prepared by adding the appropriate amount of amino acid (solid) to the samples to attain the target amino acid concentrations as shown in Table 6, with subsequent titration to a final pH of 7 using glacial acetic acid.
  • the sample preparation scheme is shown below in FIG. 111 .
  • the material to study the effect of additives other than amino acids was prepared with different target concentrations for each of the additives evaluated as well as a control in which sodium hydroxide was used in place of arginine to bring the pH of the material to pH 10 before neutralizing it back to pH 7 with glacial acetic acid.
  • the target concentrations for the additives are shown below in Table 7.
  • the samples were prepared by adding the appropriate amount of additive to the samples to attain the target amino acid concentrations as shown in Table 2, with subsequent titration to a final pH of 7 using glacial acetic acid.
  • the material to study the effect of the aforementioned methods on CDM clarified harvest was prepared using the following scheme shown in FIG. 112 .
  • the mAb B hydrolysate clarified harvest was used to study the effect of the aforementioned methods.
  • the mAb C hydrolysate clarified harvest was used to study the effect of the aforementioned methods.
  • the samples were placed in separate sterile stainless steel containers for the purpose of holding at either 4° C. or at room temperature. For each material, different containers were used for each day of holding evaluated.
  • the acidic variant compositions of the samples were evaluated on days 0, 3, 7 and 14 of holding at either temperature.
  • the acidic variant compositions of the samples were evaluated on days 0, 5 and 8 of holding at room temperature.
  • the histidine containing materials the acidic variant compositions of the samples were evaluated on days 0, 3 and 7 of holding at room temperature.
  • the effects of acid type, clarified harvest pH and arginine content on acidic variant reduction were evaluated in this study.
  • the samples were prepared in triplicates on 3 consecutive days to target arginine concentrations of either 0 mM (no arginine added) or 500 mM, then titrated with either glacial acetic acid, phosphoric acid, 3M citric acid or 6M hydrochloric acid to target pH values of either 5, 6 or 7.
  • One other sample was prepared by adding a 2M arginine acetate pH 7 stock buffer to clarified harvest to attain a target arginine concentration of 500 mM.
  • the sample preparation scheme is shown in FIG. 113 .
  • Protein A purification of the samples was performed using a 5 mL rProtein A FF Hitrap column (GE Healthcare) at 10 g D2E7/L resin loading and a operating flow rate of 3.4 mL/min. 5 column volumes (CVs) of equilibration (1 ⁇ PBS pH 7.4) is followed by loading of the sample, then washing of the column with equilibration buffer to remove non-specifically bound impurities, followed by elution of the protein with 0.1M Acetic acid, 0.15M sodium chloride.
  • the eluate samples were collected and neutralized to pH 6.9-7.2 with 1M Tris pH 9.5 at 45-75 minutes after collection. The samples were then frozen at ⁇ 80° C. for at least one day before thawing and subjecting to WCX-10 analysis.
  • Quantitation is based on the relative area percent of detected peaks.
  • the peaks that elute at relative residence time less than that of the dominant Lysine 0 peak are together represented as the acidic variant peaks (AR).
  • FIGS. 114 and 115 show that the low pH treatment with subsequent neutralization to pH 5 or 6 reduces the rate of acidic variant formation over time. However, there is no significant reduction in initial acidic variant content as shown in FIG. 114 .
  • FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 show that the sample preparation method resulted in different levels of acidic species in clarified harvest. Adding a 0.5M Arginine pH 7 stock buffer tends to increase acidic species, while adding pure arginine with subsequent acetic acid titration to pH 7 reduced acidic variants at arginine concentrations of greater than 100 mM. Moreover, the effect due to treatment method is demonstrated when comparing the two 100 mM arginine samples, which show an absolute difference of 1% in acidic variants between the two methods.
  • FIG. 118 shows that the rate of acidic variant formation decreases with increasing arginine concentration in clarified harvest, plateauing at around concentrations of 500 mM arginine and higher.
  • the two methods of sample preparation does not result in significantly different formation rate of acidic variants.
  • FIG. 119 and FIG. 120 The results of the histidine treatment are shown in FIG. 119 and FIG. 120 . Similar to arginine treatment effect, as shown in FIG. 128 , when histidine was added to clarified harvest with subsequent pH neutralization with acetic acid, acidic variants were reduced at histidine concentrations higher than 50 mM. FIG. 120 shows that the rate of acidic variants formation decreases with increasing Histidine concentration in clarified harvest, plateauing at around concentrations of 200 mM Histidine and higher.
  • FIG. 121 and FIG. 122 The results of the lysine treatment are summarized in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122 . Similar to arginine treatment effect, as shown in FIG. 128 , when lysine was added to clarified harvest with subsequent pH neutralization with acetic acid, acidic variants were significantly reduced by ⁇ 1% or more. FIG. 132 shows that the rate of acidic variants formation decreases with increasing lysine concentration in clarified harvest.
  • FIGS. 133 and 144 The results of the methionine treatment are summarized below in FIGS. 133 and 144 . Similar to arginine treatment effect, as shown in FIG. 118 , when methionine was added to clarified harvest with subsequent pH neutralization with acetic acid, acidic variants were significantly reduced by ⁇ 1% or more at concentrations of >10 mM. FIG. 124 shows that the rate of acidic variants formation is not affected significantly by methionine presence in clarified harvest.
  • FIGS. 125 and 146 The results of the treatments with the various amino acids are summarized below in FIGS. 125 and 146 .
  • the addition of 14 amino acids including arginine, histidine, lysine and methionine resulted in lower amounts of acidic variant content in clarified harvest.
  • the addition of sodium acetate or the use of acetic acid also caused a reduction in acidic variant content as well.
  • FIG. 126 shows that the rate of acidic variants formation is reduced by several amino acids including arginine, histidine, lysine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, and leucine.
  • FIGS. 127 and 128 The results of the treatments with the other additives are summarized below in FIGS. 127 and 128 .
  • FIG. 127 the addition of any of the additives did not result in lower acidic variant content in D2E7 hydrolysate clarified harvest.
  • FIG. 128 shows that the rate of acidic variants formation is reduced by most of the additives.
  • FIGS. 129 and 130 The results of CDM clarified harvest study are summarized below in FIGS. 129 and 130 .
  • low pH/arginine treatment did not result in lower acidic variant content in D2E7 CDM clarified harvest.
  • FIG. 130 shows that the rate of acidic variants formation is reduced significantly by all the treatments.
  • FIGS. 131 and 132 The results of mAb B hydrolysate clarified harvest study are summarized below in FIGS. 131 and 132 . As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132 , low pH/arginine treatment results in both lower acidic variant content and slower rates of acidic variants formation in mAb B hydrolysate clarified harvest.
  • FIGS. 133 and 134 The results of mAb C hydrolysate clarified harvest study are summarized below in FIGS. 133 and 134 . As shown in FIGS. 133 and 134 , low pH/arginine treatment results in both lower acidic variant content and slower rates of acidic variants formation in mAb C hydrolysate clarified harvest.
  • FIGS. 136, 137, 138, and 139 The results obtained from the study are summarized below in FIGS. 136, 137, 138, and 139 .
  • FIGS. 136, 137 indicate that when the acid used is of higher concentration, there is an decrease in acidic variant content in hydrolysate clarified harvest as compared to a lower concentration acid being used.
  • FIGS. 138, 139 show that when the clarified harvest is subjected to base neutralization to pH 7 after being treated with low pH, there is an increase in acidic variant content.
  • the figures also show that the Fractogel resin is better able to clear acidic variants than Mabselect Sure.
  • Antibody acidic species in clarified harvest can be reduced by adding additives such as arginine or histidine to clarified harvest at concentrations of more than 100 mM and 50 mM, respectively. It can also be achieved by pH adjustment of the clarified harvest to pH 6 or pH 5. In addition, the rate of acidic variant formation can be reduced through the use of arginine or histidine in a concentration dependent manner, or by low pH treatment of the clarified harvest.
  • additives such as arginine or histidine
  • control or reduction in the amount of acidic species present in the population of proteins obtained at end of cell culture can be accomplished by modifying the exchange rate of fresh medium into the bioreactor (or removal of spent medium with product antibody out of the bioreactor).
  • adalimumab producing CHO cell line was employed in the study covered here.
  • the vial was cultured in a chemically defined growth media (media 1) in a series of vented shake flasks on a shaker platform at 110 rpm in a 35° C., 5% CO 2 incubator. Cultures were propagated to obtain a sufficient number of cells for inoculation of the perfusion cultibag.
  • the perfusion culture was carried out with the Sartorius BIOSTAT RM 20 optical perfusion system (SN#00582
  • the perfusion bag was run with a working culture volume of 1.5 L and operation conditions of; pH: 7.00, dissolved oxygen 30%, 25 rpm, 35° C., an air overlay of 0.3 slpm and a CO 2 overlay of 15 sccm. pH control was initiated on day three of the culture. pH was controlled with 0.5M sodium hydroxide and CO 2 additions.
  • Perfusion was carried out by ‘harvesting’ spent culture through an integrated 1.2 ⁇ m filter integrated into the perfusion cultibag. Fresh media was added to the culture through a feed line at the same rate as the harvest. Perfusion began on day four of the process at a rate of 1.0 exchanges per day (ex/day). The perfusion rate was adjusted throughout the run to accommodate glucose needs, lactate accumulation and sampling plans. Perfusion cell-free harvest samples were collected at perfusion rates of 1.5, 3.0 and 6.0 exchange volumes/day on day 5-6 of perfusion. A fresh harvest bag was used for each harvest sample. The samples were then purified using protein A and analyzed using WCX-10 assay.
  • the perfusion culture was ended on day 8 of the process.
  • the mobile phases used were 10 mM Sodium Phosphate dibasic pH 7.5 (Mobile phase A) and 10 mM Sodium Phosphate dibasic, 500 mM Sodium Chloride pH 5.5 (Mobile phase B).
  • a binary gradient (94% A, 6% B: 0-20 min; 84% A, 16% B: 20-22 min; 0% A, 100% B: 22-28 min; 94% A, 6% B: 28-34 min) was used with detection at 280 nm.
  • the WCX-10 method used for mAb2 samples used different buffers.
  • the mobile phases used were 20 mM (4-Morpholino) ethanesulfonic Acid Monohydrate (MES) pH 6.5 (Mobile phase A) and 20 mM MES, 500 mM Sodium Chloride pH 6.5 (Mobile phase B).
  • Adalimumab producing cell line 1 was cultured in media 1 and the cultures were carried out as described in the materials and methods. As described in table 9, the exchange rates were modified over a period of 24 hrs between day 5 and day 6 to explore the influence of medium exchange rates on the extent of acidic species. At a continuous medium exchange rate of 1.5 volumes/day, the product antibody in spent medium was collected in a harvest bag over a period of 17 hrs. The harvest bag was then exchanged with a new bag and the old bag was transferred to 4 C. Subsequently and in succession, the medium exchange rates were increased to 3 and 6 volumes/day and the product harvest was collected over a time period of 5 and 2 hrs, respectively.
  • the current invention provides a method for reducing acidic species for a given protein of interest.
  • adalimumab was prepared using a combination of supplementation of arginine and lysine to cell culture as shown in this invention along with AEX and CEX purification technologies (described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/829,989) to produce a Low-AR and High-AR sample with a final AR of 2.5% and 6.9%, respectively. Both samples were incubated in a controlled environment at 25° C. and 65% relative humidity for 10 weeks, and the AR measured every two weeks.
  • FIG. 142 shows the growth of AR for each sample over the 10 week incubation. It is evident from FIG.
  • the growth rate of AR is linear and similar between both the Low-AR and High-AR samples. Based on these results the reduced AR material can be stored 3 fold longer before reaching the same AR level as the High-AR sample. This is a significant utility as this can be very beneficial in storage handling and use of the antibody or other proteins for therapeutic use.
  • Upstream and Downstream process technologies e.g., cell culture and chromatographic separations, of the inventions disclosed in the following applications can be combined together or combined with methods in the art to provide a final target AR value or achieve a % AR reduction, as well as to, in certain embodiments, reduce product related substances and/or process related impurities.
  • Upstream methods for AR reduction include, but are not limited to those described in the instant application.
  • Downstream methods for AR reduction include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/829,989.
  • Exemplary technologies disclosed in the referenced applications include, but are not limited to: cell culture additives & conditions; clarified harvest additives and pH/salt conditions; mixed mode media separations; anion exchange media separations; and cation Exchange media separations.
  • the instant example demonstrates the combined effect of one or more of these technologies in achieving a target AR value or AR reduction, thereby facilitating the preparation of an antibody material having a specific charge heterogeneity. Additional examples of combinations of downstream technologies and upstream technologies are provided in the referenced applications.
  • the combination of upstream and downstream methods involves the reduction of acidic species in 3 L bioreactor cell cultures supplemented with arginine (2 g/l) and lysine (4 g/l) as has been previously demonstrated in the instant application.
  • the results of that strategy are summarized in Table 10.
  • the total acidic species was reduced from 20.5% in the control sample to 10.2% in sample from cultures that were supplemented with the additives.
  • Adalimumab producing cell line 1 was cultured in media 1 (chemically defined media) supplemented with amino acid arginine (2 g/l) and lysine (4 g/l) in a 300 L bioreactor.
  • the material produced by the 300 L Bioreactor employing Arginine and Lysine additions, that effectively reduced the AR levels to 9.1% was purified using a downstream process employing Mixed Mode chromatography as the primary AR Reduction method.
  • Adalimumab was purified by a Protein A chromatography step followed with a low pH viral inactivation step.
  • the filtered viral inactivated material was buffer exchanged and loaded onto a Capto Adhere column.
  • the flowthrough of Capto Adhere material was then purified with a HIC column with bind/elute mode as well as Flow Through mode.
  • AR reduction was achieved primarily with MM step, with some contribution from other steps.
  • the table also shows that additional product related substances such as aggregates and process related impurities such as HCP can be effectively reduced employing these combined technologies.
  • the MM method further reduced the AR levels, by 2.26%. Therefore upstream technologies for reduction can be combined with downstream technologies to achieve AR levels/AR reduction.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mycology (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)
  • Preparation Of Compounds By Using Micro-Organisms (AREA)
  • Micro-Organisms Or Cultivation Processes Thereof (AREA)

Abstract

The instant invention relates to the field of protein production and purification, and in particular to compositions and processes for controlling the amount of acidic species expressed by host cells, as well as to compositions and processes for controlling the amount of acidic species present in purified preparations.

Description

    CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation application of Ser. No. 15/008,895, filed on Jan. 28, 2016, which is a divisional application of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/842,933, filed on Sep. 2, 2015, pending, which is a continuation application of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/830,583, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,150,645, filed on Mar. 14, 2013, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/636,493, filed on Apr. 20, 2012. The entire contents of each of the foregoing applications is incorporated herein by reference.
  • 1. INTRODUCTION
  • The instant invention relates to the field of protein production, and in particular to compositions and processes for controlling the amount of acidic species generated during expression of a protein of interest by host cells, as well as the reduction of acidic species present in the clarified cell culture broth. In certain aspects of the invention, controlling the amount of acidic species generated during expression of a protein of interest is achieved by modifying the culture media of the cells. In certain aspects of the invention, controlling the amount of acidic species generated during expression of a protein of interest is achieved by modifying the culture process parameters. In certain aspects of the invention, controlling the amount of acidic species of a protein of interest is achieved by modifying a cell culture clarified harvest comprising the protein of interest.
  • 2. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • The production of proteins for biopharmaceutical applications typically involves the use of cell cultures that are known to produce proteins exhibiting varying levels of product-related substance heterogeneity. Such heterogeneity includes, but is not limited to, the presence of acidic species. For example, in monoclonal antibody (mAb) preparations, such acidic species heterogeneities can be detected by various methods, such as WCX-10 HPLC (a weak cation exchange chromatography) or IEF (isoelectric focusing). In certain embodiments, the acidic species identified using such techniques comprise a range of product-related impurities such as antibody product fragments (e.g., Fc and Fab fragments), and/or post-translation modifications of the antibody product, such as, deamidated and/or glycoslyated antibodies. However, because of their similar chemical characteristics to the antibody product molecules, reduction of acidic species is a challenge in monoclonal antibody purification. Control of acidic species heterogeneity is particularly advantageous in the context of cell culture processes used for commercially produced recombinant bio-therapeutics as such heterogeneity has the potential to impact stability.
  • 3. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention is directed to compositions and methods that control (modulate or limit) acidic species heterogeneity in a population of proteins. The presence of such acidic species corresponds to heterogeneity of the distribution of charged impurities, e.g., a mixture of protein fragments (e.g., Fc and Fab fragments of antibodies), and/or post-translation modifications of the proteins, such as, deamidated and/or glycoslyated proteins, in the population of proteins, and such heterogeneity particularly of interest when it arises in the context of recombinant protein production.
  • In certain embodiments, the acidic species heterogeneity arises from differences in the amount and/or type of acidic species in a population of proteins.
  • In certain embodiments, the acidic species heterogeneity is present in a population of proteins produced by cell culture. In certain embodiments, control is exerted over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture. In certain embodiments, the control is exerted over the amount of acidic species formed while the protein is present in a cell culture broth, while the culture is actively maintained or while the cells are removed. In certain embodiments, the protein is an antibody.
  • In certain embodiments, control over the amount of acidic species produced by cell culture is exerted by employing certain media components during production of a protein, for example, an antibody, of interest. In certain embodiments, control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing the media of cells expressing the protein of interest with one or more amino acids. In certain embodiments, the one or more amino acids are arginine, lysine, ornithine, histidine or combinations thereof.
  • In certain embodiments, control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing the media of cells expressing the protein of interest with calcium, for example, by supplementing the media with calcium chloride dihydrate.
  • In certain embodiments, control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing the media of cells expressing the protein of interest with vitamin niacinamide.
  • In certain embodiments, control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing the media of cells expressing the protein of interest with suitable combinations of arginine, lysine, calcium chloride and niacinamide.
  • In certain embodiments, control over the amount of acidic species produced by cell culture is exerted by ensuring that the production of a protein, for example, an antibody, of interest occurs under specific conditions, including specific pH.
  • In certain embodiments, control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing the media of cells expressing the protein of interest with arginine and lysine and by controlling the pH of the cell culture. In certain embodiments, the pH of the cell culture is adjusted to a pH of about 6.9. In certain embodiments, the pH of the cell culture is adjusted to a lower pH of about 6.8.
  • In certain embodiments, control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing the media of cells expressing the protein of interest with arginine and lysine and by choice of cell culture harvest criteria. In certain embodiments, the harvest criterion is a particular culture day. In certain embodiments, the harvest criterion is based on harvest viability.
  • In certain embodiments, control over the amount of acidic species produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing a cell culture clarified harvest comprising a protein or antibody of interest with one or more amino acids. In certain embodiments, the one or more amino acids is arginine, histidine, or combinations thereof.
  • In certain embodiments, control over the amount of acidic species produced by cell culture is exerted by adjusting the pH of a cell culture clarified harvest comprising a protein or antibody of interest. In certain embodiments, the pH of the cell culture clarified harvest is adjusted to a pH of about 5. In certain embodiments, the pH of the cell culture clarified harvest is adjusted to a pH of about 6.
  • In certain embodiments, control over the amount of acidic species produced by cell culture is exerted by the use of a continuous or perfusion technology. In certain embodiments, this may be attained through choice of medium exchange rate. In certain, non-limiting, embodiments, maintenance of the medium exchange rates (working volumes/day) of a cell culture run between 0 and 20, or between 0.5 and 12 or between 1 and 8 or between 1.5 and 6 can be used to achieve the desired reduction in acidic species. In certain embodiments, the choice of cell culture methodology that allows for control of acidic species heterogeneity can also include, for example, but not by way of limitation, employment of an intermittent harvest strategy or through use of cell retention device technology.
  • In certain embodiments, the methods of culturing cells expressing a protein of interest, such as an antibody or antigen-binding portion thereof, reduces the amount of acidic species present in the resulting composition. In certain embodiments, the resulting composition is substantially free of acidic species. In one aspect, the sample comprises a cell culture harvest wherein the cell culture is employed to produce specific proteins of the present invention. In a particular aspect, the sample matrix is prepared from a cell line used to produce anti-TNF-α antibodies.
  • The purity of the proteins of interest in the resultant sample product can be analyzed using methods well known to those skilled in the art, e.g., weak cation exchange chromatography (WCX), capillary isoelectric focusing (cIEF), size-exclusion chromatography, Poros™ A HPLC Assay, HCP ELISA, Protein A ELISA, and western blot analysis.
  • In yet another embodiment, the invention is directed to one or more pharmaceutical compositions comprising an isolated protein, such as an antibody or antigen-binding portion thereof, and an acceptable carrier. In another aspect, the compositions further comprise one or more pharmaceutical agents.
  • 4. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 depicts the effect of total arginine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on viable cell density (n=2).
  • FIG. 2 depicts the effect of total arginine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on viability (n=2).
  • FIG. 3 depicts the effect of total arginine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on harvest titer (n=2).
  • FIG. 4 depicts the effect of total arginine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on day 10 WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 5 depicts the effect of total arginine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on day 12 WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 6 depicts the effect of total arginine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on viable cell density (n=2).
  • FIG. 7 depicts the effect of total arginine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on viability (n=2).
  • FIG. 8 depicts the effect of total arginine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on harvest titer (n=2).
  • FIG. 9 depicts the effect of total arginine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 10 depicts the effect of total arginine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 11 depicts the effect of arginine addition to adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 2 on day 11 on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 12 depicts the effect of arginine addition to adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 3 on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 13 depicts the effect of total arginine concentration in mAB1 producing cell line on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=1).
  • FIG. 14 depicts the effect of total arginine concentration in mAB2 producing cell line on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2)
  • FIG. 15 depicts the effect of carboxypeptidase digestion of product from adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 experiment on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=1).
  • FIG. 16 depicts the effect of carboxypeptidase digestions of product from mAB2 producing cell line on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 17 depicts the effect of total lysine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on viable cell density (n=2).
  • FIG. 18 depicts the effect of total lysine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on viability (n=2).
  • FIG. 19 depicts the effect of total lysine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on harvest titer (n=2).
  • FIG. 20 depicts the effect of total lysine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 21 depicts the effect of total lysine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on viable cell density (n=2).
  • FIG. 22 depicts the effect of total lysine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on viability (n=2).
  • FIG. 23 depicts the effect of total lysine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on harvest titer (n=2).
  • FIG. 24 depicts the effect of total lysine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 25 depicts the effect of total lysine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 26 depicts the effect of lysine addition to adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 2 on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 27 depicts the effect of lysine addition to adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 3 on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 28 depicts the effect of total lysine concentration in mAB1 producing cell line on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=1).
  • FIG. 29 depicts the effect of total lysine concentration in mAB2 producing cell line on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 30 depicts the effect of carboxypeptidase digestion of product from cell line 3, media 1 experiment on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=1).
  • FIG. 31 depicts the effect of carboxypeptidase digestions of product from mAB2 producing cell line on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 32 depicts the effect of total histidine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on viable cell density (n=2).
  • FIG. 33 depicts the effect of total histidine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on viability (n=2).
  • FIG. 34 depicts the effect of total histidine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on harvest titer (n=2).
  • FIG. 35 depicts the effect of total histidine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 36 depicts the effect of total histidine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on viable cell density (n=2).
  • FIG. 37 depicts the effect of total histidine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on viability (n=2).
  • FIG. 38 depicts the effect of total histidine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on harvest titer (n=2).
  • FIG. 39 depicts the effect of total histidine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 40 depicts the effect of total histidine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 41 depicts the effect of histidine addition to adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 2 on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 42 depicts the effect of histidine addition to adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 3 on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 43 depicts the effect of total histidine concentration in mAB1 producing cell line on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=1).
  • FIG. 44 depicts the effect of total histidine concentration in mAB2 producing cell line on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 45 depicts the effect of carboxypeptidase digestion of product from cell line 3, media 1 experiment on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=1).
  • FIG. 46 depicts the effect of carboxypeptidase digestions of product from mAB2 producing cell line on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 47 depicts the effect of total ornithine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on viable cell density (n=2).
  • FIG. 48 depicts the effect of total ornithine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on viability (n=2).
  • FIG. 49 depicts the effect of total ornithine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on harvest titer (n=2).
  • FIG. 50 depicts the effect of total ornithine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions.
  • FIG. 51 depicts the effect of total ornithine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on viable cell density (n=2).
  • FIG. 52 depicts the effect of total ornithine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on viability (n=2).
  • FIG. 53 depicts the effect of total ornithine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on harvest titer (n=2).
  • FIG. 54 depicts the effect of total ornithine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 55 depicts the effect of total ornithine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 56 depicts the effect of ornithine addition to adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 2 on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 57 depicts the effect of ornithine addition to adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 3 on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 58 depicts the effect of total ornithine concentration in mAB1 producing cell line on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=1).
  • FIG. 59 depicts the effect of total ornithine concentration in mAB2 producing cell line on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 60 depicts the effect of carboxypeptidase digestion of product from cell line 3, media 1 experiment on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=1).
  • FIG. 61 depicts the effect of carboxypeptidase digestions of product from mAB2 producing cell line on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 62 depicts the effect of multiple amino acid additions to adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 63 depicts the effect of increased arginine and lysine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on viable cell density (n=3).
  • FIG. 64 depicts the effect of increased arginine and lysine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on viability (n=3).
  • FIG. 65 depicts the effect of increased arginine and lysine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on culture titer (n=3).
  • FIG. 66 depicts the effect of increased arginine and lysine concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 67 depicts the effect of arginine, lysine and pH modulation to adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on viable cell density (n=2).
  • FIG. 68 depicts the effect of arginine, lysine and pH modulation to adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on viability (n=2).
  • FIG. 69 depicts the effect of arginine, lysine and pH modulation to adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on culture titer (n=2).
  • FIG. 70 depicts the effect of arginine, lysine and pH modulation to adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 71 depicts the effect of total calcium concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on viable cell density (n=2).
  • FIG. 72 depicts the effect of total calcium concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on viability (n=2).
  • FIG. 73 depicts the effect of total calcium concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on harvest titer (n=2).
  • FIG. 74 depicts the effect of total calcium concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 75 depicts the effect of total calcium concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on viable cell density (n=2).
  • FIG. 76 depicts the effect of total calcium concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on viability (n=2).
  • FIG. 77 depicts the effect of total calcium concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on harvest titer (n=2)
  • FIG. 78 depicts the effect of total calcium concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 79 depicts the effect of total calcium concentration in adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 80 depicts the effect of calcium addition to adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 2 on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 81 depicts the effect of calcium addition to adalimumab producing cell line 2, media 3 on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 82 depicts the effect of total calcium concentration in mAB1 producing cell line on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 83 depicts the effect of total calcium concentration in mAB2 producing cell line on WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 84 depicts the effect of multiple amino acid additions to cell line 1, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions a) overall prediction plot, b) prediction plots for each additive (n=2).
  • FIG. 85 depicts the effect of niacinamide addition to adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on viable cell density (n=2).
  • FIG. 86 depicts the effect of niacinamide addition to adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on viability (n=2).
  • FIG. 87 depicts the effect of niacinamide addition to adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on harvest titer (n=2).
  • FIG. 88 depicts the effect of niacinamide addition to adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on Day 11 WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 89 depicts the effect of niacinamide addition to adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on Day 12 WCX-10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 90 depicts the effect of niacinamide addition to mAB2 producing cell line, media 1 on viable cell density (n=2).
  • FIG. 91 depicts the effect of niacinamide addition to mAB2 producing cell line, media 1 on viability (n=2).
  • FIG. 92 depicts the effect of niacinamide addition to mAB2 producing cell line, media 1 on harvest titer (n=2).
  • FIG. 93 depicts the effect of niacinamide addition to mAB2 producing cell line, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 94 depicts the effect of pH modulation of adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on viable cell density (n=2).
  • FIG. 95 depicts the effect of pH modulation adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on viability (n=2).
  • FIG. 96 depicts the effect of pH modulation of adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on harvest titer (n=2).
  • FIG. 97 depicts the effect of pH modulation of adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 98 depicts the effect of pH modulation of adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 2 on viable cell density (n=2).
  • FIG. 99 depicts the effect of pH modulation addition of adalimumab producing adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 2 on viability (n=2).
  • FIG. 100 depicts the effect of pH modulation of adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 2 on harvest titer (n=2).
  • FIG. 101 depicts the effect of pH modulation of adalimumab producing cell line 1, media 2 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 102 depicts the effect of pH modulation of adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on viable cell density (n=2).
  • FIG. 103 depicts the effect of pH modulation adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on viability (n=2).
  • FIG. 104 depicts the effect of pH modulation of adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on harvest titer (n=2).
  • FIG. 105 depicts the effect of pH modulation of adalimumab producing cell line 3, media 1 on WCX 10 profile total acidic regions (n=2).
  • FIG. 106 depicts an acidification sample preparation scheme.
  • FIG. 107 depicts an arginine sample preparation scheme.
  • FIG. 108 depicts a histidine sample preparation scheme.
  • FIG. 109 depicts a lysine sample preparation scheme.
  • FIG. 110 depicts a methionine sample preparation scheme.
  • FIG. 111 depicts an amino acid sample preparation scheme.
  • FIG. 112 depicts a CDM clarified harvest sample preparation scheme.
  • FIG. 113 depicts an acid-type pH study sample preparation scheme.
  • FIG. 114 depicts the effect of low pH treatment with subsequent neutralization on initial acidic variant content.
  • FIG. 115 depicts the effect of low pH treatment with subsequent neutralization on acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 116 depicts the effect of sample preparation method on initial acidic variant content.
  • FIG. 117 depicts the effect of sample preparation method on initial acidic variant content.
  • FIG. 118 depicts the dose dependent effect of arginine on reduction of acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 119 depicts the effect of histidine concentration on initial acidic variant content.
  • FIG. 120 depicts the effect of histidine concentration on acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 121 depicts the effect of lysine on initial acid variant content.
  • FIG. 122 depicts the effect of lysine on acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 123 depicts the effect of methionine on initial acid variant content.
  • FIG. 124 depicts the effect of methionine on acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 125 depicts the effect of amino acids on initial acid variant content.
  • FIG. 126 depicts the effect of amino acids on acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 127 depicts the effect of alternative additives on initial acid variant content.
  • FIG. 128 depicts the effect of alternative additives on acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 129 depicts the effect of low pH/arginine treatment on D2E7 CDM initial acid variant content.
  • FIG. 130 depicts the effect of low pH/arginine treatment on D2E7 CDM acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 131 depicts the effect of low pH/arginine treatment on mAb B hydrolysate initial acid variant content.
  • FIG. 132 depicts the effect of low pH/arginine treatment on mAb B hydrolysate acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 133 depicts the effect of low pH/arginine treatment on mAb C hydrolysate initial acid variant content.
  • FIG. 134 depicts the effect of low pH/arginine treatment on mAb C hydrolysate acidic variant formation rate.
  • FIG. 135 depicts the effect of acid type/pH on acid variant content.
  • FIG. 136 depicts the effect of acid concentration on acid variant content.
  • FIG. 137 depicts the effect of acid concentration on acid variant content.
  • FIG. 138 depicts the effect of neutralization on acid variant content.
  • FIG. 139 depicts the effect of neutralization on acid variant content.
  • FIG. 140 depicts LC/MS peptide mapping analysis of exemplary antibodies expressed in the context of the cell culture conditions of the instant invention, including preparation of specific mass traces for both modified and non-modified peptides in order to accurately quantify the total amount of MGO modification. Mass spectra are also analyzed for the specific region of the chromatogram to confirm the peptide identity.
  • FIG. 141 depicts a chromatogram wherein the total acidic species associated with the expression of Adalimiumab is divided into a first acidic species region (AR1) and a second acidic species region (AR2).
  • FIG. 142 depicts the AR Growth at 25° C. of low and high AR containing samples.
  • 5. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • The instant invention relates to the field of protein production. In particular, the instant invention relates to compositions and processes for controlling the amount of acidic species expressed by host cells when used to produce a protein of interest. Certain embodiments of the invention relate to culturing said cells to express said proteins under conditions that limit the amount of acidic species that are expressed by the cells. In certain embodiments, the methods described herein employ culturing said cells in media supplemented with one or more amino acids and/or calcium (e.g., as calcium chloride dihydrate) and/or niacinamide. In certain embodiments, the methods described herein employ culturing said cells in a culture with appropriate control of process parameters, such as pH. In certain embodiments, methods described herein employ culturing cells at a lower process pH. In certain embodiments of the instant invention, control of acidic species heterogeneity can be attained by the choice of cell culture methodology. In certain embodiments, use of a continuous or perfusion technology may be utilized to achieve the desired control over acidic species heterogeneity. In certain embodiments, this may be attained through choice of medium exchange rate. In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed toward pharmaceutical compositions comprising one or more proteins, such as, but not limited to an antibody or antigen-binding portion thereof, purified by a method described herein.
  • For clarity and not by way of limitation, this detailed description is divided into the following sub-portions:
  • (i) Definitions;
  • (ii) Antibody Generation;
  • (iii) Protein Production;
  • (iv) Protein Purification;
  • (v) Pharmaceutical Compositions
  • 5.1 Definitions
  • In order that the present invention may be more readily understood, certain terms are first defined.
  • As used herein, the terms “acidic species” and “acidic species heterogeneity” refer to a characteristic of a population of proteins wherein the population includes a distribution of product-related impurities identifiable by the presence of charge heterogeneities. For example, in monoclonal antibody (mAb) preparations, such acidic species heterogeneities can be detected by various methods, such as, for example, WCX-10 HPLC (a weak cation exchange chromatography), or IEF (isoelectric focusing). In certain embodiments, the acidic species identified using such techniques comprise a mixture of product-related impurities containing antibody product fragments (e.g., Fc and Fab fragments), chemical modifications (e.g., methylglyoxal modified species (as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/078,181), glycated species) and/or post-translation modifications of the antibody product, such as, deamidated and/or glycoslyated antibodies.
  • In certain embodiments, the acidic species heterogeneity comprises a difference in the type of acidic species present in the population of proteins. For example, the population of proteins may comprise more than one acidic species variant. For example, but not by way of limitation, the total acidic species can be divided based on chromatographic residence time. FIG. 141 depicts a non-limiting example of such a division wherein the total acidic species associated with the expression of Adalimiumab is divided into a first acidic species region (AR1) and a second acidic species region (AR2). The compositions of particular acidic species regions may differ depending on the particular antibody of interest, as well as the particular cell culture, purification, and/or chromatographic conditions employed.
  • In certain embodiments, the heterogeneity of the distribution of acidic species comprises a difference in the amount of acidic species in the population of proteins. For example, the population of proteins may comprise more than one acidic species variant, and each of the variants may be present in different amounts.
  • The term “antibody” includes an immunoglobulin molecule comprised of four polypeptide chains, two heavy (H) chains and two light (L) chains inter-connected by disulfide bonds. Each heavy chain is comprised of a heavy chain variable region (abbreviated herein as HCVR or VH) and a heavy chain constant region (CH). The heavy chain constant region is comprised of three domains, CH1, CH2 and CH3. Each light chain is comprised of a light chain variable region (abbreviated herein as LCVR or VL) and a light chain constant region. The light chain constant region is comprised of one domain, CL. The VH and VL regions can be further subdivided into regions of hypervariability, termed complementarity determining regions (CDRs), interspersed with regions that are more conserved, termed framework regions (FR). Each VH and VL is composed of three CDRs and four FRs, arranged from amino-terminus to carboxy-terminus in the following order: FR1, CDR1, FR2, CDR2, FR3, CDR3, FR4.
  • The term “antigen-binding portion” of an antibody (or “antibody portion”) includes fragments of an antibody that retain the ability to specifically bind to an antigen (e.g., in the case of Adalimumab, hTNFα). It has been shown that the antigen-binding function of an antibody can be performed by fragments of a full-length antibody. Examples of binding fragments encompassed within the term “antigen-binding portion” of an antibody include (i) a Fab fragment, a monovalent fragment comprising the VL, VH, CL and CH1 domains; (ii) a F(ab′)2 fragment, a bivalent fragment comprising two Fab fragments linked by a disulfide bridge at the hinge region; (iii) a Fd fragment comprising the VH and CH1 domains; (iv) a Fv fragment comprising the VL and VH domains of a single arm of an antibody, (v) a dAb fragment (Ward et al., (1989) Nature 341:544-546, the entire teaching of which is incorporated herein by reference), which comprises a VH domain; and (vi) an isolated complementarity determining region (CDR). Furthermore, although the two domains of the Fv fragment, VL and VH, are coded for by separate genes, they can be joined, using recombinant methods, by a synthetic linker that enables them to be made as a single protein chain in which the VL and VH regions pair to form monovalent molecules (known as single chain Fv (scFv); see, e.g., Bird et al. (1988) Science 242:423-426; and Huston et al. (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:5879-5883, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). Such single chain antibodies are also intended to be encompassed within the term “antigen-binding portion” of an antibody. Other forms of single chain antibodies, such as diabodies are also encompassed. Diabodies are bivalent, bispecific antibodies in which VH and VL domains are expressed on a single polypeptide chain, but using a linker that is too short to allow for pairing between the two domains on the same chain, thereby forcing the domains to pair with complementary domains of another chain and creating two antigen binding sites (see, e.g., Holliger, P., et al. (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:6444-6448; Poljak, R. J., et al. (1994) Structure 2:1121-1123, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). Still further, an antibody or antigen-binding portion thereof may be part of a larger immunoadhesion molecule, formed by covalent or non-covalent association of the antibody or antibody portion with one or more other proteins or peptides. Examples of such immunoadhesion molecules include use of the streptavidin core region to make a tetrameric scFv molecule (Kipriyanov, S. M., et al. (1995) Human Antibodies and Hybridomas 6:93-101, the entire teaching of which is incorporated herein by reference) and use of a cysteine residue, a marker peptide and a C-terminal polyhistidine tag to make bivalent and biotinylated scFv molecules (Kipriyanov, S. M., et al. (1994) Mol. Immunol. 31:1047-1058, the entire teaching of which is incorporated herein by reference). Antibody portions, such as Fab and F(ab′)2 fragments, can be prepared from whole antibodies using conventional techniques, such as papain or pepsin digestion, respectively, of whole antibodies. Moreover, antibodies, antibody portions and immunoadhesion molecules can be obtained using standard recombinant DNA techniques, as described herein. In one aspect, the antigen binding portions are complete domains or pairs of complete domains.
  • The phrase “clarified harvest” refers to a liquid material containing a protein of interest, for example, an antibody of interest such as a monoclonal or polyclonal antibody of interest, that has been extracted from cell culture, for example, a fermentation bioreactor, after undergoing centrifugation to remove large solid particles and subsequent filtration to remove finer solid particles and impurities from the material.
  • The term “human antibody” includes antibodies having variable and constant regions corresponding to human germline immunoglobulin sequences as described by Kabat et al. (See Kabat, et al. (1991) Sequences of proteins of Immunological Interest, Fifth Edition, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, NIH Publication No. 91-3242). The human antibodies of the invention may include amino acid residues not encoded by human germline immunoglobulin sequences (e.g., mutations introduced by random or site-specific mutagenesis in vitro or by somatic mutation in vivo), e.g., in the CDRs and in particular CDR3. The mutations can be introduced using the “selective mutagenesis approach.” The human antibody can have at least one position replaced with an amino acid residue, e.g., an activity enhancing amino acid residue which is not encoded by the human germline immunoglobulin sequence. The human antibody can have up to twenty positions replaced with amino acid residues which are not part of the human germline immunoglobulin sequence. In other embodiments, up to ten, up to five, up to three or up to two positions are replaced. In one embodiment, these replacements are within the CDR regions. However, the term “human antibody”, as used herein, is not intended to include antibodies in which CDR sequences derived from the germline of another mammalian species, such as a mouse, have been grafted onto human framework sequences.
  • The phrase “recombinant human antibody” includes human antibodies that are prepared, expressed, created or isolated by recombinant means, such as antibodies expressed using a recombinant expression vector transfected into a host cell, antibodies isolated from a recombinant, combinatorial human antibody library, antibodies isolated from an animal (e.g., a mouse) that is transgenic for human immunoglobulin genes (see, e.g., Taylor, L. D., et al. (1992) Nucl. Acids Res. 20:6287-6295, the entire teaching of which is incorporated herein by reference) or antibodies prepared, expressed, created or isolated by any other means that involves splicing of human immunoglobulin gene sequences to other DNA sequences. Such recombinant human antibodies have variable and constant regions derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences (see, Kabat, E. A., et al. (1991) Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest, Fifth Edition, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, NIH Publication No. 91-3242). In certain embodiments, however, such recombinant human antibodies are subjected to in vitro mutagenesis (or, when an animal transgenic for human Ig sequences is used, in vivo somatic mutagenesis) and thus the amino acid sequences of the VH and VL regions of the recombinant antibodies are sequences that, while derived from and related to human germline VH and VL sequences, may not naturally exist within the human antibody germline repertoire in vivo. In certain embodiments, however, such recombinant antibodies are the result of selective mutagenesis approach or back-mutation or both.
  • An “isolated antibody” includes an antibody that is substantially free of other antibodies having different antigenic specificities (e.g., an isolated antibody that specifically binds hTNFα is substantially free of antibodies that specifically bind antigens other than hTNFα). An isolated antibody that specifically binds hTNFα may bind TNFα molecules from other species. Moreover, an isolated antibody may be substantially free of other cellular material and/or chemicals. A suitable anti-TNFα antibody is Adalimumab (Abbott Laboratories).
  • As used herein, the term “adalimumab”, also known by its trade name Humira® (AbbVie) refers to a human IgG antibody that binds the human form of tumor necrosis factor alpha. In general, the heavy chain constant domain 2 (CH2) of the adalimumab IgG-Fc region is glycosylated through covalent attachment of oligosaccharide at asparagine 297 (Asn-297). Weak cation-exchange chromatography (WCX) analysis of the antibody has shown that it has three main charged-variants (i.e. Lys 0, Lys 1, and Lys 2). These variants, or charged isomers, are the result of incomplete posttranslational cleavage of the C-terminal lysine residues. In addition to the lysine variants, the WCX-10 analysis measures the presence acidic species. These acidic regions (i.e., acidic species) are classified as product-related impurities that are relatively acidic when compared to the lysine variants and elute before the Lys 0 peak in the chromatogram (FIG. 1).
  • The term “activity” includes activities such as the binding specificity/affinity of an antibody for an antigen, and includes activities such as the binding specificity/affinity of an anti-TNFα antibody for its antigen, e.g., an anti-TNFα antibody that binds to a TNFα antigen and/or the neutralizing potency of an antibody, e.g., an anti-TNFα antibody whose binding to hTNFα inhibits the biological activity of hTNFα.
  • The phrase “nucleic acid molecule” includes DNA molecules and RNA molecules. A nucleic acid molecule may be single-stranded or double-stranded, but in one aspect is double-stranded DNA.
  • The phrase “isolated nucleic acid molecule,” as used herein in reference to nucleic acids encoding antibodies or antibody portions (e.g., VH, VL, CDR3), e.g. those that bind hTNFα, and includes a nucleic acid molecule in which the nucleotide sequences encoding the antibody or antibody portion are free of other nucleotide sequences encoding antibodies or antibody portions that bind antigens other than hTNFα, which other sequences may naturally flank the nucleic acid in human genomic DNA. Thus, e.g., an isolated nucleic acid of the invention encoding a VH region of an anti-TNFα antibody contains no other sequences encoding other VH regions that bind antigens other than, for example, hTNFα. The phrase “isolated nucleic acid molecule” is also intended to include sequences encoding bivalent, bispecific antibodies, such as diabodies in which VH and VL regions contain no other sequences other than the sequences of the diabody.
  • The phrase “recombinant host cell” (or simply “host cell”) includes a cell into which a recombinant expression vector has been introduced. It should be understood that such terms are intended to refer not only to the particular subject cell but to the progeny of such a cell. Because certain modifications may occur in succeeding generations due to either mutation or environmental influences, such progeny may not, in fact, be identical to the parent cell, but are still included within the scope of the term “host cell” as used herein.
  • As used herein, the term “recombinant protein” refers to a protein produced as the result of the transcription and translation of a gene carried on a recombinant expression vector that has been introduced into a host cell. In certain embodiments the recombinant protein is an antibody, preferably a chimeric, humanized, or fully human antibody. In certain embodiments the recombinant protein is an antibody of an isotype selected from group consisting of: IgG (e.g., IgG1, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4), IgM, IgA1, IgA2, IgD, or IgE. In certain embodiments the antibody molecule is a full-length antibody (e.g., an IgG1 or IgG4 immunoglobulin) or alternatively the antibody can be a fragment (e.g., an Fc fragment or a Fab fragment).
  • As used herein, the term “cell culture” refers to methods and techniques employed to generate and maintain a population of host cells capable of producing a recombinant protein of interest, as well as the methods and techniques for optimizing the production and collection of the protein of interest. For example, once an expression vector has been incorporated into an appropriate host, the host can be maintained under conditions suitable for high level expression of the relevant nucleotide coding sequences, and the collection and purification of the desired recombinant protein. Mammalian cells are preferred for expression and production of the recombinant protein of the present invention, however other eukaryotic cell types can also be employed in the context of the instant invention. See, e.g., Winnacker, From Genes to Clones, VCH Publishers, N.Y., N.Y. (1987). Suitable mammalian host cells for expressing recombinant proteins according to the invention include Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO cells) (including dhfr− CHO cells, described in Urlaub and Chasin, (1980) PNAS USA 77:4216-4220, used with a DHFR selectable marker, e.g., as described in Kaufman and Sharp (1982) Mol. Biol. 159:601-621, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference), NS0 myeloma cells, COS cells and SP2 cells. Other examples of useful mammalian host cell lines are monkey kidney CV1 line transformed by SV40 (COS-7, ATCC CRL 1651); human embryonic kidney line (293 or 293 cells subcloned for growth in suspension culture, Graham et al., J. Gen Virol. 36:59 (1977)); baby hamster kidney cells (BHK, ATCC CCL 10); Chinese hamster ovary cells/−DHFR (CHO, Urlaub et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77:4216 (1980)); mouse sertoli cells (TM4, Mather, Biol. Reprod. 23:243-251 (1980)); monkey kidney cells (CV1 ATCC CCL 70); African green monkey kidney cells (VERO-76, ATCC CRL-1587); human cervical carcinoma cells (HELA, ATCC CCL 2); canine kidney cells (MDCK, ATCC CCL 34); buffalo rat liver cells (BRL 3A, ATCC CRL 1442); human lung cells (W138, ATCC CCL 75); human liver cells (Hep G2, HB 8065); mouse mammary tumor (MMT 060562, ATCC CCL51); TRI cells (Mather et al., Annals N.Y. Acad. Sci. 383:44-68 (1982)); MRC 5 cells; FS4 cells; and a human hepatoma line (Hep G2), the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • When using the cell culture techniques of the instant invention, the protein of interest can be produced intracellularly, in the periplasmic space, or directly secreted into the medium. In embodiments where the protein of interest is produced intracellularly, the particulate debris, either host cells or lysed cells (e.g., resulting from homogenization), can be removed by a variety of means, including but not limited to, by centrifugation or ultrafiltration. Where the protein of interest is secreted into the medium, supernatants from such expression systems can be first concentrated using a commercially available protein concentration filter, e.g., an Amicon™ or Millipore Pellicon™ ultrafiltration unit, which can then be subjected to one or more additional purification techniques, including but not limited to affinity chromatography, including protein A affinity chromatography, ion exchange chromatography, such as anion or cation exchange chromatography, and hydrophobic interaction chromatography.
  • As used herein the term “on-line” refers to processes that are accomplished in the context of an on-going cell culture run. For example, the administration of a particular nutrient or changes in temperature, pH, or dissolved oxygen level occur on-line when such administrations or changes are implemented in an existing cell culture run. Similarly, measurements of certain data are considered on-line if that data is being collected in the context of a particular cell culture run. For example, on-line gas analysis refers to the measurement of gases introduced into or released from a particular cell culture run. In contrast, the term “off-line”, as used herein, refers to actions taken outside the context of a particular cell culture run. For example, the production of cell culture media comprising specific concentrations of particular components is an example of an off-line activity.
  • The term “modifying”, as used herein, is intended to refer to changing one or more amino acids in the antibodies or antigen-binding portions thereof. The change can be produced by adding, substituting or deleting an amino acid at one or more positions. The change can be produced using known techniques, such as PCR mutagenesis.
  • The term “about”, as used herein, is intended to refer to ranges of approximately 10-20% greater than or less than the referenced value. In certain circumstances, one of skill in the art will recognize that, due to the nature of the referenced value, the term “about” can mean more or less than a 10-20% deviation from that value.
  • The term “control”, as used herein, is intended to refer to both limitation as well as to modulation. For example, in certain embodiments, the instant invention provides methods for controlling diversity that decrease the diversity of certain characteristics of protein populations, including, but not limited to, the presence of acidic species. Such decreases in diversity can occur by: (1) promotion of a desired characteristic; (2) inhibition of an unwanted characteristic; or (3) a combination of the foregoing. As used herein, the term “control” also embraces contexts where heterogeneity is modulated, i.e., shifted, from one diverse population to a second population of equal, or even greater diversity, where the second population exhibits a distinct profile of the characteristic of interest.
  • 5.2 Antibody Generation
  • The term “antibody” as used in this section refers to an intact antibody or an antigen binding fragment thereof.
  • The antibodies of the present disclosure can be generated by a variety of techniques, including immunization of an animal with the antigen of interest followed by conventional monoclonal antibody methodologies e.g., the standard somatic cell hybridization technique of Kohler and Milstein (1975) Nature 256: 495. Although somatic cell hybridization procedures are preferred, in principle, other techniques for producing monoclonal antibody can be employed e.g., viral or oncogenic transformation of B lymphocytes.
  • One preferred animal system for preparing hybridomas is the murine system. Hybridoma production is a very well-established procedure. Immunization protocols and techniques for isolation of immunized splenocytes for fusion are known in the art. Fusion partners (e.g., murine myeloma cells) and fusion procedures are also known.
  • An antibody preferably can be a human, a chimeric, or a humanized antibody. Chimeric or humanized antibodies of the present disclosure can be prepared based on the sequence of a non-human monoclonal antibody prepared as described above. DNA encoding the heavy and light chain immunoglobulins can be obtained from the non-human hybridoma of interest and engineered to contain non-murine (e.g., human) immunoglobulin sequences using standard molecular biology techniques. For example, to create a chimeric antibody, murine variable regions can be linked to human constant regions using methods known in the art (see e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567 to Cabilly et al.). To create a humanized antibody, murine CDR regions can be inserted into a human framework using methods known in the art (see e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,225,539 to Winter, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,530,101; 5,585,089; 5,693,762 and 6,180,370 to Queen et al.).
  • In one non-limiting embodiment, the antibodies of this disclosure are human monoclonal antibodies. Such human monoclonal antibodies can be generated using transgenic or transchromosomic mice carrying parts of the human immune system rather than the mouse system. These transgenic and transchromosomic mice include mice referred to herein as the HuMAb Mouse® (Medarex, Inc.), KM Mouse® (Medarex, Inc.), and XenoMouse® (Amgen).
  • Moreover, alternative transchromosomic animal systems expressing human immunoglobulin genes are available in the art and can be used to raise antibodies of the disclosure. For example, mice carrying both a human heavy chain transchromosome and a human light chain transchromosome, referred to as “TC mice” can be used; such mice are described in Tomizuka et al. (2000) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 97:722-727. Furthermore, cows carrying human heavy and light chain transchromosomes have been described in the art (e.g., Kuroiwa et al. (2002) Nature Biotechnology 20:889-894 and PCT application No. WO 2002/092812) and can be used to raise antibodies of this disclosure.
  • Recombinant human antibodies of the invention can be isolated by screening of a recombinant combinatorial antibody library, e.g., a scFv phage display library, prepared using human VL and VH cDNAs prepared from mRNA derived from human lymphocytes.
  • Methodologies for preparing and screening such libraries are known in the art. In addition to commercially available kits for generating phage display libraries (e.g., the Pharmacia Recombinant Phage Antibody System, catalog no. 27-9400-01; and the Stratagene SurfZAP™ phage display kit, catalog no. 240612, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein), examples of methods and reagents particularly amenable for use in generating and screening antibody display libraries can be found in, e.g., Ladner et al. U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,409; Kang et al. PCT Publication No. WO 92/18619; Dower et al. PCT Publication No. WO 91/17271; Winter et al. PCT Publication No. WO 92/20791; Markland et al. PCT Publication No. WO 92/15679; Breitling et al. PCT Publication No. WO 93/01288; McCafferty et al. PCT Publication No. WO 92/01047; Garrard et al. PCT Publication No. WO 92/09690; Fuchs et al. (1991) Bio/Technology 9:1370-1372; Hay et al. (1992) Hum Antibod Hybridomas 3:81-85; Huse et al. (1989) Science 246:1275-1281; McCafferty et al., Nature (1990) 348:552-554; Griffiths et al. (1993) EMBO J 12:725-734; Hawkins et al. (1992) J Mol Biol 226:889-896; Clackson et al. (1991) Nature 352:624-628; Gram et al. (1992) PNAS 89:3576-3580; Garrard et al. (1991) Bio/Technology 9:1373-1377; Hoogenboom et al. (1991) Nuc Acid Res 19:4133-4137; and Barbas et al. (1991) PNAS 88:7978-7982; the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein.
  • Human monoclonal antibodies of this disclosure can also be prepared using SCID mice into which human immune cells have been reconstituted such that a human antibody response can be generated upon immunization. Such mice are described in, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,476,996 and 5,698,767 to Wilson et al.
  • In certain embodiments, the methods of the invention include anti-TNFα antibodies and antibody portions, anti-TNFα-related antibodies and antibody portions, and human antibodies and antibody portions with equivalent properties to anti-TNFα, such as high affinity binding to hTNFα with low dissociation kinetics and high neutralizing capacity. In one aspect, the invention provides treatment with an isolated human antibody, or an antigen-binding portion thereof, that dissociates from hTNFα with a Kd of about 1×10−8 M or less and a Koff rate constant of 1×10−3 s−1 or less, both determined by surface plasmon resonance. In specific non-limiting embodiments, an anti-TNFα antibody purified according to the invention competitively inhibits binding of Adalimumab to TNFα under physiological conditions.
  • Antibodies or fragments thereof, can be altered wherein the constant region of the antibody is modified to reduce at least one constant region-mediated biological effector function relative to an unmodified antibody. To modify an antibody of the invention such that it exhibits reduced binding to the Fc receptor, the immunoglobulin constant region segment of the antibody can be mutated at particular regions necessary for Fc receptor (FcR) interactions (see, e.g., Canfield and Morrison (1991) J. Exp. Med. 173:1483-1491; and Lund et al. (1991) J. of Immunol. 147:2657-2662, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein). Reduction in FcR binding ability of the antibody may also reduce other effector functions which rely on FcR interactions, such as opsonization and phagocytosis and antigen-dependent cellular cytotoxicity.
  • 5.3 Protein Production
  • To express a protein of the invention, such as an antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof, DNAs encoding the protein, such as DNAs encoding partial or full-length light and heavy chains in the case of antibodies, are inserted into one or more expression vector such that the genes are operatively linked to transcriptional and translational control sequences. (See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,914,128, the entire teaching of which is incorporated herein by reference.) In this context, the term “operatively linked” is intended to mean that a gene encoding the protein of interest is ligated into a vector such that transcriptional and translational control sequences within the vector serve their intended function of regulating the transcription and translation of the gene. The expression vector and expression control sequences are chosen to be compatible with the expression host cell used. In certain embodiments, the protein of interest will comprising multiple polypeptides, such as the heavy and light chains of an antibody. Thus, in certain embodiments, genes encoding multiple polypeptides, such as antibody light chain genes and antibody heavy chain genes, can be inserted into a separate vector or, more typically, the genes are inserted into the same expression vector. Genes are inserted into expression vectors by standard methods (e.g., ligation of complementary restriction sites on the gene fragment and vector, or blunt end ligation if no restriction sites are present). Prior to insertion of the gene or genes, the expression vector may already carry additional polypeptide sequences, such as, but no limited to, antibody constant region sequences. For example, one approach to converting the anti-TNFα antibody or anti-TNFα antibody-related VH and VL sequences to full-length antibody genes is to insert them into expression vectors already encoding heavy chain constant and light chain constant regions, respectively, such that the VH segment is operatively linked to the CH segment(s) within the vector and the VL segment is operatively linked to the CL segment within the vector. Additionally or alternatively, the recombinant expression vector can encode a signal peptide that facilitates secretion of the protein from a host cell. The gene can be cloned into the vector such that the signal peptide is linked in-frame to the amino terminus of the gene. The signal peptide can be an immunoglobulin signal peptide or a heterologous signal peptide (i.e., a signal peptide from a non-immunoglobulin protein).
  • In addition to protein coding genes, a recombinant expression vector of the invention can carry one or more regulatory sequence that controls the expression of the protein coding genes in a host cell. The term “regulatory sequence” is intended to include promoters, enhancers and other expression control elements (e.g., polyadenylation signals) that control the transcription or translation of the protein coding genes. Such regulatory sequences are described, e.g., in Goeddel; Gene Expression Technology: Methods in Enzymology 185, Academic Press, San Diego, Calif. (1990), the entire teaching of which is incorporated herein by reference. It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that the design of the expression vector, including the selection of regulatory sequences may depend on such factors as the choice of the host cell to be transformed, the level of expression of protein desired, etc. Suitable regulatory sequences for mammalian host cell expression include viral elements that direct high levels of protein expression in mammalian cells, such as promoters and/or enhancers derived from cytomegalovirus (CMV) (such as the CMV promoter/enhancer), Simian Virus 40 (SV40) (such as the SV40 promoter/enhancer), adenovirus, (e.g., the adenovirus major late promoter (AdMLP)) and polyoma. For further description of viral regulatory elements, and sequences thereof, see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,168,062 by Stinski, U.S. Pat. No. 4,510,245 by Bell et al. and U.S. Pat. No. 4,968,615 by Schaffner et al., the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • In addition to the protein coding genes and regulatory sequences, a recombinant expression vector of the invention may carry one or more additional sequences, such as a sequence that regulates replication of the vector in host cells (e.g., origins of replication) and/or a selectable marker gene. The selectable marker gene facilitates selection of host cells into which the vector has been introduced (see e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,399,216, 4,634,665 and 5,179,017, all by Axel et al., the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). For example, typically the selectable marker gene confers resistance to drugs, such as G418, hygromycin or methotrexate, on a host cell into which the vector has been introduced. Suitable selectable marker genes include the dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) gene (for use in dhfr− host cells with methotrexate selection/amplification) and the neo gene (for G418 selection).
  • An antibody, or antibody portion, of the invention can be prepared by recombinant expression of immunoglobulin light and heavy chain genes in a host cell. To express an antibody recombinantly, a host cell is transfected with one or more recombinant expression vectors carrying DNA fragments encoding the immunoglobulin light and heavy chains of the antibody such that the light and heavy chains are expressed in the host cell and secreted into the medium in which the host cells are cultured, from which medium the antibodies can be recovered. Standard recombinant DNA methodologies are used to obtain antibody heavy and light chain genes, incorporate these genes into recombinant expression vectors and introduce the vectors into host cells, such as those described in Sambrook, Fritsch and Maniatis (eds), Molecular Cloning; A Laboratory Manual, Second Edition, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., (1989), Ausubel et al. (eds.) Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Greene Publishing Associates, (1989) and in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,816,397 & 6,914,128, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein.
  • For expression of protein, for example, the light and heavy chains of an antibody, the expression vector(s) encoding the protein is (are) transfected into a host cell by standard techniques. The various forms of the term “transfection” are intended to encompass a wide variety of techniques commonly used for the introduction of exogenous DNA into a prokaryotic or eukaryotic host cell, e.g., electroporation, calcium-phosphate precipitation, DEAE-dextran transfection and the like. Although it is theoretically possible to express the proteins of the invention in either prokaryotic or eukaryotic host cells, expression of antibodies in eukaryotic cells, such as mammalian host cells, is suitable because such eukaryotic cells, and in particular mammalian cells, are more likely than prokaryotic cells to assemble and secrete a properly folded and immunologically active protein. Prokaryotic expression of protein genes has been reported to be ineffective for production of high yields of active protein (Boss and Wood (1985) Immunology Today 6:12-13, the entire teaching of which is incorporated herein by reference).
  • Suitable host cells for cloning or expressing the DNA in the vectors herein are the prokaryote, yeast, or higher eukaryote cells described above. Suitable prokaryotes for this purpose include eubacteria, such as Gram-negative or Gram-positive organisms, e.g., Enterobacteriaceae such as Escherichia, e.g., E. coli, Enterobacter, Erwinia, Klebsiella, Proteus, Salmonella, e.g., Salmonella typhimurium, Serratia, e.g., Serratia marcescans, and Shigella, as well as Bacilli such as B. subtilis and B. licheniformis (e.g., B. licheniformis 41P disclosed in DD 266,710 published Apr. 12, 1989), Pseudomonas such as P. aeruginosa, and Streptomyces. One suitable E. coli cloning host is E. coli 294 (ATCC 31,446), although other strains such as E. coli B, E. coli X1776 (ATCC 31,537), and E. coli W3110 (ATCC 27,325) are suitable. These examples are illustrative rather than limiting.
  • In addition to prokaryotes, eukaryotic microbes such as filamentous fungi or yeast are suitable cloning or expression hosts for polypeptide encoding vectors. Saccharomyces cerevisiae, or common baker's yeast, is the most commonly used among lower eukaryotic host microorganisms. However, a number of other genera, species, and strains are commonly available and useful herein, such as Schizosaccharomyces pombe; Kluyveromyces hosts such as, e.g., K. lactis, K. fragilis (ATCC 12,424), K. bulgaricus (ATCC 16,045), K. wickeramii (ATCC 24,178), K. waltii (ATCC 56,500), K. drosophilarum (ATCC 36,906), K. thermotolerans, and K. marxianus; yarrowia (EP 402,226); Pichia pastoris (EP 183,070); Candida; Trichoderma reesia (EP 244,234); Neurospora crassa; Schwanniomyces such as Schwanniomyces occidentalis; and filamentous fungi such as, e.g., Neurospora, Penicillium, Tolypocladium, and Aspergillus hosts such as A. nidulans and A. niger.
  • Suitable host cells for the expression of glycosylated proteins, for example, glycosylated antibodies, are derived from multicellular organisms. Examples of invertebrate cells include plant and insect cells. Numerous baculoviral strains and variants and corresponding permissive insect host cells from hosts such as Spodoptera frugiperda (caterpillar), Aedes aegypti (mosquito), Aedes albopictus (mosquito), Drosophila melanogaster (fruitfly), and Bombyx mori have been identified. A variety of viral strains for transfection are publicly available, e.g., the L-1 variant of Autographa californica NPV and the Bm-5 strain of Bombyx mori NPV, and such viruses may be used as the virus herein according to the present invention, particularly for transfection of Spodoptera frugiperda cells. Plant cell cultures of cotton, corn, potato, soybean, petunia, tomato, and tobacco can also be utilized as hosts.
  • Suitable mammalian host cells for expressing the recombinant proteins of the invention include Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO cells) (including dhfr− CHO cells, described in Urlaub and Chasin, (1980) PNAS USA 77:4216-4220, used with a DHFR selectable marker, e.g., as described in Kaufman and Sharp (1982) Mol. Biol. 159:601-621, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference), NS0 myeloma cells, COS cells and SP2 cells. When recombinant expression vectors encoding protein genes are introduced into mammalian host cells, the antibodies are produced by culturing the host cells for a period of time sufficient to allow for expression of the antibody in the host cells or secretion of the antibody into the culture medium in which the host cells are grown. Other examples of useful mammalian host cell lines are monkey kidney CV1 line transformed by SV40 (COS-7, ATCC CRL 1651); human embryonic kidney line (293 or 293 cells subcloned for growth in suspension culture, Graham et al., J. Gen Virol. 36:59 (1977)); baby hamster kidney cells (BHK, ATCC CCL 10); Chinese hamster ovary cells/−DHFR (CHO, Urlaub et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77:4216 (1980)); mouse sertoli cells (TM4, Mather, Biol. Reprod. 23:243-251 (1980)); monkey kidney cells (CV1 ATCC CCL 70); African green monkey kidney cells (VERO-76, ATCC CRL-1587); human cervical carcinoma cells (HELA, ATCC CCL 2); canine kidney cells (MDCK, ATCC CCL 34); buffalo rat liver cells (BRL 3A, ATCC CRL 1442); human lung cells (W138, ATCC CCL 75); human liver cells (Hep G2, HB 8065); mouse mammary tumor (MMT 060562, ATCC CCL51); TRI cells (Mather et al., Annals N.Y. Acad. Sci. 383:44-68 (1982)); MRC 5 cells; FS4 cells; and a human hepatoma line (Hep G2), the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • Host cells are transformed with the above-described expression or cloning vectors for protein production and cultured in conventional nutrient media modified as appropriate for inducing promoters, selecting transformants, or amplifying the genes encoding the desired sequences.
  • The host cells used to produce a protein may be cultured in a variety of media. Commercially available media such as Ham's F10™ (Sigma), Minimal Essential Medium™ (MEM), (Sigma), RPMI-1640 (Sigma), and Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium™ (DMEM), (Sigma) are suitable for culturing the host cells. In addition, any of the media described in Ham et al., Meth. Enz. 58:44 (1979), Barnes et al., Anal. Biochem. 102:255 (1980), U.S. Pat. No. 4,767,704; 4,657,866; 4,927,762; 4,560,655; or 5,122,469; WO 90/03430; WO 87/00195; or U.S. Pat. No. Re. 30,985 may be used as culture media for the host cells, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference. Any of these media may be supplemented as necessary with hormones and/or other growth factors (such as insulin, transferrin, or epidermal growth factor), salts (such as sodium chloride, calcium, magnesium, and phosphate), buffers (such as HEPES), nucleotides (such as adenosine and thymidine), antibiotics (such as gentamycin drug), trace elements (defined as inorganic compounds usually present at final concentrations in the micromolar range), and glucose or an equivalent energy source. Any other necessary supplements may also be included at appropriate concentrations that would be known to those skilled in the art. The culture conditions, such as temperature, pH, and the like, are those previously used with the host cell selected for expression, and will be apparent to the ordinarily skilled artisan.
  • Host cells can also be used to produce portions of intact proteins, for example, antibodies, including Fab fragments or scFv molecules. It is understood that variations on the above procedure are within the scope of the present invention. For example, in certain embodiments it may be desirable to transfect a host cell with DNA encoding either the light chain or the heavy chain (but not both) of an antibody. Recombinant DNA technology may also be used to remove some or all of the DNA encoding either or both of the light and heavy chains that is not necessary for binding to an antigen. The molecules expressed from such truncated DNA molecules are also encompassed by the antibodies of the invention. In addition, bifunctional antibodies may be produced in which one heavy and one light chain are an antibody of the invention and the other heavy and light chain are specific for an antigen other than the target antibody, depending on the specificity of the antibody of the invention, by crosslinking an antibody of the invention to a second antibody by standard chemical crosslinking methods.
  • In a suitable system for recombinant expression of a protein, for example, an antibody, or antigen-binding portion thereof, a recombinant expression vector encoding the protein, for example, both an antibody heavy chain and an antibody light chain, is introduced into dhfr-CHO cells by calcium phosphate-mediated transfection. Within the recombinant expression vector, the protein gene(s) are each operatively linked to CMV enhancer/AdMLP promoter regulatory elements to drive high levels of transcription of the gene(s). The recombinant expression vector also carries a DHFR gene, which allows for selection of CHO cells that have been transfected with the vector using methotrexate selection/amplification. The selected transformant host cells are cultured to allow for expression of the protein, for example, the antibody heavy and light chains, and intact protein, for example, an antibody, is recovered from the culture medium. Standard molecular biology techniques are used to prepare the recombinant expression vector, transfect the host cells, select for transformants, culture the host cells and recover the protein from the culture medium.
  • When using recombinant techniques, the protein, for example, antibodies or antigen binding fragments thereof, can be produced intracellularly, in the periplasmic space, or directly secreted into the medium. In one aspect, if the protein is produced intracellularly, as a first step, the particulate debris, either host cells or lysed cells (e.g., resulting from homogenization), can be removed, e.g., by centrifugation or ultrafiltration. Where the protein is secreted into the medium, supernatants from such expression systems can be first concentrated using a commercially available protein concentration filter, e.g., an Amicon™ or Millipore Pellicon™ ultrafiltration unit.
  • Numerous populations of proteins expressed by host cells, including, but not limited to, host cells expressing antibodies, such as adalimumab, may comprise a number of acidic species, and are therefore amenable to the instant invention's methods for control of acidic species heterogeneity. For example, weak cation-exchange chromatography (WCX) analysis of adalimumab has shown the presence of acidic regions. These acidic species are classified as product-related impurities that are relatively acidic when compared to the adalimumab protein population. The presence of these acidic species provides an exemplary system to identify those cell culture conditions that allow for control over acidic species heterogeneity.
  • 5.3.1 Adjusting Amino Acid Concentration to Control Acidic Species
  • The variation in raw materials used in cell culture, particularly in the context of media preparation, can vary product quality significantly.
  • In certain embodiments of the instant invention, control of acidic species heterogeneity can be attained by adjustment of the media composition of the cell culture run. In certain embodiments, such adjustment will be to increase the amount of one or more amino acids in the media, while in other embodiments the necessary adjustment to achieve the desired control over acidic species heterogeneity will involve a decrease in the amount of one or more amino acids in the media. Such increases or decreases in the amount of the one or more amino acids can be of a magnitude of 1%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, and ranges within one or more of the preceding, of the original amount.
  • In certain embodiments, a cell culture media will include one or more of the amino acids, or other compositions, described herein as facilitating a reduction in acidic species. In certain embodiments the amount of the amino acid, or other composition, that is necessary to be supplemented may be adjusted to account for the amount present in the media prior to supplementation.
  • In certain embodiments, the cell culture media is supplemented with one or more amino acids wherein each of the one or more amino acids is supplemented in an amount of between about 0.025 and 20 g/L, or between about 0.05 and 15 g/L, or between about 0.1 and 14 g/L, or between about 0.2 and 13 g/L, or between about 0.25 and 12 g/L, or between about 0.5 and 11 g/L, or between about 1 and 10 g/L, or between about 1.5 and 9.5 g/L, or between about 2 and 9 g/L, or between about 2.5 and 8.5 g/L, or between about 3 and 8 g/L, or between about 3.5 and 7.5 g/L, or between about 4 and 7 g/L, or between about 4.5 and 6.5 g/L, or between about 5 and 6 g/L. In certain embodiments, the cell culture media is supplemented with one or more amino acids wherein each of the one or more amino acids is supplemented in an amount of about 0.25 g/L, or about 0.5 g/L, or about 1 g/L, or about 2 g/L, or about 4 g/L, or about 8 g/L.
  • In certain embodiments, the cell culture media is supplemented with one or more amino acids wherein each of the one or more amino acids is supplemented in an amount effective to reduce the amount of acidic species heterogeneity in a protein or antibody sample by about 1%, 1.2%, 1.5%, 2%, 2.2%, 2.5%, 3%, 3.2%, 3.5%, 4%, 4.2%, 4.5%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, and ranges within one or more of the preceding.
  • In certain embodiments, the one or more amino acids used to supplement the cell culture media is a basic amino acid. In certain embodiments the one or more amino acids is arginine, lysine, histidine, ornithine, or certain combinations of arginine or lysine with ornithine or of all four amino acids. In certain embodiments, the amino acids are provided as single peptides, as dipeptides, as tripeptides or as longer oligopeptides. In certain embodiments, the di-, tri-, and/or oligopeptides are individually composed of a single amino acid, while in alternative embodiments, the di-, tri-, and/or oligopeptides are individually composed of two or more particular amino acids. In certain embodiments, the amount of amino acid supplemented to the cell culture to achieve concentrations of about 0 to about 9 g/l for arginine, about 0 to about 11 g/l for lysine, about 0 to about 11 g/l histidine, and about 0 to about 11 g/l ornithine. Although wider ranges are also within the scope of the instant invention, including, but not limited to: about 0 to about 30 g/l for arginine, about 0 to about 30 g/l for lysine, about 0 to about 30 g/l histidine, and about 0 to about 30 g/l ornithine.
  • For example, and not by way of limitation, as detailed in Example 6.1, below, when the production medium employed in the example was supplemented with arginine to achieve a total concentration of 9 g/L arginine, the total amount of acidic species of adalimumab present in a cell culture sample after purification was reduced from 19.7% of a control sample to 12.2% of the sample purified from the cells cultured with the arginine supplemented media. Similarly, when the production medium employed in the example was supplemented with lysine, or histidine, or ornithine to achieve total concentrations of 11 g/L lysine, 10 g/L ornithine or 10 g/L histidine, respectively, the total amount of acidic species of adalimumab present in a cell culture sample after purification was reduced by 11.5%, 10.4% and 10.9%, respectively, compared to a control sample.
  • In certain embodiments, control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing the media of cells expressing the protein of interest medium supplements described herein such that they can be included in the medium at the start of culture, or can be added in a fed-batch or in a continuous manner. The feed amounts may be calculated to achieve a certain concentration based on offline or online measurements. The supplements may be added as multimers, e.g., arg-arg, his-his, arg-his-orn, etc., and/or as chemical variants, e.g., of amino acids or analogs of amino acids, salt forms of amino acids, controlled release of amino acids by immobilizing in gels, etc, and/or in fully or partially dissolved form. The addition of one or more supplement may be based on measured amount of acidic species. The resulting media can be used in various cultivation methods including, but not limited to, batch, fed-batch, chemostat and perfusion, and with various cell culture equipment including, but not limited to, shake flasks with or without suitable agitation, spinner flasks, stirred bioreactors, airlift bioreactors, membrane bioreactors, reactors with cells retained on a solid support or immobilized/entrapped as in microporous beads, and any other configuration appropriate for optimal growth and productivity of the desired cell line. In addition, the harvest criterion for these cultures may be chosen, for example based on choice of harvest viability or culture duration, to further optimize a certain targeted acidic species profile.
  • 5.3.1 Adjusting CaCl2 and/or Niacinamide Concentration to Control Acidic Species
  • In certain embodiments, the cell culture media is supplemented with calcium (e.g., as calcium chloride dihydrate), wherein the calcium is supplemented to achieve a calcium concentration of between about 0.05 and 2.5 mM, or between about 0.05 and 1 mM, or between about 0.1 and 0.8 mM, or between about 0.15 and 0.7 mM, or between about 0.2 and 0.6 mM, or between about 0.25 and 0.5 mM, or between about 0.3 and 0.4 mM.
  • In certain embodiments, the cell culture media is supplemented with calcium (e.g., as calcium chloride dihydrate) wherein the calcium is supplemented in an amount effective to reduce the amount of acidic species heterogeneity in a protein or antibody sample by about 1%, 1.2%, 1.5%, 2%, 2.2%, 2.5%, 3%, 3.2%, 3.5%, 4%, 4.2%, 4.5%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, and ranges within one or more of the preceding.
  • For example, and not by way of limitation, as detailed in Example 6.3, below, when the production medium employed in the example was supplemented with calcium (e.g., as calcium chloride dihydrate) at a concentration of 1.05 mM, the total amount of acidic species of adalimumab present in a cell culture sample after purification was reduced from 23.2% of a control sample to 16.5% of the sample purified from the cells cultured with the calcium supplemented media.
  • In certain embodiments, the cell culture can be supplemented with a combination of calcium, e.g., CaCl2, and one or more a basic amino acids. In certain embodiments the one or more basic amino acids is arginine, lysine, histidine, ornithine, or combinations of arginine or lysine with ornithine or of all four amino acids. In certain embodiments, the amino acids are provided as single peptides, as dipeptides, as tripeptides or as longer oligopeptides. In certain embodiments, the di-, tri-, and/or oligopeptides are individually composed of a single amino acid, while in alternative embodiments, the di-, tri-, and/or oligopeptides are individually composed of two or more particular amino acids. In certain embodiments, the amount of basic amino acid concentrations in combination with calcium in the cell culture is between about 0 to about 9 g/l for arginine, about 0 to about 11 g/l for lysine, about 0 to about 11 g/l histidine, and about 0 to about 11 g/l ornithine. Although wider ranges are also within the scope of the instant invention, including, but not limited to: about 0 to about 30 g/l for arginine, about 0 to about 30 g/l for lysine, about 0 to about 30 g/l histidine, and about 0 to about 30 g/l ornithine.
  • In certain embodiments, the cell culture media is supplemented with niacinamide, wherein the niacinamide is supplemented to achieve a niacinamide concentration of between about 0.2 and 3.0 mM, or between about 0.4 and 3.0 mM, or between about 0.8 and 3.0 mM.
  • In certain embodiments, the cell culture media is supplemented with niacinamide wherein the niacinamide is supplemented in an amount effective to reduce the amount of acidic species heterogeneity in a protein or antibody sample by about 1%, 1.2%, 1.5%, 2%, 2.2%, 2.5%, 3%, 3.2%, 3.5%, 4%, 4.2%, 4.5%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, and ranges within one or more of the preceding.
  • For example, and not by way of limitation, as detailed in Example 6.3, below, when the production medium employed in the example was supplemented with niacinamide at a concentration of 1.6 mM, the total amount of acidic species of adalimumab present in a cell culture sample after purification was reduced from 19.9% of a control sample to 15.9% of the sample purified from the cells cultured with the niacinamide supplemented media. In a separate example, where the media was supplemented with 3 mM niacinamide, the total amount of acidic species of adalimumab present in a cell culture sample after purification was reduced from 27.0% of a control sample to 19.8% of the sample purified from the cells cultured with the niacinamide supplemented media.
  • In certain embodiments, the cell culture can be supplemented with a combination of niacinamide, calcium, e.g., CaCl2, and/or one or more a basic amino acids. In certain embodiments the one or more basic amino acids is arginine, lysine, histidine, ornithine, or combinations of arginine or lysine with ornithine or of all four amino acids. In certain embodiments, the amino acids are provided as single peptides, as dipeptides, as tripeptides or as longer oligopeptides. In certain embodiments, the di-, tri-, and/or oligopeptides are individually composed of a single amino acid, while in alternative embodiments, the di-, tri-, and/or oligopeptides are individually composed of two or more particular amino acids. In certain embodiments, the amount of basic amino acid concentrations (after supplementation) in combination with calcium in the cell culture is between about 0 to about 9 g/l for arginine, about 0 to about 11 g/l for lysine, about 0 to about 11 g/l histidine, and about 0 to about 11 g/l ornithine. Although wider ranges are also within the scope of the instant invention, including, but not limited to: about 0 to about 30 g/l for arginine, about 0 to about 30 g/l for lysine, about 0 to about 30 g/l histidine, and about 0 to about 30 g/l ornithine.
  • In certain embodiments, control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture is exerted by supplementing the media of cells expressing the protein of interest medium supplements described herein such that they can be included in the medium at the start of culture, or can be added in a fed-batch or in a continuous manner. The feed amounts may be calculated to achieve a certain concentration based on offline or online measurements. The addition of the supplement may be based on measured amount of acidic species. Other salts of particular supplements, e.g., calcium, may also be used, for example Calcium Nitrate. The resulting media can be used in various cultivation methods including, but not limited to, batch, fed-batch, chemostat and perfusion, and with various cell culture equipment including, but not limited to, shake flasks with or without suitable agitation, spinner flasks, stirred bioreactors, airlift bioreactors, membrane bioreactors, reactors with cells retained on a solid support or immobilized/entrapped as in microporous beads, and any other configuration appropriate for optimal growth and productivity of the desired cell line.
  • In certain embodiments, control over amount and/or rate of formation of acidic species is achieved by supplementing a clarified harvest. For example, but not by way of limitation, such clarified harvests can be supplemented as described above (e.g., with calcium, niacinamide, and/or basic amino acids) to achieve a reduction the amount of acidic species and/or a reduction in the rate such acidic species form.
  • 5.3.3 Adjusting Process Parameters to Control Acidic Species
  • In certain embodiments of the instant invention, control of acidic species heterogeneity can be attained by adjustment of pH of the cell culture run. In certain embodiments, such adjustment will be to decrease in the pH of the cell culture. Such decreases in the pH, can be of a magnitude of 1%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, and ranges within one or more of the preceding, of the original amount.
  • In certain embodiments, pH is either increased or decreased in order to increase or decrease the amount of acidic species and/or the rate at which such acidic species form. For example, but not by way of limitation, a reduction in pH to 6.7 from a control pH of 7.1 can be employed to decrease the acidic species during cell culture and the rate of acidic species formation in the context of a clarified harvest.
  • In certain embodiments, the pH is maintained in such a manner as to reduce the amount of acidic species in a protein or antibody sample by about 1%, 1.2%, 1.5%, 2%, 2.2%, 2.5%, 3%, 3.2%, 3.5%, 4%, 4.2%, 4.5%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, and ranges within one or more of the preceding.
  • In certain embodiments, control over the amount of acidic species of protein produced by cell culture can be exerted by maintaining the pH of the cell culture expressing the protein of interest as described herein along with choice of suitable temperature or temperature shift strategies, for example, but not limited to, lower process temperature of operation, temperature shift to a lower temperature or a temperature shift at an earlier culture time point. These culture conditions can be used in various cultivation methods including, but not limited to, batch, fed-batch, chemostat and perfusion, and with various cell culture equipment including, but not limited to, shake flasks with or without suitable agitation, spinner flasks, stirred bioreactors, airlift bioreactors, membrane bioreactors, reactors with cells retained on a solid support or immobilized/entrapped as in microporous beads, and any other configuration appropriate for optimal growth and productivity of the desired cell line. These may also be used in combination with supplementation of culture media with amino acids, niacinamide, and/or calcium salt, as described above.
  • 5.3.4 Continuous/Perfusion Cell Culture Technology to Control Acidic Species
  • In certain embodiments of the instant invention, control of acidic species heterogeneity can be attained by the choice of cell culture methodology. In certain embodiments, use of a continuous or perfusion technology may be utilized to achieve the desired control over acidic species heterogeneity. In certain embodiments, this may be attained through choice of medium exchange rate (where the exchange rate is the rate of exchange of medium in/out of a reactor). Such increases or decreases in medium exchange rates may be of magnitude of 1%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, and ranges within one or more of the preceding, of the original amount.
  • In certain, non-limiting, embodiments, maintenance of the medium exchange rates (working volumes/day) of a cell culture run between 0 and 20, or between 0.5 and 12 or between 1 and 8 or between 1.5 and 6 can be used to achieve the desired reduction in acidic species.
  • For example, and not by way of limitation, as detailed in Example 6.4, below, when the medium exchange rate was chosen to be 1.5, the acidic species was 8.1%. With further increase in exchange rates to 6, a further reduction in acidic species to 6% was obtained.
  • In certain embodiments, the choice of cell culture methodology that allows for control of acidic species heterogeneity can also include, for example, but not by way of limitation, employment of an intermittent harvest strategy or through use of cell retention device technology.
  • 5.4 Protein Purification
  • 5.4.1 Protein Purification Generally
  • In certain embodiments, the methods of the present invention can be used in combination with techniques for protein purification to provide for the production of a purified protein preparation, for example, a preparation comprising an antibody or an antigen binding fragment thereof, from a mixture comprising a protein and at least one process-related impurity or product-related substance.
  • For example, but not by way of limitation, once a clarified solution or mixture comprising the protein of interest, for example, an antibody or antigen binding fragment thereof, has been obtained, separation of the protein of interest from the process-related impurities and/or product-related substances can be performed using a combination of different purification techniques, including, but not limited to, affinity separation steps, ion exchange separation steps, mixed mode separation steps, and hydrophobic interaction separation steps. The separation steps separate mixtures of proteins on the basis of their charge, degree of hydrophobicity, or size. In one aspect of the invention, separation is performed using chromatography, including cationic, anionic, and hydrophobic interaction. Several different chromatography resins are available for each of these techniques, allowing accurate tailoring of the purification scheme to the particular protein involved. The essence of each of the separation methods is that proteins can be caused either to traverse at different rates down a column, achieving a physical separation that increases as they pass further down the column, or to adhere selectively to the separation medium, being then differentially eluted by different solvents. In some cases, the antibody is separated from impurities when the impurities specifically adhere to the column and the antibody does not, i.e., the antibody is present in the flow through.
  • As noted above, accurate tailoring of a purification scheme relies on consideration of the protein to be purified. In certain embodiments, the separation steps of employed in connection with the cell culture methods of the instant invention facilitate the separation of an antibody from one or more process-related impurity and/or product-related substance. Antibodies that can be successfully purified using the methods described herein include, but are not limited to, human IgA1, IgA2, IgD, IgE, IgG1, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, and IgM antibodies. In certain embodiments, Protein A affinity chromatography can be useful, however, in certain embodiments, the use of Protein A affinity chromatography would prove useful, for example in the context of the purification of IgG3 antibodies, as IgG3 antibodies bind to Protein A inefficiently. Other factors that allow for specific tailoring of a purification scheme include, but are not limited to: the presence or absence of an Fc region (e.g., in the context of full length antibody as compared to an Fab fragment thereof) because Protein A binds to the Fc region; the particular germline sequences employed in generating to antibody of interest; and the amino acid composition of the antibody (e.g., the primary sequence of the antibody as well as the overall charge/hydrophobicity of the molecule). Antibodies sharing one or more characteristic can be purified using purification strategies tailored to take advantage of that characteristic.
  • 5.4.2 Primary Recovery and Virus Inactivation
  • In certain embodiments, it will be advantageous to subject a sample produced by the techniques of the instant invention to at least a first phase of clarification and primary recovery. In addition, the primary recovery process can also be a point at which to reduce or inactivate viruses that can be present in the sample mixture. For example, any one or more of a variety of methods of viral reduction/inactivation can be used during the primary recovery phase of purification including heat inactivation (pasteurization), pH inactivation, solvent/detergent treatment, UV and γ-ray irradiation and the addition of certain chemical inactivating agents such as β-propiolactone or e.g., copper phenanthroline as in U.S. Pat. No. 4,534,972, the entire teaching of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • The primary recovery may also include one or more centrifugation steps to further clarify the sample mixture and thereby aid in purifying the protein of interest. Centrifugation of the sample can be run at, for example, but not by way of limitation, 7,000×g to approximately 12,750×g. In the context of large scale purification, such centrifugation can occur on-line with a flow rate set to achieve, for example, but not by way of limitation, a turbidity level of 150 NTU in the resulting supernatant. Such supernatant can then be collected for further purification.
  • In certain embodiments, the primary recovery may also include the use of one or more depth filtration steps to further clarify the sample matrix and thereby aid in purifying the antibodies produced using the cell culture techniques of the present invention. Depth filters contain filtration media having a graded density. Such graded density allows larger particles to be trapped near the surface of the filter while smaller particles penetrate the larger open areas at the surface of the filter, only to be trapped in the smaller openings nearer to the center of the filter. In certain embodiments, the depth filtration step can be a delipid depth filtration step. Although certain embodiments employ depth filtration steps only during the primary recovery phase, other embodiments employ depth filters, including delipid depth filters, during one or more additional phases of purification. Non-limiting examples of depth filters that can be used in the context of the instant invention include the Cuno™ model 30/60ZA depth filters (3M Corp.), and 0.45/0.2 μm Sartopore™ bi-layer filter cartridges.
  • 5.4.3 Affinity Chromatography
  • In certain embodiments, it will be advantageous to subject a sample produced by the techniques of the instant invention to affinity chromatography to further purify the protein of interest away from process-related impurities and/or product-related substances. In certain embodiments the chromatographic material is capable of selectively or specifically binding to the protein of interest. Non-limiting examples of such chromatographic material include: Protein A, Protein G, chromatographic material comprising, for example, an antigen bound by an antibody of interest, and chromatographic material comprising an Fc binding protein. In specific embodiments, the affinity chromatography step involves subjecting the primary recovery sample to a column comprising a suitable Protein A resin. In certain embodiments, Protein A resin is useful for affinity purification and isolation of a variety of antibody isotypes, particularly IgG1, IgG2, and IgG4. Protein A is a bacterial cell wall protein that binds to mammalian IgGs primarily through their Fc regions. In its native state, Protein A has five IgG binding domains as well as other domains of unknown function.
  • There are several commercial sources for Protein A resin. One suitable resin is MabSelect™ from GE Healthcare. A non-limiting example of a suitable column packed with MabSelect™ is an about 1.0 cm diameter×about 21.6 cm long column (˜17 mL bed volume). This size column can be used for small scale purifications and can be compared with other columns used for scale ups. For example, a 20 cm×21 cm column whose bed volume is about 6.6 L can be used for larger purifications. Regardless of the column, the column can be packed using a suitable resin such as MabSelect™.
  • 5.4.4 Ion Exchange Chromatography
  • In certain embodiments, it will be advantageous to subject a sample produced by the techniques of the instant invention to ion exchange chromatography in order to purify the protein of interest away from process-related impurities and/or product-related substances. Ion exchange separation includes any method by which two substances are separated based on the difference in their respective ionic charges, and can employ either cationic exchange material or anionic exchange material. For example, the use of a cationic exchange material versus an anionic exchange material is based on the localized charges of the protein. Therefore, it is within the scope of this invention to employ an anionic exchange step prior to the use of a cationic exchange step, or a cationic exchange step prior to the use of an anionic exchange step. Furthermore, it is within the scope of this invention to employ only a cationic exchange step, only an anionic exchange step, or any serial combination of the two.
  • In performing the separation, the initial protein mixture can be contacted with the ion exchange material by using any of a variety of techniques, e.g., using a batch purification technique or a chromatographic technique.
  • Anionic or cationic substituents may be attached to matrices in order to form anionic or cationic supports for chromatography. Non-limiting examples of anionic exchange substituents include diethylaminoethyl (DEAE), quaternary aminoethyl (QAE) and quaternary amine (Q) groups. Cationic substituents include carboxymethyl (CM), sulfoethyl (SE), sulfopropyl (SP), phosphate (P) and sulfonate (S). Cellulose ion exchange resins such as DE23™, DE32™, DE52™, CM-23™, CM-32™, and CM-52™ are available from Whatman Ltd. Maidstone, Kent, U.K. SEPHADEX®-based and -locross-linked ion exchangers are also known. For example, DEAE-, QAE-, CM-, and SP-SEPHADEX® and DEAE-, Q-, CM- and S-SEPHAROSE® and SEPHAROSE® Fast Flow are all available from Pharmacia AB. Further, both DEAE and CM derivitized ethylene glycol-methacrylate copolymer such as TOYOPEARL™ DEAE-650S or M and TOYOPEARL™ CM-650S or M are available from Toso Haas Co., Philadelphia, Pa.
  • 5.4.5 Ultrafiltration/Diafiltration
  • In certain embodiments, it will be advantageous to subject a sample produced by the techniques of the instant invention to ultrafiltration and/or diafiltration in order to purify the protein of interest away from process-related impurities and/or product-related substances. Ultrafiltration is described in detail in: Microfiltration and Ultrafiltration: Principles and Applications, L. Zeman and A. Zydney (Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., 1996); and in: Ultrafiltration Handbook, Munir Cheryan (Technomic Publishing, 1986; ISBN No. 87762-456-9). A preferred filtration process is Tangential Flow Filtration as described in the Millipore catalogue entitled “Pharmaceutical Process Filtration Catalogue” pp. 177-202 (Bedford, Mass., 1995/96). Ultrafiltration is generally considered to mean filtration using filters with a pore size of smaller than 0.1 μm. By employing filters having such small pore size, the volume of the sample can be reduced through permeation of the sample buffer through the filter while antibodies are retained behind the filter.
  • Diafiltration is a method of using ultrafilters to remove and exchange salts, sugars, and non-aqueous solvents, to separate free from bound species, to remove low molecular-weight material, and/or to cause the rapid change of ionic and/or pH environments. Microsolutes are removed most efficiently by adding solvent to the solution being ultrafiltered at a rate approximately equal to the ultratfiltration rate. This washes microspecies from the solution at a constant volume, effectively purifying the retained protein. In certain embodiments of the present invention, a diafiltration step is employed to exchange the various buffers used in connection with the instant invention, optionally prior to further chromatography or other purification steps, as well as to remove impurities from the protein preparations.
  • 5.4.6 Hydrophobic Interaction Chromatography
  • In certain embodiments, it will be advantageous to subject a sample produced by the techniques of the instant invention to hydrophobic interaction chromatography in order to purify the protein of interest away from process-related impurities and/or product-related substances. For example, a first eluate obtained from an ion exchange column can be subjected to a hydrophobic interaction material such that a second eluate having a reduced level of impurity is obtained. Hydrophobic interaction chromatography (HIC) steps, such as those disclosed herein, are generally performed to remove protein aggregates, such as antibody aggregates, and process-related impurities.
  • In performing an HIC-based separation, the sample mixture is contacted with the HIC material, e.g., using a batch purification technique or using a column. Prior to HIC purification it may be desirable to remove any chaotropic agents or very hydrophobic substances, e.g., by passing the mixture through a pre-column.
  • Whereas ion exchange chromatography relies on the charges of the protein to isolate them, hydrophobic interaction chromatography uses the hydrophobic properties of the protein. Hydrophobic groups on the protein interact with hydrophobic groups on the column. The more hydrophobic a protein is the stronger it will interact with the column. Thus the HIC step removes host cell derived impurities (e.g., DNA and other high and low molecular weight product-related species).
  • Hydrophobic interactions are strongest at high ionic strength, therefore, this form of separation is conveniently performed following salt precipitations or ion exchange procedures. Adsorption of the protein of interest to a HIC column is favored by high salt concentrations, but the actual concentrations can vary over a wide range depending on the nature of the protein and the particular HIC ligand chosen. Various ions can be arranged in a so-called soluphobic series depending on whether they promote hydrophobic interactions (salting-out effects) or disrupt the structure of water (chaotropic effect) and lead to the weakening of the hydrophobic interaction. Cations are ranked in terms of increasing salting out effect as Ba++; Ca++; Mg++; Li+; Cs+; Na+; K+; Rb+; NH4+, while anions may be ranked in terms of increasing chaotropic effect as PO−−−; SO4 −−; CH3CO3 ; Cl; Br; NO3 ; ClO4 ; I; SCN.
  • In general, Na, K or NH4 sulfates effectively promote ligand-protein interaction in HIC. Salts may be formulated that influence the strength of the interaction as given by the following relationship: (NH4)2SO4>Na2SO4>NaCl>NH4Cl>NaBr>NaSCN. In general, salt concentrations of between about 0.75 and about 2 M ammonium sulfate or between about 1 and 4 M NaCl are useful.
  • HIC columns normally comprise a base matrix (e.g., cross-linked agarose or synthetic copolymer material) to which hydrophobic ligands (e.g., alkyl or aryl groups) are coupled. A suitable HIC column comprises an agarose resin substituted with phenyl groups (e.g., a Phenyl Sepharose™ column). Many HIC columns are available commercially. Examples include, but are not limited to, Phenyl Sepharose™ 6 Fast Flow column with low or high substitution (Pharmacia LKB Biotechnology, AB, Sweden); Phenyl Sepharose™ High Performance column (Pharmacia LKB Biotechnology, AB, Sweden); Octyl Sepharose™ High Performance column (Pharmacia LKB Biotechnology, AB, Sweden); Fractogel™ EMD Propyl or Fractogel™ EMD Phenyl columns (E. Merck, Germany); Macro-Prep™ Mehyl or Macro-Prep™ t-Butyl Supports (Bio-Rad, California); WP HI-Propyl (C3)™ column (J. T. Baker, New Jersey); and Toyopearl™ ether, phenyl or butyl columns (TosoHaas, PA).
  • 5.4.7 Multimodal Chromatography
  • In certain embodiments, it will be advantageous to subject a sample produced by the techniques of the instant invention to multimodal chromatography in order to purify the protein of interest away from process-related impurities and/or product-related substances. Multimodal chromatography is chromatography that utilizes a multimodal media resin. Such a resin comprises a multimodal chromatography ligand. In certain embodiments, such a ligand refers to a ligand that is capable of providing at least two different, but co-operative, sites which interact with the substance to be bound. One of these sites gives an attractive type of charge-charge interaction between the ligand and the substance of interest. The other site typically gives electron acceptor-donor interaction and/or hydrophobic and/or hydrophilic interactions. Electron donor-acceptor interactions include interactions such as hydrogen-bonding, π-π, cation-π, charge transfer, dipole-dipole, induced dipole etc. Multimodal chromatography ligands are also known as “mixed mode” chromatography ligands.
  • In certain embodiments, the multimodal chromatography resin is comprised of multimodal ligands coupled to an organic or inorganic support, sometimes denoted a base matrix, directly or via a spacer. The support may be in the form of particles, such as essentially spherical particles, a monolith, filter, membrane, surface, capillaries, etc. In certain embodiments, the support is prepared from a native polymer, such as cross-linked carbohydrate material, such as agarose, agar, cellulose, dextran, chitosan, konjac, carrageenan, gellan, alginate etc. To obtain high adsorption capacities, the support can be porous, and ligands are then coupled to the external surfaces as well as to the pore surfaces. Such native polymer supports can be prepared according to standard methods, such as inverse suspension gelation (S Hjerten: Biochim Biophys Acta 79(2), 393-398 (1964). Alternatively, the support can be prepared from a synthetic polymer, such as cross-linked synthetic polymers, e.g. styrene or styrene derivatives, divinylbenzene, acrylamides, acrylate esters, methacrylate esters, vinyl esters, vinyl amides etc. Such synthetic polymers can be produced according to standard methods, see e.g. “Styrene based polymer supports developed by suspension polymerization” (R Arshady: Chimica e L'Industria 70(9), 70-75 (1988)). Porous native or synthetic polymer supports are also available from commercial sources, such as Amersham Biosciences, Uppsala, Sweden.
  • 5.5 Pharmaceutical Compositions
  • The proteins, for example, antibodies and antibody-portions, produced using the cell culture techniques of the instant invention can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration to a subject. Typically, the pharmaceutical composition comprises a protein of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. As used herein, “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like that are physiologically compatible. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include one or more of water, saline, phosphate buffered saline, dextrose, glycerol, ethanol and the like, as well as combinations thereof. In many cases, it is desirable to include isotonic agents, e.g., sugars, polyalcohols such as mannitol, sorbitol, or sodium chloride in the composition. Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers may further comprise minor amounts of auxiliary substances such as wetting or emulsifying agents, preservatives or buffers, which enhance the shelf life or effectiveness of the antibody or antibody portion.
  • The protein compositions of the invention can be incorporated into a pharmaceutical composition suitable for parenteral administration. The protein can be prepared as an injectable solution containing, e.g., 0.1-250 mg/mL antibody. The injectable solution can be composed of either a liquid or lyophilized dosage form in a flint or amber vial, ampule or pre-filled syringe. The buffer can be L-histidine approximately 1-50 mM, (optimally 5-10 mM), at pH 5.0 to 7.0 (optimally pH 6.0). Other suitable buffers include but are not limited to sodium succinate, sodium citrate, sodium phosphate or potassium phosphate. Sodium chloride can be used to modify the toxicity of the solution at a concentration of 0-300 mM (optimally 150 mM for a liquid dosage form). Cryoprotectants can be included for a lyophilized dosage form, principally 0-10% sucrose (optimally 0.5-1.0%). Other suitable cryoprotectants include trehalose and lactose. Bulking agents can be included for a lyophilized dosage form, principally 1-10% mannitol (optimally 24%). Stabilizers can be used in both liquid and lyophilized dosage forms, principally 1-50 mM L-methionine (optimally 5-10 mM). Other suitable bulking agents include glycine, arginine, can be included as 0-0.05% polysorbate-80 (optimally 0.005-0.01%). Additional surfactants include but are not limited to polysorbate 20 and BRIJ surfactants.
  • In one aspect, the pharmaceutical composition includes the protein at a dosage of about 0.01 mg/kg-10 mg/kg. In another aspect, the dosages of the protein include approximately 1 mg/kg administered every other week, or approximately 0.3 mg/kg administered weekly. A skilled practitioner can ascertain the proper dosage and regime for administering to a subject.
  • The compositions of this invention may be in a variety of forms. These include, e.g., liquid, semi-solid and solid dosage forms, such as liquid solutions (e.g., injectable and infusible solutions), dispersions or suspensions, tablets, pills, powders, liposomes and suppositories. The form depends on, e.g., the intended mode of administration and therapeutic application. Typical compositions are in the form of injectable or infusible solutions, such as compositions similar to those used for passive immunization of humans with other antibodies. One mode of administration is parenteral (e.g., intravenous, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular). In one aspect, the protein is administered by intravenous infusion or injection. In another aspect, the protein is administered by intramuscular or subcutaneous injection.
  • Therapeutic compositions typically must be sterile and stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage. The composition can be formulated as a solution, microemulsion, dispersion, liposome, or other ordered structure suitable to high drug concentration. Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the active compound (i.e., protein, antibody or antibody portion) in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle that contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile, lyophilized powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the methods of preparation are vacuum drying and spray-drying that yields a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof. The proper fluidity of a solution can be maintained, e.g., by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. Prolonged absorption of injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent that delays absorption, e.g., monostearate salts and gelatin.
  • The protein of the present invention can be administered by a variety of methods known in the art, one route/mode of administration is subcutaneous injection, intravenous injection or infusion. As will be appreciated by the skilled artisan, the route and/or mode of administration will vary depending upon the desired results. In certain embodiments, the active compound may be prepared with a carrier that will protect the compound against rapid release, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants, transdermal patches, and microencapsulated delivery systems. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Many methods for the preparation of such formulations are patented or generally known to those skilled in the art. See, e.g., Sustained and Controlled Release Drug Delivery Systems, J. R. Robinson, ed., Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, 1978, the entire teaching of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • In certain aspects, a protein of the invention may be orally administered, e.g., with an inert diluent or an assimilable edible carrier. The compound (and other ingredients, if desired) may also be enclosed in a hard or soft shell gelatin capsule, compressed into tablets, or incorporated directly into the subject's diet. For oral therapeutic administration, the compounds may be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of ingestible tablets, buccal tablets, troches, capsules, elixirs, suspensions, syrups, wafers, and the like. To administer a compound of the invention by other than parenteral administration, it may be necessary to coat the compound with, or co-administer the compound with, a material to prevent its inactivation.
  • Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions. In certain aspects, a protein of the invention is co-formulated with and/or co-administered with one or more additional therapeutic agents that are useful for treating disorders. For example, an antibody or antibody portion of the invention may be co-formulated and/or co-administered with one or more additional antibodies that bind other targets (e.g., antibodies that bind other cytokines or that bind cell surface molecules). Furthermore, one or more antibodies of the invention may be used in combination with two or more of the foregoing therapeutic agents. Such combination therapies may advantageously utilize lower dosages of the administered therapeutic agents, thus avoiding possible toxicities or complications associated with the various monotherapies. It will be appreciated by the skilled practitioner that when the protein of the invention are used as part of a combination therapy, a lower dosage of protein may be desirable than when the protein alone is administered to a subject (e.g., a synergistic therapeutic effect may be achieved through the use of combination therapy which, in turn, permits use of a lower dose of the protein to achieve the desired therapeutic effect).
  • It should be understood that the protein of the invention can be used alone or in combination with an additional agent, e.g., a therapeutic agent, said additional agent being selected by the skilled artisan for its intended purpose. For example, the additional agent can be a therapeutic agent art-recognized as being useful to treat the disease or condition being treated by the protein of the present invention. The additional agent also can be an agent which imparts a beneficial attribute to the therapeutic composition, e.g., an agent which effects the viscosity of the composition.
  • Dosage regimens may be adjusted to provide the optimum desired response (e.g., a therapeutic or prophylactic response). For example, a single bolus may be administered, several divided doses may be administered over time or the dose may be proportionally reduced or increased as indicated by the exigencies of the therapeutic situation. In certain embodiments it is especially advantageous to formulate parenteral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the mammalian subjects to be treated; each unit comprising a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. The specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on (a) the unique characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic or prophylactic effect to be achieved, and (b) the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of sensitivity in individuals.
  • An exemplary, non-limiting range for a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a protein of the invention is 0.01-20 mg/kg, or 1-10 mg/kg, or 0.3-1 mg/kg. It is to be noted that dosage values may vary with the type and severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions, and that dosage ranges set forth herein are exemplary only and are not intended to limit the scope or practice of the claimed composition.
  • 6. EXAMPLES 6.1 Method for Reducing the Extent of Acidic Species in Cell Culture by the Addition of Medium Components
  • Production of recombinant proteins by host cells can result in product-related charge heterogeneities present in the population of proteins produced by the cells. The presence of acidic species in the population of proteins is an example of a product-related charge heterogeneity. Control of the amount of acidic species present in the population of proteins produced by the host cells can be accomplished by modifying the culture conditions of the host cells.
  • 6.1.1 Materials and Methods
  • Cell Source and Adaptation Cultures
  • Three adalimumab producing cell lines, one mAb1 producing cell line and one mAb2 producing were employed in the studies covered here. For adalimumab producing cell lines, cells were cultured in their respective growth media (chemically defined media (media 1) or a hydrolysate based media (media 2 or media 3)) in a combination of vented non-baffled shake flasks (Corning) on a shaker platform at 110 RPM (cell line 1), 180 RPM (cell line 2), 140 RPM (cell line 3) and 10 L or 20 L wave bags (GE). For experiments with cells in the hydrolysate based media (media 3), cells were thawed in media 1 and then adapted to media 3 over a few passages. Cultures were propagated in a 35° C., 5% CO2 incubator for cell line 1 and 2 and in a 36° C., 5% CO2 incubator for cell line 3 in order to obtain the required number of cells to be able to initiate production stage cultures.
  • For the mAb1 producing cell line, cells were cultured in chemically defined growth media (media 1) in a combination of vented non-baffled shake flasks (Corning) on a shaker platform at 130 RPM and 20 L wave bags (GE). Cultures were propagated in a 36° C., 5% CO2 incubator to obtain the required number of cells to be able to initiate production stage cultures.
  • For the mAb2 producing cell line, cells were cultured in chemically defined growth media (media 1) in a combination of vented non-baffled shake flasks (Corning) on a shaker platform at 140 RPM and 20 L wave bags (GE). Cultures were propagated in a 35° C., 5% CO2 incubator to obtain the required number of cells to be able to initiate production stage cultures.
  • Cell Culture Media
  • Growth and production media were prepared from either a chemically defined media formulation (media 1) or hydrolysate-based medium formulations (media 2 and media 3). For preparation of the media 1, the media (IVGN GIA-1, a proprietary basal media formulation from Invitrogen) was supplemented with L-glutamine, sodium bicarbonate, sodium chloride, and methotrexate solution. Production media consisted of all the components in the growth medium, excluding methotrexate. For cell line 1, both growth and production medium were also supplemented with insulin. For mAB1 and mAB2 producing cell lines, the growth medium were also supplemented with insulin.
  • For the hydrolysate-based formulation (media 2), the growth media was composed of PFCHO (proprietary chemically defined formulation from SAFC), Dextrose, L-Glutamine, L-Asparagine, HEPES, Poloxamer 188, Ferric Citrate, Recombinant Human Insulin, Yeastolate (BD), Phytone Peptone (BD), Mono- and Di-basic Sodium Phosphate, Sodium Bicarbonate, Sodium Chloride and methotrexate. Production media consisted of all the components listed in the growth medium, excluding methotrexate.
  • For the hydrolysate-based formulation (media 3), the growth media was composed of OptiCHO (Invitrogen), L-Glutamine, Yeastolate (BD), Phytone Peptone (BD) and methotrexate. Production media consisted of all the components listed in the growth medium, excluding methotrexate.
  • Amino acids used for the experiments were reconstituted in Milli-Q water to make a 100 g/L stock solution, which was subsequently supplemented to both growth and production basal media. After addition of amino acids, media was brought to a pH similar to unsupplemented (control) media using 5N hydrochloric acid/5N NaOH, and it was brought to an osmolality similar to unsupplemented (control) media by adjusting the concentration of sodium chloride.
  • Calcium Chloride Dihydrate (Sigma or Fluka) used for the experiments were reconstituted in Milli-Q water to make a stock solution, which was subsequently supplemented to the production basal media. After addition of calcium chloride, media was brought to a pH similar to non-supplemented (control) media using 6N hydrochloric acid/5N NaOH, and it was brought to an osmolality similar to non-supplemented (control) media by adjusting the concentration of sodium chloride.
  • Niacinamide (Sigma or Calbiochem) used for the experiments were reconstituted in Milli-Q water to make a stock solution, which was subsequently supplemented to the production basal media. After addition of niacinamide, media was brought to a pH similar to non-supplemented (control) media using 6N hydrochloric acid/5N NaOH, and it was brought to an osmolality similar to non-supplemented (control) media by adjusting the concentration of sodium chloride.
  • All media was filtered through Corning 1 L filter systems (0.22 μm PES) and stored at 4° C. until usage.
  • TABLE 2
    List of medium additives supplemented to culture media
    Catalog No./Source
    Medium of medium
    additive supplements
    Arginine Sigma, A8094
    Lysine Calbiochem, 4400
    Histidine Sigma, H5659
    Ornithine Sigma, 06503
    Calcium Fulka, 21097
    Chloride Sigma, C8106
    Niacinamide Calbiochem, 481907
    Sigma, N0636
  • Production Cultures
  • Production cultures were initiated either in 500 ml shake flasks (Corning) or in 3 L Bioreactors (Applikon). For shake flask experiments, duplicate 500 mL Corning vented non-baffled shake flasks (200 mL working volume) were used for each condition. The shake flasks were kept in incubators either maintained at 35° C. or 36° C. and 5% CO2 on shaker platforms that were either set at 110 rpm for adalimumab producing cell line 1, 180 rpm for adalimumab producing cell line 2, 140 rpm for adalimumab producing cell line 3, for 130 rpm for mAB1 producing cell line, or 140 rpm for mAB2 producing cell line. For the bioreactor experiments, 3 L bioreactors (1.5 L working volume) were run at 35° C., 30% DO, 200 rpm, pH profile from 7.1 to 6.9 in three days and pH 6.9 thereafter. In all experiments, the cells were transferred from the seed train to the production stage at a split ratio of 1:5.
  • Cultures were run in either batch or fed-batch mode. In the batch mode, cells were cultured in the respective production medium. 1.25% (v/v) of 40% glucose stock solution was fed when the media glucose concentration reduced to less than 3 g/L. In the fed-batch mode, cultures were run with either the IVGN feed (proprietary chemically defined feed formulation from Invitrogen) as per the following feed schedule—(4% (v/v)—day 6, day 7, and day 8, respectively) along with 10× Ex-Cell PFCHO feed (proprietary chemically defined formulation)—3% (v/v) on day 3. The cultures were also fed with 1.25% (v/v) of 40% glucose stock solution when the glucose concentration was below 3.0 g/l.
  • Retention samples for titer analysis, of 2×1.5 mL, were collected daily for the bioreactor experiments (section 2.2.4) beginning on Day 8, and frozen at −80° C. The samples taken from each were later submitted for titer analysis.
  • The harvest procedure of the shake flasks and reactors involved centrifugation of the culture sample at 3,000 RPM for 30 min and storage of supernatant in PETG bottles at −80° C. before submission for protein A purification and WCX-10 analysis.
  • WCX-10 Assay
  • This method is employed towards the quantification of the acidic species and other charge variants present in cell culture harvest samples. Cation exchange chromatography was performed on a Dionex ProPac WCX-10, Analytical column (Dionex, CA).
  • For adalimumab and mAB1 samples, the mobile phases used were 10 mM Sodium Phosphate dibasic pH 7.5 (Mobile phase A) and 10 mM Sodium Phosphate dibasic, 500 mM Sodium Chloride pH 5.5 (Mobile phase B). A binary gradient (94% A, 6% B: 0-20 min; 84% A, 16% B: 20-22 min; 0% A, 100% B: 22-28 min; 94% A, 6% B: 28-34 min) was used with detection at 280 nm.
  • For mAb2 samples, the mobile phases used were 20 mM (4-Morpholino)ethanesulfonic Acid Monohydrate (MES) pH 6.5 (Mobile phase A) and 20 mM MES, 500 mM Sodium Chloride pH 6.5 (Mobile phase B). An optimized gradient (minute/% B): 0/3, 1/3, 46/21, 47/100, 52/100, 53/3, 58/3 was used with detection at 280 nm.
  • Quantitation is based on the relative area percent of detected peaks. The peaks that elute at relative residence time earlier than the main peak corresponding to the drug product are together represented as the acidic peaks (FIG. 1).
  • Lysine-C Peptide Mapping for MGO Quantification
  • Typical trypsin digestion employed almost universally for peptide mapping cuts a denatured, reduced and alkylated protein at the carboxyl side of the two basic amino acids, lysine and arginine. Methylglyoxal is a small molecule metabolite derived as a glycolysis byproduct which can modify arginine residues. A modification of an arginine prevents trypsin from cutting this site and results in a mis-cleavage. The challenge of quantifying the amount of MGO modified peptide is that it is not compared to an equivalent non-modified peptide but rather two parental cleaved peptides which will likely have different ionization potential than the modified peptide. In order to determine a truly accurate direct measurement of an MGO-modified peptide, it must be compared to its non-modified counterpart and expressed as a percent. Using endoproteinase Lysine-C as an alternative enzyme, cleavages only occur at lysine residues. The result is a direct comparison of the same peptide with and without an MGO modification which provides a high degree of accuracy in quantifying even trace levels of the modified species.
  • Procedure: Samples are diluted to a nominal concentration of 4 mg/mL. 8 M guanidine-HCl is added to the sample in a 3:1 ratio resulting in a 1 mg/mL concentration in 6M guanidine-HCl. The samples are reduced with 10 mM final conc. DTT for 30 minutes at 37° C. followed by an alkylation with 25 mM final conc. iodoacetic acid for 30 minutes at 37° C. in the dark. The samples are then buffer exchanged into 10 mM Tris pH 8.0 using NAP-5 columns. The samples are then digested for 4 hours at 37° C. using endoproteinase Lys-C at an enzyme to protein ratio of 1:20. The digest is quenched by adding 5 μL of formic acid to each sample. Samples are analyzed by LC/MS peptide mapping. Briefly, 50 μL of sample is loaded onto a Waters BEH C18 1.7μ 1.0×150 mm UPLC column with 98% 0.08% formic acid, 0.02% TFA in water and 2% 0.08% formic acid, 0.02% TFA in acetonitrile. The composition is changed to 65% 0.08% formic acid, 0.02% TFA in water and 35% 0.08% formic acid, 0.02% TFA in acetonitrile in 135 minutes using a Waters Acquity UPLC system. Eluting peaks are monitored using a Thermo Scientific LTQ-Orbitrap Mass Spectrometer. Specific mass traces are extracted for both modified and non-modified peptides in order to accurately quantify the total amount of MGO modification at each site. Mass spectra are also analyzed for the specific region of the chromatogram to confirm the peptide identity. An example data set is shown in FIG. 140.
  • 6.1.2 Results
  • Effect of Arginine Supplementation to Cell Culture Media
  • The addition of arginine was tested in several experimental systems covering multiple cell lines, media and monoclonal antibodies. Following is a detailed description of two representative experiments where two different adalimumab producing cell lines were cultured in a chemically defined media (media 1).
  • Cell line 2 was cultured in media 1 with different total amounts of arginine (1 (control), 1.25, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 9 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 18-22×106 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. The growth and viability profiles were comparable between the different test conditions, although a slight decrease in viable cell density profile was observed in samples with the 9 g/l arginine test condition (FIGS. 1, 2). The harvest titers were comparable between the conditions (FIG. 3). On Day 10 and Day 12 of culture, duplicate shake flasks for each of the conditions were harvested and then subsequently analyzed using WCX-10 post protein A purification and the percentages of total peak(s) area corresponding to the acidic species were quantified (FIG. 4, 5). The percentage of acidic species in the control sample was as high as 19.7% on day 10. In the sample with the highest total concentration of arginine in this experiment (9 g/l), the percentage of acidic species was reduced to 12.2%. A dose dependent decrease in acidic species was observed in test conditions with arginine concentrations beyond 2 g/l (FIG. 4). A similar trend in reduction of acidic species with arginine increase was also observed in the day 12 harvest samples (FIG. 5). Further, while the extent of acidic species in the 1 g/l arginine samples increased from 19.7% (day 10 harvest) to 25.5% (day 12 harvest), this increase in the 9 g/l arginine test condition was significantly smaller from 12.2% (day 10 harvest) to 13.9% (day 12 harvest). Thus, the increase of total arginine led to a reduction in the extent of total acidic species at a particular time point in culture as well the rate of increase of acidic species with time of culture.
  • Cell line 3 was cultured in media 1 with different total amounts of arginine (1 (control), 3, 5, 7, 9 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 7-10×106 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. The growth and viability profiles were comparable between the different test conditions, although a slight decrease in viable cell density and viability profiles was observed in samples with the 9 g/l arginine condition (FIG. 6, 7). The product titer was also comparable between all conditions (FIG. 8). On Day 10 of culture, duplicate shake flasks for each of the conditions were harvested and then subsequently analyzed using WCX-10 post protein A purification and the percentages of total peak(s) area corresponding to the acidic species were quantified (FIG. 9). The percentage of acidic species in the control sample was as high as 23.3% on day 10. In the sample with the highest total concentration of arginine in this experiment (9 g/l), the percentage of acidic species was reduced to 17.0%. A dose dependent decrease in acidic species was observed in conditions with higher concentrations of arginine.
  • Additional experiments were performed with multiple cell lines in chemically defined or hydrolysate based media to demonstrate the wide range of applicability of this method. The experimental setup for each of these experiments was similar to that described above. The summaries of results of the different experiments performed for adalimumab are summarized in FIGS. 10, 11, 12. A reduction in acidic species with increased arginine concentration was also observed in each case.
  • In addition to adalimumab, the utility of this method for acidic species reduction was also demonstrated for processes involving two other mAB producing cell lines. The experimental setup for each of these experiments was similar to that described in section above and in the materials and methods. The reduction of acidic species with increased arginine concentration for experiments corresponding to each mAB is summarized in FIG. 13, 14. For mAB2, a significant reduction in acidic species was only observed at arginine concentration of 9 g/l.
  • In U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/830,976 we describe the utility of arginine supplementation to culture media towards modulation of the lysine variant distribution. It is possible that a fraction of acidic species also shifted along with shift in lysine variants (from Lys 0 to Lys1 and Lys2), in addition to the fraction of acidic species that is completely removed from the entire protein population. To estimate the acidic species reduction that is independent of this redistribution of lysine variants, protein A eluate samples from a representative set of arginine supplementation experiments were pre-treated with the enzyme carboxypeptidase before WCX-10. One set of samples from adalimumab experiment and another set of samples from a mAB2 experiment were used for this analysis. The carboxypeptidase treatment of the samples resulted in the cleavage of the C-terminal lysine residues as demonstrated by the complete conversion of Lys1/Lys2 to Lys 0 in each of these samples (data not shown here). As a result of this conversion, the acidic species quantified in these samples corresponded to an aggregate sum of acidic species that would be expected to also include those species that may have previously shifted corresponding to the lysine variant shift and perhaps gone unaccounted for in the samples that were not treated with carboxypeptidase prior to WCX-10. A dose dependent reduction in acidic species was observed in the carboxypeptidase treated samples with increasing concentration arginine (FIG. 15, 16). This suggests that the acidic species reduction described here is not completely attributed to a probable shift of the acidic species corresponding to the lysine variant redistribution.
  • Effect of Lysine Supplementation to Cell Culture Media
  • The addition of lysine was tested in several experimental systems covering multiple cell lines, media and monoclonal antibodies. Following is a detailed description of two representative experiments where two different cell lines were cultured in a chemically defined media (media 1) for the production of adalimumab.
  • Cell line 2 was cultured in media 1 with different total concentrations of lysine (1 (control), 5, 7, 9, 11 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 17-23×106 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. A slight dose dependent decrease in viable cell density profile was observed in all samples with respect to the control sample (FIG. 17). The viability profiles were comparable between the conditions (FIG. 18). On Days 10 and 11 of culture samples were collected for titer analysis (FIG. 19). The titers for all conditions were comparable. On Day 11 of culture, duplicate shake flasks for each of the conditions were harvested and then subsequently analyzed using WCX-10 post protein A purification and the percentages of total peak(s) area corresponding to the acidic species were quantified (FIG. 20). The percentage of acidic species in the control was as high as 26.5%. In the sample with the highest tested concentration of lysine in this experiment (11 g/l), the percentage of acidic species was reduced to 15.0%. A dose dependent decrease in acidic species was observed in test conditions with higher total concentrations of lysine.
  • Cell line 3 was cultured in media 1 with different total concentrations of lysine (1 (control), 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 9.5-11.5×106 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. The growth and viability profiles were comparable between the different test conditions, although a slight decrease in viable cell density and viability profiles was observed in samples with higher lysine concentrations than that in the control sample (FIG. 21, 22). On Days 10, 11 and 12 of culture samples were collected for titer analysis (FIG. 23). The titers for all conditions were comparable. On Day 12 of culture, duplicate shake flasks for each of the conditions were harvested and then subsequently analyzed using WCX-10 post protein A purification and the percentages of total peak(s) area corresponding to the acidic species were quantified (FIG. 24). The percentage of acidic species in the control sample was as high as 26.6%. In the sample with the highest tested concentration of lysine in this experiment (11 g/l) the percentage of acidic species was reduced to 18.1%. A dose dependent decrease in acidic species was observed in test conditions with higher total concentrations of lysine.
  • Additional experiments were performed with multiple cell lines in chemically defined or hydrolysate based media to demonstrate the wide range of applicability of this method. The experimental setup for each of these experiments was similar to that described above and in materials and methods section. The summaries of results of the different experiments performed for adalimumab are summarized in FIGS. 25, 26, 27. A reduction in acidic species with increased lysine concentration was also observed in each case.
  • In addition to adalimumab, the utility of this method for acidic species reduction was also demonstrated for processes involving two other mABs. The experimental setup for each of these experiments was similar to that described above and in the materials and methods section. The reduction of acidic species with lysine addition for experiments corresponding to each mAB is summarized in FIGS. 28, 29. For mAB2, a significant reduction in acidic species was only observed at lysine concentration of 11 g/l.
  • In U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/830,976 we describe the utility of lysine supplementation to culture media towards modulation of the lysine variant distribution. To estimate the acidic species reduction that is independent of this redistribution of lysine variants, protein A eluate samples from a representative set of lysine supplementation experiments were pre-treated with the enzyme carboxypeptidase before WCX-10. One set of samples from adalimumab experiment and another set of samples from a mAB2 experiment were used for this analysis. The carboxypeptidase treatment of the samples resulted in the cleavage of the C-terminal lysine residues as demonstrated by the conversion of Lys1/Lys2 to Lys 0 in each of these samples (data not shown here). As a result of this conversion, the acidic species quantified in these samples corresponded to an aggregate sum of acidic species that would be expected to also include those species that may have previously shifted corresponding to the lysine variant shift and perhaps gone unaccounted for in the samples that were not treated with carboxypeptidase prior to WCX-10. A dose dependent reduction in acidic species was observed in the carboxypeptidase treated samples with increasing concentration of lysine for the adalimumab samples from 26.8% in the non-supplemented sample to 21.1% in the 10 g/l Lysine supplemented sample, a reduction of 5.7% in total acidic species (FIG. 30). Similar results were also observed for the mA2 samples (FIG. 31). This suggests that the acidic species reduction described here is not completely attributed to a probable shift of the acidic species corresponding to the lysine redistribution.
  • Effect of Histidine Supplementation to Cell Culture Media
  • The addition of histidine was tested in several experimental systems covering multiple cell lines, media and monoclonal antibodies. Following is a detailed description of two representative experiments where two different cell lines were cultured in a chemically defined media (media 1) for the production of adalimumab.
  • Cell line 2 was cultured in media 1 with different total concentrations of histidine (0 (control), 4, 6, 8, 10 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 12-22×106 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. A dose dependent decrease in viable cell density profile was observed with the 10 g/l histidine condition having significant reduction in growth (FIG. 32). A corresponding effect on viability was also observed (FIG. 33). On Days 10, 11 and 12 of culture samples were collected for titer analysis and reported for the harvest day for each sample (FIG. 34). There was a small dose dependent decrease in titers for conditions with histidine supplementation. On Days 11-12, duplicate shake flasks were harvested and then subsequently analyzed using WCX-10 post protein A purification and the percentages of total peak(s) area corresponding to the acidic species were quantified (FIG. 35). The percentage of acidic species in the control sample was as high as 26.5%. In the sample with the highest tested concentration of histidine in this experiment (10 g/l), the percentage of acidic species was reduced to 15.6%. A dose dependent decrease in acidic species was observed in test conditions with increased histidine concentrations.
  • Cell line 3 was cultured in media 1 with different total concentrations of histidine (0 (control), 2, 4, 6, 8 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 6-10×106 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. A dose dependent decrease in viable cell density profile was observed in all conditions with histidine concentrations higher than that in the control (FIG. 36). The viability profiles were more comparable between conditions with this cell line (FIG. 37). On Day 12 of culture, samples were collected for titer analysis (FIG. 38). The titers for all conditions were comparable. On Day 12 of culture, duplicate shake flasks for each of the conditions were harvested and then subsequently analyzed using WCX-10 post protein A purification and the percentages of total peak(s) area corresponding to the acidic species were quantified (FIG. 39). The percentage of acidic species in the control sample was 26.2%. In the sample with the highest tested concentration of histidine in this experiment (8 g/l), the percentage of acidic species was reduced to 20.0%. A dose dependent decrease in acidic species was observed in test conditions with increased histidine concentration.
  • Additional experiments were performed with multiple cell lines in chemically defined or hydrolysate based media to evaluate the wide range of applicability of this method. The experimental setup for each of these experiments was similar to that described above and in the materials and methods section. The summaries of results of the different experiments performed for adalimumab are summarized in FIGS. 40, 41, 42. A reduction in acidic species with increased histidine concentration was observed with cell line 1 in media 1 (FIG. 40) and with cell line 2 in media 3 (FIG. 42). For cell line 2 in media 3, a dose dependent reduction in acidic species was observed upto 4 g/l histidine, with no further significant reduction at higher concentrations of histidine (FIG. 42). For cell line 1, media 2, no significant reduction of acidic species was observed within the histidine concentration range (0-4 g/l) (FIG. 41).
  • In addition to adalimumab, the utility of this method for acidic species reduction was also demonstrated for processes involving two other mABs. The experimental setup for each of these experiments was similar to that described above and in the materials and methods section. The reduction of acidic species with increased histidine concentration for experiments corresponding to each mAB is summarized in FIGS. 43, 44. For mAB2, in contrast with the results reported with arginine and lysine supplementation shown previously, a clear significant dose dependent reduction in total acidic species from 28.1% in the control to 21.5% in 4 g/l histidine sample was observed.
  • In U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/830,976 we also describe the utility of increased histidine to culture media towards modulation of the lysine variant distribution. To estimate the acidic species reduction that is independent of this redistribution of lysine variants, protein A eluate samples from a representative set of histidine supplementation experiments were also pre-treated with the enzyme carboxypeptidase before WCX-10. One set of samples from adalimumab experiment and another set of samples from a mAB2 experiment were used for this analysis. The carboxypeptidase treatment of the samples resulted in the cleavage of the C-terminal lysine residues as demonstrated by the complete conversion of Lys1/Lys2 to Lys 0 in each of these samples (data not shown here). A dose dependent reduction in acidic species was observed in the carboxypeptidase treated samples with increasing concentration of histidine (FIG. 45, 46). This suggests that the acidic species reduction described here is not completely attributed to a probable shift of the acidic species corresponding to the lysine redistribution.
  • Effect of Ornithine Supplementation to Cell Culture Media
  • The addition of ornithine was tested in several experimental systems covering multiple cell lines, media and monoclonal antibodies. Following is a detailed description of two representative experiments where two different cell lines were employed in a chemically defined media (media 1) for the production of adalimumab.
  • Cell line 2 was cultured in media 1 with different total concentrations of ornithine (0 (control), 4, 6, 8, 10 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 15-22×106 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. A slight decrease in viable cell density with ornithine supplementation was observed (FIG. 47). Corresponding differences in the viability profiles were also observed (FIG. 48). On Day 11 of culture, samples were collected for titer analysis (FIG. 49). The titers for all conditions were comparable. On Day 11, duplicate shake flasks were harvested for each condition and then subsequently analyzed using WCX-10 post protein A purification and the percentages of total peak(s) area corresponding to the acidic species were quantified (FIG. 50). The percentage of acidic species in the control sample was 26.5%. In the sample with the highest tested concentration of ornithine in this experiment (10 g/l), the percentage of acidic species was reduced to 16.1%. A dose dependent decrease in acidic species was observed in test conditions with increased ornithine concentration.
  • Cell line 3 was cultured in media 1 supplemented with different total concentrations of ornithine (0 (control), 2, 4, 6, 8 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 9.5-11.5×106 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. The viable cell density and viability profiles were comparable (FIG. 51, 52). On Day 12 of culture, samples were collected for titer analysis (FIG. 53). The titers for all conditions were comparable. On Day 12 of culture, duplicate shake flasks for each of the conditions were harvested and then subsequently analyzed using WCX-10 post protein A purification and the percentages of total peak(s) area corresponding to the acidic species were quantified (FIG. 54). The percentage of acidic species in the control sample was 24.8%. In the sample with the highest tested concentration of ornithine in this experiment (8 g/l), the percentage of acidic species was reduced to 20.5%. A dose dependent decrease in acidic species was observed in test conditions with increased ornithine concentration.
  • Additional experiments were performed with multiple cell lines in chemically defined or hydrolysate based media to evaluate the wide range of applicability of this method. The experimental setup for each of these experiments was similar to that described above and in the materials and methods section. The summaries of results of the different experiments performed for adalimumab are summarized in FIGS. 55, 56 and 57. For cell line 1 in media 1, a dose dependent reduction was observed (FIG. 55). However, for cell line 1 in media 2, a hydrolysate media, no significant reduction in acidic species was observed across the conditions (FIG. 56). For cell line 2 in media 3, a reduction in acidic species from 22.1% in the control sample to 18.7% in the 2 g/l ornithine sample with no further reduction at higher ornithine concentrations was observed (FIG. 57).
  • In addition to adalimumab, the utility of this method for acidic species reduction was also demonstrated for processes involving two other mABs. The experimental setup for each of these experiments was similar to that described in section above and in the materials and method section. The reduction of acidic species with ornithine addition for experiments corresponding to each mAB is summarized in FIG. 58, 59. In the case of mAB1, a 7.3% dose dependent reduction in total acidic species was observed within the concentration range tested. For mAB2, about 2% reduction was observed in the 1 g/l ornithine concentration sample with minimum further reduction at higher ornithine concentrations.
  • Similar to the analysis conducted with the other amino acids, protein A eluate samples from a representative set of ornithine experiments were also pre-treated with the enzyme carboxypeptidase before WCX-10. One set of samples from adalimumab experiment and another set of samples from a mAB2 experiment were used for this analysis. A dose dependent reduction in acidic species was observed in the carboxypeptidase treated samples with increasing concentration of ornithine (FIG. 60, 61). The percentage of acidic species was also comparable between an untreated and a carboxypeptidase treated sample for a particular concentration of ornithine. This suggests that the acidic species reduction is independent of any probable shift of the acidic species that may be corresponding to any lysine redistribution.
  • Effect of Increasing a Combination of Arginine, Lysine, Histidine, Ornithine to Cell Culture Media
  • In this experiment, the combined use of the four amino acids arginine, lysine, histidine and ornithine for acidic species reduction is demonstrated. The experiment described here was performed using adalimumab producing cell line 2 in chemically defined media (media 1). The concentration range for arginine and lysine in this experiment was 1-3 g/l while the concentration range for histidine and ornithine in this experiment was between 0-2 g/l. In comparison to the lower concentrations, or conditions where a single amino acid concentration was increased, a further reduction in total acidic species was observed in conditions where combinations of amino acids were increased in the media (FIG. 62). A progressive decrease was observed in total acidic species when more amino acids were increased in combination. The percentage of acidic species was reduced from 21.9% in the lowest concentration sample to 12.3% in the sample with high concentrations of all four amino acids.
  • Control of Acidic Species Through Cell Culture with Increased Arginine and Lysine and Choice of Harvest Criterion and/or Modulation of pH
  • The increase of the amino acid (arginine, lysine) concentration in basal media may also be combined with choice of when to harvest a culture to achieve optimal reduction in total acidic species. In this example, a study was carried out in 3 L bioreactors with cell line 1 (producing adalimumab) in media 1. Two sets of conditions were tested: Control condition (Arginine 1 g/l, Lysine 1 g/l); Test condition 1 (Arginine 3 g/l, Lysine 5 g/l). Cell growth, viability and titer profiles were comparable between the conditions (FIG. 63, 64, 65). A small amount of cell culture harvests were collected every day from day 4 to day 10 from each of the reactors and submitted for protein A purification and WCX-10 analysis. The percentage of acidic species in the control condition increased from 12.1% (on day 4) to 24.6% (on day 10) (FIG. 66). The percentage of acidic species in the test condition 1 was lower than that observed in the control condition at each corresponding culture day. The percentage of acidic species in the test condition also increased from 8.7% (day 4) to 18.8% (day 10). The rate of increase in acidic species with culture duration also correlated with the drop in viability for both conditions, with a sharp increase on day 8. Thus, along with increasing arginine and lysine concentrations in culture media, choice of harvest day/harvest viability can be used in combination to achieve a desired acidic species reduction.
  • The increase of the amino acid (arginine, lysine) concentration in basal media may be combined with process pH modulation to achieve further reduction in total acidic species. In this example, a study was carried out in 3 L bioreactors with cell line 1 (producing adalimumab) in media 1. Three sets of conditions were tested in duplicates: Control condition (Arginine (1 g/l), Lysine (1 g/l), pH 7.1->6.9 in 3 days, pH 6.9 thereafter); Test condition 1 (Arginine (3 g/l), Lysine (3 g/l), pH 7.1->6.9 in 3 days, pH 6.9 thereafter); Test condition 2 (Arginine (3 g/l), Lysine (3 g/l), pH 7.1->6.8 in 3 days, pH 6.8 thereafter). In comparison to the control, a slight decrease in VCD profile and harvest titer was observed for condition 2 (FIG. 67, 68, 69). The cultures were harvested when the viability was less than 50% and the culture harvests were submitted for protein A and WCX-10 analysis. The percentage of acidic species in the control sample was 19.1%. The percentage of acidic species was reduced to 14.3% in test condition 1 and to 12.8% in test condition 2 (FIG. 70). Thus, this demonstrates that the increase of amino acid concentration along with choice of lower final process pH can be used in combination for further reducing the extent of acidic species.
  • Effect of Supplementation of CaCl2 to Cell Culture Media
  • The addition of calcium chloride was tested in several experimental systems covering multiple cell lines, media and monoclonal antibodies. Following is a detailed description of two representative experiments where two different cell lines were cultured in a chemically defined media (media 1) for the production of adalimumab.
  • Cell line 2 was cultured in media 1 with different concentrations of calcium (0.14, 0.84 and 1.54 mM). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 22-24.5×106 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. The viable cell density and viability profiles for all test conditions were comparable (FIG. 71, 72). On Day 10 of culture samples were collected for titer analysis (FIG. 73). The titers for all conditions were comparable. On Day 10 duplicate shake flasks were harvested for each condition and then subsequently analyzed using WCX-10 post protein A purification and the percentages of total peak(s) area corresponding to the acidic species were quantified (FIG. 74). The percentage of acidic species in the 0.14 mM calcium condition was 23.8%. In the sample with the highest tested concentration of calcium in this experiment (1.54 mM), the percentage of acidic species was reduced to 21.6%. A dose dependent decrease in acidic species was observed in test conditions with increased calcium concentration.
  • Cell line 3 was cultured in media 1 with different total concentrations of calcium (0.14, 0.49, 0.84, 1.19, 1.54, 1.89 g/l). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 9.5-10.5×106 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. The viable cell density and viability profiles for all test conditions were comparable (FIG. 75, 76). On Day 11 of culture, samples were collected for titer analysis. The harvest titers for all conditions were comparable (FIG. 77). On Day 11 of culture, duplicate shake flasks for each of the conditions were harvested and then subsequently analyzed using WCX-10 post protein A purification and the percentages of total peak(s) area corresponding to the acidic species were quantified (FIG. 78). The percentage of acidic species in the 0.14 mM calcium condition was 23.7%. In the sample with the highest tested concentration of calcium in this experiment (1.89 mM), the percentage of acidic species was reduced to 20.7%. A dose dependent decrease in acidic species was observed in test conditions with increased calcium concentration.
  • Additional experiments were performed with multiple cell lines in chemically defined or hydrolysate based media to evaluate the wide range of applicability of this method. The experimental setup for each of these experiments was similar to that described in section above and in the materials and methods section. The summaries of results of the different experiments performed for adalimumab are summarized in FIGS. 79, 80 and 81. A reduction in acidic species with increased calcium concentration was also observed in each case.
  • In addition to adalimumab, the utility of this method for acidic species reduction was also demonstrated for processes involving two other mABs. The experimental setup for each of these experiments was similar to that described in section above. The dose dependent reduction of acidic species with ornithine addition for experiments corresponding to each mAB is summarized in FIGS. 82, 83. For mAB1, a small yet significant acidic species reduction from 15.4% (0.14 mM calcium sample) to 11.8% (1.54 mM calcium chloride supplemented sample) was observed. For mAB2, a larger dose dependent reduction from 28.9% (0.14 mM calcium sample) to 23.1% (1.40 mM calcium chloride supplemented sample) was observed.
  • Effect of Increased Concentration of Arginine, Lysine, Calcium Chloride, Niacinamide in Combination
  • In this experiment, the effect of the combined use of the amino acids arginine, lysine, inorganic salt calcium chloride and vitamin niacinamide for acidic species reduction was evaluated. The experiment described here was performed using cell line 2 (producing adalimumab) in chemically defined media (media 1) supplemented with 3% (v/v) PFCHO (proprietary chemically defined medium formulation from SAFC). A central composite DOE experimental design was used in this experiment. The basal media for each condition was supplemented with different concentrations of the four supplements. Cell cultures were carried out in duplicates for each condition. Upon harvest, WCX-10 analysis was performed post protein A purification. In Table 3, the experimental conditions from DOE design, including the concentration of each component supplemented, and the % total acidic species (or AR) obtained for each condition is summarized. Reduction of acidic species through the increased concentration of these components in combination was observed. For instance, condition (#24), where all four components were at their maximum concentration, the % total AR was reported to be reduced to 9.7%. Using the data from the experiment, a model predicting the effects of addition of these components to media for AR reduction (R2: 0.92, P<0.0001) is described in FIG. 84. The model predicted a contribution from each of the four components towards acidic species reduction. It may be also possible to utilize this model to predict the choice of concentrations of these different components to the media, in order to achieve a target reduction in total AR.
  • TABLE 3
    Experimental design and summary for the combined addition of
    arginine, lysine, calcium chloride and niacinamide
    Calcium
    Arginine Lysine Chloride Niacinamide % Total
    Conditions (g/l) (g/l) (mM) (mM) AR
    1 0.0 4.0 0.7 0.8 13.0
    2 0.0 6.0 1.4 0.0 12.6
    3 4.0 2.0 0 1.6 12.3
    4 4.0 6.0 0 1.6 11.6
    5 2.0 4.0 0.7 0.8 11.2
    6 0.0 6.0 0 0.0 15.0
    7 0.0 6.0 1.4 1.6 10.7
    8 0.0 2.0 0 0.0 16.7
    9 2.0 4.0 0.7 0.8 11.0
    10 4.0 6.0 1.4 1.6 11.0
    11 2.0 2.0 0.7 0.8 12.9
    12 2.0 4.0 1.4 0.8 11.1
    13 0.0 6.0 0 1.6 13.2
    14 4.0 2.0 0 0.0 12.3
    15 2.0 4.0 0.7 0.0 13.0
    16 2.0 4.0 0.7 1.6 11.4
    17 0.0 2.0 1.4 1.6 12.0
    18 2.0 4.0 0 0.8 12.0
    19 4.0 4.0 0.7 0.8 12.0
    20 0.0 2.0 1.4 0.0 14.0
    21 4.0 6.0 1.4 0.0 11.0
    22 0.0 2.0 0 1.6 13.6
    23 2.0 6.0 0.7 0.8 11.0
    24 4.0 2.0 1.4 1.6 9.7
    25 4.0 6.0 0 0.0 11.8
    26 4.0 2.0 1.4 0.0 10.4
    27 2.0 4.0 0 0.0 12.7
  • Use of Niacinamide Supplementation to Cell Culture Media for Acidic Species Reduction
  • In addition to the use of niacinamide in combination with other supplements described in the previous section, niacinamide addition may also be used independent of the other supplements as demonstrated in the experiments below for two mAbs: adalimumab and mAb1.
  • For the experiment corresponding to adalimumab, Cell line 1 was cultured in media 1 supplemented with different amounts of niacinamide (0, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 and 1.6 mM). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 8.5-11×106 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. A slight decrease in the viable cell density profile was observed with the maximum niacinamide supplementation (1.6 mM for this experiment) (FIG. 85). The viability profile for the test conditions were comparable (FIG. 86). On Day 12 of culture, samples were collected for titer analysis. The titers for all conditions were comparable (FIG. 87). On Day 11 and day 12, duplicate shake flasks were harvested for each condition and then subsequently analyzed using WCX-10 post protein A purification and the percentages of total peak(s) area corresponding to the acidic species were quantified (FIG. 88, 89). The percentage of acidic species in the day 10 control sample (without niacinamide supplementation) was 19.6%. In the day 10 sample with the highest tested concentration of niacinamide in this experiment (1.6 mM), the percentage of acidic species was reduced to 15.9%. Similar acidic species reduction with niacinamide supplementation was also observed in the day 12 samples.
  • For the experiment corresponding to mAb2, a mAB2 producing cell line was cultured in media 1 supplemented with different amounts of niacinamide (0, 0.1, 0.5, 1.0, 3.0 and 6.0 mM). The cultures were performed in shake flasks in batch format with only glucose feed as described in the materials and methods. The cells grew to maximum viable cell densities (VCD) in the range of 14-21.5×106 cells/ml for the different conditions tested. A slight decrease in the viable cell density profile was observed for the conditions with 3.0 mM and 6.0 mM niacinamide concentrations (FIG. 90). The viability profiles for all test conditions were comparable (FIG. 91). On Day 12 of culture samples were collected for titer analysis (FIG. 92). The titers for all conditions were comparable. On Day 12 duplicate shake flasks were harvested for each condition and then subsequently analyzed using WCX-10 post protein A purification and the percentages of total peak(s) area corresponding to the acidic species were quantified (FIG. 93). The percentage of acidic species in the control sample (without niacinamide supplementation) was 27.0%. In the sample with the highest tested concentration of niacinamide in this experiment (6.0 mM), the percentage of acidic species was reduced to 19.8%. A dose dependent decrease in acidic species was observed in test conditions with niacinamide supplementation.
  • Types of Acidic Species Variants Reduced by Supplementation of Culture Medium with Additives
  • The addition of medium additives may be used to specifically reduce particular acidic variants within the larger fraction of total acidic species. In Table 4, a summary of the extent of some of the sub-species of the acidic species fraction have been presented for a representative set of experiments for adalimumab. Along with the reduction in total acidic species, the methods presented in this section may also be used for reduction of sub-species that include, but not limited to, AR1, AR2 and MGO (methylglyoxal) modified product variants.
  • TABLE 4
    Summary of types of acidic species variants reduced in cultures supplemented
    with medium additives
    % MGO modified species
    LIGHT CHAIN HEAVY CHAIN
    Sample % AR % AR1 % AR2 Arg 30 Arg 93 Arg 108 Arg 16 (19) Arg 259 Arg 359 Arg 420 TOTAL
    Control 26.9 9.7 17.3 1.63 1.21 0.33 0.6 0.06 3.96 3.31 11.1
    Lysine (10 g/l) 15.0 4.5 10.4 1.29 0.91 0 0.46 0.04 1.77 2.09 6.56
    Histidine (10 g/l) 14.7 5.3 9.4 1.21 0.61 0 0.49 0.02 1.42 1.47 5.22
    Ornithine (10 g/l) 16.5 4.4 12.1 1.17 0.71 0 0.37 0.03 1.11 1.29 4.68
    Control 22.5 7.5 15.0 1.13 0.69 0 0.17 0.02 0.03 0 2.04
    Arginine (8 g/l) 17.1 4.6 12.5 1.05 0.63 0 0.16 0.04 0.04 0 1.92
    Control 23.1 6.6 16.6 1.43 0.82 0 0.38 0.05 1 1.35 5.03
    Calcium Chloride 20.8 5.9 14.9 1.28 0.83 0 0.2 0.04 1.07 1.52 4.94
    (1.75 mM)
  • 6.1.3 Conclusion
  • The different experiments above demonstrate that supplementation of cell culture medium with supplemental amounts of amino acids, calcium chloride and niacinamide enhances product quality by decreasing the amount of acidic species in the culture harvest. The amino acids included in the study were arginine, lysine, ornithine and histidine and belong to group of amino acids that are basic. The study covered examples from multiple cell lines/molecules, in shake flasks and bioreactors and in batch and fed-batch culture formats. A dose dependent effect in the extent of reduction of acidic species with increasing concentrations of the supplements was observed. In addition, the possibility to supplement these medium additives individually or in suitable combinations for acidic species reduction was also demonstrated.
  • 6.2 Method for Reducing the Extent of Acidic Species in Cell Culture by Adjusting Process Parameters
  • 6.2.1 Materials and Methods
  • Cell Source and Adaptation Cultures
  • Two adalimumab producing CHO cell lines and a mAB2 producing cell line were employed in the studies covered here. Upon thaw, adalimumab producing cell line 3 was cultured in chemically defined growth media (media 1) in a combination of vented shake flasks on a shaker platform @140 rpm and 20 L wave bags. Cultures were propagated in a 36° C., 5% CO2 incubator to obtain the required number of cells to be able to initiate production stage cultures.
  • Upon thaw, adalimumab producing cell line 1 was cultured in a hydrolysate based growth media (media 2) in a combination of vented shake flasks on a shaker platform @ 110 rpm and 20 L wavebags in a 35° C., 5% CO2 incubator. In some cases, the culture might be transferred into a seed reactor with pH 7.1, 35° C. and 30% DO. The culture would be adapted to either media for media 2 by propagated in a 10 L or 20 L wavebag for 7-13 days with one or two passages before initiating production stage cultures.
  • Upon thaw, mAb2 producing cells were cultured in media 1 in a combination of vented non-baffled shake flasks (Corning) on a shaker platform at 140 RPM and 20 L wave bags (GE). Cultures were propagated in a 35° C., 5% CO2 incubator to obtain the required number of cells to be able to initiate production stage cultures.
  • Cell Culture Media
  • Media 1, the chemical defined growth or production media, was prepared from basal IVGN CD media (proprietary formulation). For preparation of the IVGN CD media formulation, the proprietary media was supplemented with L-glutamine, sodium bicarbonate, sodium chloride, and methotrexate solution. Production media consisted of all the components in the growth medium, excluding methotrexate. For cell line 1 and mAb2, the medium was also supplemented with insulin. In addition, 10 mM or 5 mM of Galactose (Sigma, G5388) and 0.2 μM or 1004 of Manganese (Sigma, M1787) were supplemented into production medium for cell line 3 or 1, respectively. Osmolality was adjusted by the concentration of sodium chloride. All media was filtered through filter systems (0.22 μm PES) and stored at 4° C. until usage.
  • Media 2 is the hydrolysate based media, which contains basal proprietary media, Bacto TC Yeastolate and Phytone Peptone.
  • Production Cultures
  • Production cultures were initiated in 3 L Bioreactors (Applikon). The bioreactors (1.5-2.0 L working volume) were run at the following conditions (except for the different experimental conditions): 35° C., 30% DO (dissolved oxygen), 200 rpm, pH profile from 7.1 to 6.9 in three days and pH 6.9 thereafter. In all experiments, the cells were transferred from the wavebag to the production stage at a split ratio of 1:5.6 (except mAb2 with a ratio of 1:5). When the media glucose concentration reduced to less than 3 g/L, approximately 1.25% (v/v) of 40% glucose stock solution was fed
  • The harvest procedure of reactors involved centrifugation of the culture sample at 3,000 RPM for 30 min and storage of supernatant in PETG bottles at −80° C. before submission for protein A purification and WCX-10 analysis.
  • WCX-10 Assay
  • The acidic species and other charge variants present in cell culture harvest samples were quantified. Cation exchange chromatography was performed on a Dionex ProPac WCX-10, Analytical column (Dionex, CA). For adalimumab producing cell lines, a Shimadzu LC10A HPLC system was used as the HPLC. The mobile phases used were 10 mM Sodium Phosphate dibasic pH 7.5 (Mobile phase A) and 10 mM Sodium Phosphate dibasic, 500 mM Sodium Chloride pH 5.5 (Mobile phase B). A binary gradient (94% A, 6% B: 0-20 min; 84% A, 16% B: 20-22 min; 0% A, 100% B: 22-28 min; 94% A, 6% B: 28-34 min) was used with detection at 280 nm. The WCX-10 method used for mAb B used different buffers. The mobile phases used were 20 mM (4-Morpholino) ethanesulfonic Acid Monohydrate (MES) pH 6.5 (Mobile phase A) and 20 mM MES, 500 mM Sodium Chloride pH 6.5 (Mobile phase B). An optimized gradient (minute/% B): 0/3, 1/3, 46/21, 47/100, 52/100, 53/3, 58/3 was used with detection at 280 nm.
  • Quantitation is based on the relative area percent of detected peaks. The peaks that elute at relative residence time earlier than the main peak corresponding to the drug product are together represented as the acidic peaks.
  • 6.2.2 Results
  • Effect of Process pH in Media 1 with Cell Line 1
  • Five different pH conditions were assessed in this study: 7.1, 7.0, 6.9, 6.8 and 6.7. The cultures were started at pH set point of 7.1; then were ramped down to the target pH set points within 4 days. All cultures reached the same maximum viable cell density on day 8, except for the culture at pH 6.7 condition, in which the maximum cell density was much lower than the other cultures (FIG. 94). In addition, the viability of the culture at pH 7.1 and pH 7.0 dropped much earlier than the other cultures. The viability of cultures at pH 7.1 and pH 7.0 were 38% and 54% on day 10, respectively; while the viability of the cultures at lower pH (including pH 6.9, 6.8 and 6.7) was above 70% on the same day (FIG. 95). Samples taken in the last three days of the cultures were measured for IgG concentration. The titer of each tested condition increased corresponding to the decrease in pH, from 1.2 g/L in the pH 7.1 condition to 1.8 g/L in the pH 6.8 condition; however, product titer was not continued to increase at pH 6.7 (1.6 g/L) (FIG. 96). The cultures were harvested either on day 10 or on day 12. The harvest was protein A purified, then analyzed using WCX-10. The resulting peak areas from WCX-10 analysis were quantified (FIG. 97). The percentage of acidic species decreased corresponding to the decrease in pH, from 56.0% in the pH 7.1 condition to 14.0% in the pH 6.7 condition. Since the cultures at pH 6.9, 6.8 and 6.7 were at 70% viability on day 10, additional samples were taken on day 12 for these cultures, when viability reached ˜50%. WCX-10 analysis was also performed for these samples. The percentage of acidic species on day 12 was increased for these three conditions (i.e., pH 6.9, 6.8 and 6.7) comparing to day 10; however, the increase in the percentage of acidic species was smaller at lower pH. The percentage of acidic species increased 18.8% (pH 6.9), 8.1% (pH6.8) and 3.5% (pH6.7), respectively from day 10 (70% viability) to day 12 (50% viability). Therefore, the percentage of acidic species was lower at lower pH on day 12 too. The percent acidic species decreased with decrease in pH from 39.1% in the pH 6.9 condition to 17.5% in the pH6.7 condition, for a total reduction of 21.6%.
  • The effect of process pH to specifically reduce particular acidic variants within the larger fraction of total acidic species was also evaluated. In Table 5, a summary of the extent of some of the sub-species of the acidic species fraction have been presented. Along with the reduction in total acidic species, the methods presented in this section may also be used for reduction of sub-species that include, but not limited to, AR1, AR2 and MGO (methylglyoxal) modified product variants.
  • TABLE 5
    Effect of process pH on reduction of sub-species of acidic variants
    % MGO modified species
    Sample LIGHT CHAIN HEAVY CHAIN
    Final pH % AR % AR1 % AR2 Arg 30 Arg 93 Arg 108 Arg 16 (19) Arg 259 Arg 359 Arg 420 TOTAL
    7.1 56.0 32.8 23.3 26.1 10.6 0.2 6.1 2.7 3.5 0.5 49.7
    6.9 39.1 18.9 20.2 9.5 3.8 0.0 2.2 0.9 1.2 0.2 18.8
    6.7 17.5 5.2 12.2 1.2 0.5 0.0 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.0 2.0
  • Effect of Process pH in Media 2 with Cell Line 1
  • Three different pH conditions were assessed in this study: 7.0, 6.9, and 6.8. The cultures were started at pH of 7.1; then were ramped down to the target pH set points within 3 days of culture. The viable cell density and viability were comparable across the different pH set points until day 8. After day 8, the viable cell density and viability were slightly higher with lower pH set points (FIGS. 98 and 99). The cultures were harvested on ˜50% viability. The product titer was slightly higher at pH 6.8 comparing to pH 6.9 and 7.0 (FIG. 100). The resulting peak areas from WCX-10 analysis were quantified (FIG. 101). The percentage of acidic species decreased with decrease in pH from 20.7% in the pH 7.0 condition to 18.0% in the pH6.8 condition, for a total reduction of 2.7%.
  • Effect of Process pH in Media 1 with Cell Line 3
  • Five different pH conditions were assessed in this study: 7.1 7.0, 6.9, 6.8, and 6.7. The cultures were started at pH set point of 7.1; then were ramped down to the target pH set points within 4 days of culture. The pH set points showed significant effect on the cell growth and viability with this cell line and media. Cell density was lower at higher pH and viability also dropped earlier at higher pH (FIGS. 102 and 103). The cells were harvested either on day 10 or when viability dropped to equal or less than 50%. The titer was slightly increased as the pH was reduced, reached the highest titer at pH 6.8 condition (FIG. 104). The resulting peak areas from WCX-10 analysis were quantified (FIG. 105). The percent acidic species decreased with decrease in pH from 29.7% in the pH 7.1 condition to 21.5% in the pH6.7 condition, for a total reduction of 8.2%.
  • 6.2.3 Conclusion
  • The experiments described in the instant Example demonstrate that altering cell culture process parameters on-line can be used to modulate/reduce the acidic species of a protein of interest, e.g., the antibody adalimumab or mAB2. For example, a decrease in final pH set points can lead to reductions in Acidic Regions.
  • 6.3 Method for Reducing Acidic Species in Cell Culture by the Addition of Amino Acids to Clarified Cell Culture Harvest and by Modifying the pH of the Clarified Harvest
  • The present study describes a process for reducing and controlling levels of acidic species in antibody preparations. Specifically, the invention provides a method for reducing the acidic variant content in clarified harvest, as well as a method for reducing the formation rate of acidic species in clarified harvest. The method involves adding additives like various amino acids to clarified harvest or adjusting the pH of the clarified harvest using acidic substances.
  • 6.3.1 Materials and Methods
  • Clarified Harvest Material
  • Different batches of adalimumab clarified harvest material were employed in the following experiments described below. Clarified harvest is liquid material containing a monoclonal antibody of interest that has been extracted from a fermentation bioreactor after undergoing centrifugation to remove large solid particles and subsequent filtration to remove finer solid particles and impurities from the material. Clarified harvest was used for low pH treatment studies described herein. Clarified harvest was also used for the experiments to study the effect of amino acid concentration on the presence of acidic species in clarified harvest, and for acid type-pH treatment studies described herein. Different batches of mAB-B and mAb-C clarified harvest material were employed for experiments to study the effect of amino acid and low pH treatment studies on the presence of acidic species described herein.
  • Preparation of Study Materials
  • The clarified harvest material was first adjusted to pH 4 using 3M citric acid. The material at pH 4 was then agitated for 60 minutes before adjusting the pH to a target pH of 5, 6 or 7 with 3M sodium hydroxide. The material was then agitated for a further 60 minutes. The samples were then subjected to centrifugation at 7300×g for 15 minutes in a Sorvall Evolution RC with an SLA-3000 centrifuge bowl. The supernatants obtained from the centrifuged material were then depth filtered using B1HC depth filters (Millipore) followed by 0.22 μm sterile filters. The filtrates of different pH were then subjected to holding for different period of time for evaluating the formation rate of acidic variants. After the holding, the material was purified with Protein A affinity column and the eluate was sampled and analyzed using the WCX 10 method. The preparation scheme is shown below in FIG. 106.
  • The material to study the effect of arginine on acidic species was prepared in two ways. For lower target arginine concentrations of 5 mM, 10 mM, 30 mM and 100 mM, they were made by adding the appropriate amount of 0.5M arginine stock buffer at pH 7 (pH adjusted with acetic acid) to attain the target arginine concentrations needed. For higher target arginine concentrations of 50 mM, 100 mM, 300 mM, 500 mM, 760 mM, 1M and 2M, they were made by adding the appropriate amount of arginine (solid) to the samples to attain the target arginine concentrations, with subsequent titration to a final pH of 7 using glacial acetic acid. Arginine was adjusted to a final concentration of 100 mM using the two methods to determine if the method of preparation would result in different effects. For all the experiments, following the arginine addition, treated clarified harvests were held at room temperature for the indicated duration followed by purification with Protein A column and analysis of charge variants. This study provided two results; (1) data of samples from Day 0 gave the effects of arginine on reducing acidic species in clarified harvest, (2) data of samples with different holding days gave effect of arginine on reducing the formation rate of acidic species. The preparation scheme is shown in FIG. 107.
  • The material to study the effect of histidine was prepared with target concentrations of 5 mM, 10 mM, 30 mM 50 mM, 100 mM, 200 mM and 250 mM. The samples were prepared by adding the appropriate amount of histidine (solid) to the samples to attain the target histidine concentrations, with subsequent titration to a final pH of 7 using glacial acetic acid. The sample preparation scheme is shown in FIG. 108.
  • The material to study the effect of Lysine was prepared with target concentrations of 5 mM, 10 mM, 30 mM 50 mM, 100 mM, 200 mM, 300 mM, 500 mM and 1000 mM. The samples were prepared by adding the appropriate amount of lysine hydrochloride (solid) to the samples to attain the target Lysine concentrations, with subsequent titration to a final pH of 7 using hydrochloric acid. The sample preparation scheme is shown below in FIG. 109.
  • The material to study the effect of methionine was prepared with target concentrations of 5 mM, 10 mM, 30 mM 50 mM, 100 mM, 200 mM and 300 mM. The samples were prepared by adding the appropriate amount of methionine (solid) to the samples to attain the target methionine concentrations, with subsequent titration to a final pH of 7 using glacial acetic acid. The sample preparation scheme is shown in FIG. 110.
  • The material to study the effect of different amino acids was prepared with different target concentrations for each of the 20 amino acids evaluated as well as two controls using sodium acetate in place of an amino acid, and the other simply bringing the pH of the clarified harvest down to pH 7 using glacial acetic acid. The target concentrations for the amino acids are shown below in Table 6.
  • TABLE 6
    Amino Acid Target Concentrations
    Concentration
    Amino Acid (mM)
    Alanine 100
    Arginine 100
    Asparagine 100
    Aspartic Acid 30
    Cysteine 100
    Glutamic Acid 30
    Glutamine 100
    Glycine 100
    Histidine 100
    Isoleucine 100
    Leucine 100
    Lysine 100
    Methionine 100
    Phenylalanine 100
    Proline 100
    Serine 100
    Threonine 100
    Tryptophan 30
    Tyrosine 2
    Valine 100
    NaAc 100
  • The samples were prepared by adding the appropriate amount of amino acid (solid) to the samples to attain the target amino acid concentrations as shown in Table 6, with subsequent titration to a final pH of 7 using glacial acetic acid. The sample preparation scheme is shown below in FIG. 111.
  • The material to study the effect of additives other than amino acids was prepared with different target concentrations for each of the additives evaluated as well as a control in which sodium hydroxide was used in place of arginine to bring the pH of the material to pH 10 before neutralizing it back to pH 7 with glacial acetic acid. The target concentrations for the additives are shown below in Table 7.
  • TABLE 7
    Alternative Additive Target Concentrations
    Additive Low Conc High Conc
    Sucrose 0.1M 1M
    Trehalose 0.1 M 1M
    Mannitol
    4% w/v 10% w/v
    Glycerol
    1% v/v 10% v/v
    PEG
    1% w/v  2% w/v
    Tween80 0.5% v/v    2% v/v
  • The samples were prepared by adding the appropriate amount of additive to the samples to attain the target amino acid concentrations as shown in Table 2, with subsequent titration to a final pH of 7 using glacial acetic acid.
  • The material to study the effect of the aforementioned methods on CDM clarified harvest was prepared using the following scheme shown in FIG. 112.
  • The mAb B hydrolysate clarified harvest was used to study the effect of the aforementioned methods.
  • The mAb C hydrolysate clarified harvest was used to study the effect of the aforementioned methods.
  • Hold Studies for Treated Clarified Harvest
  • After the aforementioned sample preparations, the samples were placed in separate sterile stainless steel containers for the purpose of holding at either 4° C. or at room temperature. For each material, different containers were used for each day of holding evaluated. For the acidified samples, the acidic variant compositions of the samples were evaluated on days 0, 3, 7 and 14 of holding at either temperature. For the arginine containing materials, the acidic variant compositions of the samples were evaluated on days 0, 5 and 8 of holding at room temperature. For the histidine containing materials, the acidic variant compositions of the samples were evaluated on days 0, 3 and 7 of holding at room temperature.
  • Acid Type and pH Effects on Clarified Harvest
  • The effects of acid type, clarified harvest pH and arginine content on acidic variant reduction were evaluated in this study. The samples were prepared in triplicates on 3 consecutive days to target arginine concentrations of either 0 mM (no arginine added) or 500 mM, then titrated with either glacial acetic acid, phosphoric acid, 3M citric acid or 6M hydrochloric acid to target pH values of either 5, 6 or 7. One other sample was prepared by adding a 2M arginine acetate pH 7 stock buffer to clarified harvest to attain a target arginine concentration of 500 mM. The sample preparation scheme is shown in FIG. 113.
  • Protein a Purification
  • Protein A purification of the samples was performed using a 5 mL rProtein A FF Hitrap column (GE Healthcare) at 10 g D2E7/L resin loading and a operating flow rate of 3.4 mL/min. 5 column volumes (CVs) of equilibration (1×PBS pH 7.4) is followed by loading of the sample, then washing of the column with equilibration buffer to remove non-specifically bound impurities, followed by elution of the protein with 0.1M Acetic acid, 0.15M sodium chloride.
  • The eluate samples were collected and neutralized to pH 6.9-7.2 with 1M Tris pH 9.5 at 45-75 minutes after collection. The samples were then frozen at −80° C. for at least one day before thawing and subjecting to WCX-10 analysis.
  • Effects Purification Method, Acid Concentration and Neutralization on Clarified Harvest
  • The effects of purification methods with different types of chromatography resins, acid concentration and pH neutralization on acidic variant reduction were evaluated in this study. The following samples were prepared, shown below in Table 8.
  • TABLE 8
    Acid Concentration Sample Treatments
    Sample Treatment
    Control None
    3M Citric Acid pH 6 Titrate to pH 6 with 3M Citric Acid
    1M Citric Acid pH 6 Titrate to pH 6 with 1M Citric Acid
    Glacial Acetic Acid pH 6 Titrate to pH 6 with Glacial Acetic Acid
    3M Acetic Acid pH 6 Titrate to pH 6 with 3M Acetic Acid
    3M Citric Acid pH 5 Titrate to pH 5 with 3M Citric Acid
    3M Acetic Acid pH 5 Titrate to pH 5 with 3M Acetic Acid
    3M Citric Acid pH 5 to 7 Titrate to pH 5 with 3M Citric Acid,
    then 3M Tris to pH 7
    3M Acetic Acid pH 5 to 7 Titrate to pH 5 with 3M Acetic Acid,
    then 3M Tris to pH 7
  • Each of the material made was then subjected to either Mabselect Sure or Fractogel S capture in duplicate. The eluate samples are collected and neutralized to pH 6.9-7.2 with 1M Tris pH 9.5 at 45-75 minutes after collection. The samples are then frozen at −80° C. for at least one day before thawing and subjecting to WCX-10 analysis.
  • Charge Variant Analysis (WCX-10 Assay)
  • Cation exchange chromatography was performed on a 4 mm×250 mm Dionex ProPac WCX-10 Analytical column (Dionex, CA). A Shimadzu LC10A HPLC system was used to perform the HPLC assay. The mobile phases used were 10 mM Sodium Phosphate dibasic pH 7.5 (Mobile phase A) and 10 mM Sodium Phosphate dibasic, 500 mM Sodium Chloride pH 5.5 (Mobile phase B). A binary gradient (94% A, 6% B: 0-20 min; 84% A, 16% B: 20-22 min; 0% A, 100% B: 22-28 min; 94% A, 6% B: 28-34 min) was used with detection at 280 nm.
  • Quantitation is based on the relative area percent of detected peaks. The peaks that elute at relative residence time less than that of the dominant Lysine 0 peak are together represented as the acidic variant peaks (AR).
  • 6.3.2 Results
  • Effect of Low pH Treatment with Subsequent Neutralization
  • The results of the low pH treatment with subsequent neutralization are shown below in FIGS. 114 and 115. FIG. 115 shows that the low pH treatment with subsequent neutralization to pH 5 or 6 reduces the rate of acidic variant formation over time. However, there is no significant reduction in initial acidic variant content as shown in FIG. 114.
  • Effect of Arginine Treatment
  • The results of the arginine treatment are shown in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117. FIG. 116, 117 shows that the sample preparation method resulted in different levels of acidic species in clarified harvest. Adding a 0.5M Arginine pH 7 stock buffer tends to increase acidic species, while adding pure arginine with subsequent acetic acid titration to pH 7 reduced acidic variants at arginine concentrations of greater than 100 mM. Moreover, the effect due to treatment method is demonstrated when comparing the two 100 mM arginine samples, which show an absolute difference of 1% in acidic variants between the two methods.
  • FIG. 118 shows that the rate of acidic variant formation decreases with increasing arginine concentration in clarified harvest, plateauing at around concentrations of 500 mM arginine and higher. However, the two methods of sample preparation does not result in significantly different formation rate of acidic variants.
  • Effect of Histidine Treatment
  • The results of the histidine treatment are shown in FIG. 119 and FIG. 120. Similar to arginine treatment effect, as shown in FIG. 128, when histidine was added to clarified harvest with subsequent pH neutralization with acetic acid, acidic variants were reduced at histidine concentrations higher than 50 mM. FIG. 120 shows that the rate of acidic variants formation decreases with increasing Histidine concentration in clarified harvest, plateauing at around concentrations of 200 mM Histidine and higher.
  • Effect of Lysine Treatment
  • The results of the lysine treatment are summarized in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122. Similar to arginine treatment effect, as shown in FIG. 128, when lysine was added to clarified harvest with subsequent pH neutralization with acetic acid, acidic variants were significantly reduced by ˜1% or more. FIG. 132 shows that the rate of acidic variants formation decreases with increasing lysine concentration in clarified harvest.
  • Effect of Methionine Treatment
  • The results of the methionine treatment are summarized below in FIGS. 133 and 144. Similar to arginine treatment effect, as shown in FIG. 118, when methionine was added to clarified harvest with subsequent pH neutralization with acetic acid, acidic variants were significantly reduced by ˜1% or more at concentrations of >10 mM. FIG. 124 shows that the rate of acidic variants formation is not affected significantly by methionine presence in clarified harvest.
  • Effect of Other Amino Acid Treatment
  • The results of the treatments with the various amino acids are summarized below in FIGS. 125 and 146. As shown in FIG. 125, the addition of 14 amino acids including arginine, histidine, lysine and methionine resulted in lower amounts of acidic variant content in clarified harvest. The addition of sodium acetate or the use of acetic acid also caused a reduction in acidic variant content as well. FIG. 126 shows that the rate of acidic variants formation is reduced by several amino acids including arginine, histidine, lysine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, and leucine.
  • Effect of Alternative Additive Treatment
  • The results of the treatments with the other additives are summarized below in FIGS. 127 and 128. As shown in FIG. 127, the addition of any of the additives did not result in lower acidic variant content in D2E7 hydrolysate clarified harvest. However, FIG. 128 shows that the rate of acidic variants formation is reduced by most of the additives.
  • Effect of Low pH/Arginine Treatment on D2E7 CDM Clarified Harvest
  • The results of CDM clarified harvest study are summarized below in FIGS. 129 and 130. As shown in FIG. 129, low pH/arginine treatment did not result in lower acidic variant content in D2E7 CDM clarified harvest. However, FIG. 130 shows that the rate of acidic variants formation is reduced significantly by all the treatments.
  • Effect of Low pH/Arginine Treatment on mAb B Hydrolysate Clarified Harvest
  • The results of mAb B hydrolysate clarified harvest study are summarized below in FIGS. 131 and 132. As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, low pH/arginine treatment results in both lower acidic variant content and slower rates of acidic variants formation in mAb B hydrolysate clarified harvest.
  • Effect of Low pH/Arginine Treatment on mAb C Hydrolysate Clarified Harvest
  • The results of mAb C hydrolysate clarified harvest study are summarized below in FIGS. 133 and 134. As shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, low pH/arginine treatment results in both lower acidic variant content and slower rates of acidic variants formation in mAb C hydrolysate clarified harvest.
  • Effect of Acid Type and pH
  • The results obtained from the acid type-pH study are summarized in FIG. 135. Greater acidic species reduction is obtained at lower pH. Arginine addition also reduces acidic species content further, but not to a significant extent when taking the high concentrations (500 mM) used into consideration. The results also show that acidic species reduction of ˜1% can be achieved with the usage of an arginine acetate stock buffer, although using pure arginine powder with subsequent acid titration performs slightly better. With regard to acid type used for pH adjustment, there were no significant differences between different acids observed.
  • Effect of Purification Method, Acid Concentration and Neutralization
  • The results obtained from the study are summarized below in FIGS. 136, 137, 138, and 139. FIGS. 136, 137 indicate that when the acid used is of higher concentration, there is an decrease in acidic variant content in hydrolysate clarified harvest as compared to a lower concentration acid being used. FIGS. 138, 139 show that when the clarified harvest is subjected to base neutralization to pH 7 after being treated with low pH, there is an increase in acidic variant content. The figures also show that the Fractogel resin is better able to clear acidic variants than Mabselect Sure.
  • 6.3.3 Conclusion
  • Antibody acidic species in clarified harvest can be reduced by adding additives such as arginine or histidine to clarified harvest at concentrations of more than 100 mM and 50 mM, respectively. It can also be achieved by pH adjustment of the clarified harvest to pH 6 or pH 5. In addition, the rate of acidic variant formation can be reduced through the use of arginine or histidine in a concentration dependent manner, or by low pH treatment of the clarified harvest.
  • 6.4 Method for Reducing Acidic Species in Cell Culture Use of a Continuous Media Perfusion Technology
  • As demonstrated in section 6.3, generation or formation of acidic species in the population of proteins may occur during the hold of the antibody in clarified harvest or spent media. Thus, the possibility of enhanced stability of the product antibody or a reduction in acidic species generation was explored using a continuous/perfusion based cell culture technology. Control or reduction in the amount of acidic species present in the population of proteins obtained at end of cell culture can be accomplished by modifying the exchange rate of fresh medium into the bioreactor (or removal of spent medium with product antibody out of the bioreactor).
  • 6.4.1 Materials and Methods
  • Cell Source
  • One adalimumab producing CHO cell line was employed in the study covered here. Upon thaw, the vial was cultured in a chemically defined growth media (media 1) in a series of vented shake flasks on a shaker platform at 110 rpm in a 35° C., 5% CO2 incubator. Cultures were propagated to obtain a sufficient number of cells for inoculation of the perfusion cultibag.
  • Cell Culture Media
  • A chemically defined growth or production media was used in this study. For preparation of the media formulation, the proprietary media (Invitrogen) was supplemented with L-glutamine, sodium bicarbonate, sodium chloride, recombinant human insulin and methotrexate solution. Perfusion stage media consisted of all the components in the growth medium, with the exception of a higher concentration of recombinant human insulin and the exclusion of methotrexate solution.
  • Perfusion Culture
  • The perfusion culture was carried out with the Sartorius BIOSTAT RM 20 optical perfusion system (SN#00582|12) in a Sartorius Cultibag RM 10L perfusion pro 1.2my (lot 1205-014) perfusion bag. The perfusion bag was run with a working culture volume of 1.5 L and operation conditions of; pH: 7.00, dissolved oxygen 30%, 25 rpm, 35° C., an air overlay of 0.3 slpm and a CO2 overlay of 15 sccm. pH control was initiated on day three of the culture. pH was controlled with 0.5M sodium hydroxide and CO2 additions.
  • Perfusion was carried out by ‘harvesting’ spent culture through an integrated 1.2 μm filter integrated into the perfusion cultibag. Fresh media was added to the culture through a feed line at the same rate as the harvest. Perfusion began on day four of the process at a rate of 1.0 exchanges per day (ex/day). The perfusion rate was adjusted throughout the run to accommodate glucose needs, lactate accumulation and sampling plans. Perfusion cell-free harvest samples were collected at perfusion rates of 1.5, 3.0 and 6.0 exchange volumes/day on day 5-6 of perfusion. A fresh harvest bag was used for each harvest sample. The samples were then purified using protein A and analyzed using WCX-10 assay.
  • The perfusion culture was ended on day 8 of the process.
  • WCX-10 Assay
  • The acidic species and other charge variants present in cell culture harvest samples were quantified. Cation exchange chromatography was performed on a Dionex ProPac WCX-10, Analytical column (Dionex, CA).
  • The mobile phases used were 10 mM Sodium Phosphate dibasic pH 7.5 (Mobile phase A) and 10 mM Sodium Phosphate dibasic, 500 mM Sodium Chloride pH 5.5 (Mobile phase B). A binary gradient (94% A, 6% B: 0-20 min; 84% A, 16% B: 20-22 min; 0% A, 100% B: 22-28 min; 94% A, 6% B: 28-34 min) was used with detection at 280 nm. The WCX-10 method used for mAb2 samples used different buffers. The mobile phases used were 20 mM (4-Morpholino) ethanesulfonic Acid Monohydrate (MES) pH 6.5 (Mobile phase A) and 20 mM MES, 500 mM Sodium Chloride pH 6.5 (Mobile phase B). An optimized gradient (minute/% B): 0/3, 1/3, 46/21, 47/100, 52/100, 53/3, 58/3 was used with detection at 280 nm. Quantitation is based on the relative area percent of detected peaks, as described above.
  • 6.4.2 Results
  • Effect of Use of Perfusion Technology and Choice of Medium Exchange Rates on Acidic Species
  • Adalimumab producing cell line 1 was cultured in media 1 and the cultures were carried out as described in the materials and methods. As described in table 9, the exchange rates were modified over a period of 24 hrs between day 5 and day 6 to explore the influence of medium exchange rates on the extent of acidic species. At a continuous medium exchange rate of 1.5 volumes/day, the product antibody in spent medium was collected in a harvest bag over a period of 17 hrs. The harvest bag was then exchanged with a new bag and the old bag was transferred to 4 C. Subsequently and in succession, the medium exchange rates were increased to 3 and 6 volumes/day and the product harvest was collected over a time period of 5 and 2 hrs, respectively. After an overnight hold at 4 C, the three harvest samples were processed through protein A and analyzed for acidic species using WCX-10. The percentage of acidic species in the sample with a medium exchange rate of 1.5 volumes/day was 8.1%. In the sample with the highest tested exchange rate in this experiment (6 volumes/day), the percentage of acidic species was reduced to 6%. An exchange rate dependent reduction in acidic species was observed in the three samples (Table 9). Reductions in different sub-species within the acidic variants (AR1 and AR2) were also noted. An increase in volumetric productivity, with exchange rate, was also observed.
  • TABLE 9
    Effect of medium exchange rates in a perfusion bioreactor on acidic species
    Harvest bag
    Exchange rate Exchange time Volumetric
    Start Time (day, (no. of working (for collection in Productivity
    hrs:min) volumes/day) harvest bag) (hrs) (mg/l-hr) % Total AR % AR1 % AR2
    Day
    5, 16:00 1.5 17 10.94 8.1 2.0 6.1
    Day 6, 10:25 3 5 39.80 6.9 1.7 5.2
    Day 6, 15:25 6 2 69.50 6.0 1.3 4.7
  • 6.5. Utility of AR Reduction
  • The current invention provides a method for reducing acidic species for a given protein of interest. In this example adalimumab was prepared using a combination of supplementation of arginine and lysine to cell culture as shown in this invention along with AEX and CEX purification technologies (described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/829,989) to produce a Low-AR and High-AR sample with a final AR of 2.5% and 6.9%, respectively. Both samples were incubated in a controlled environment at 25° C. and 65% relative humidity for 10 weeks, and the AR measured every two weeks. FIG. 142 shows the growth of AR for each sample over the 10 week incubation. It is evident from FIG. 142 the growth rate of AR is linear and similar between both the Low-AR and High-AR samples. Based on these results the reduced AR material can be stored 3 fold longer before reaching the same AR level as the High-AR sample. This is a significant utility as this can be very beneficial in storage handling and use of the antibody or other proteins for therapeutic use.
  • 6.6 Process Combinations to Achieve Target % AR or AR Reductions
  • Upstream and Downstream process technologies, e.g., cell culture and chromatographic separations, of the inventions disclosed in the following applications can be combined together or combined with methods in the art to provide a final target AR value or achieve a % AR reduction, as well as to, in certain embodiments, reduce product related substances and/or process related impurities. Upstream methods for AR reduction include, but are not limited to those described in the instant application. Downstream methods for AR reduction include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/829,989. Exemplary technologies disclosed in the referenced applications include, but are not limited to: cell culture additives & conditions; clarified harvest additives and pH/salt conditions; mixed mode media separations; anion exchange media separations; and cation Exchange media separations.
  • The instant example demonstrates the combined effect of one or more of these technologies in achieving a target AR value or AR reduction, thereby facilitating the preparation of an antibody material having a specific charge heterogeneity. Additional examples of combinations of downstream technologies and upstream technologies are provided in the referenced applications.
  • In this example, the combination of upstream and downstream methods involves the reduction of acidic species in 3 L bioreactor cell cultures supplemented with arginine (2 g/l) and lysine (4 g/l) as has been previously demonstrated in the instant application. The results of that strategy are summarized in Table 10. The total acidic species was reduced from 20.5% in the control sample to 10.2% in sample from cultures that were supplemented with the additives. In this study, Adalimumab producing cell line 1 was cultured in media 1 (chemically defined media) supplemented with amino acid arginine (2 g/l) and lysine (4 g/l) in a 300 L bioreactor. On Day 12 of culture, the culture was harvested and then subsequently analyzed using WCX-10 post protein A purification and the percentages of total peak(s) area corresponding to the acidic species were quantified. The percentage of acidic species was estimated to be 9.1% in the 300 L harvest sample
  • TABLE 10
    AR levels achieved with use of upstream technologies
    3 L Bioreactor 300 L Bioreactor
    Arginine (2 g/l) + Arginine (2 g/l) +
    Lysine (4 g/l) Lysine (4 g/l)
    Total Total
    Control AR AR
    AR1 (%) AR2 (%) Total AR (%) AR1 (%) AR2 (%) (%) AR1 (%) AR2 (%) (%)
    6.3 14.2 20.5 2.6 7.6 10.2 2.4 6.7 9.1
  • The material produced by the 300 L Bioreactor employing Arginine and Lysine additions, that effectively reduced the AR levels to 9.1% was purified using a downstream process employing Mixed Mode chromatography as the primary AR Reduction method.
  • Adalimumab was purified by a Protein A chromatography step followed with a low pH viral inactivation step. The filtered viral inactivated material was buffer exchanged and loaded onto a Capto Adhere column. The flowthrough of Capto Adhere material was then purified with a HIC column with bind/elute mode as well as Flow Through mode. As shown in Table 11, AR reduction was achieved primarily with MM step, with some contribution from other steps. The table also shows that additional product related substances such as aggregates and process related impurities such as HCP can be effectively reduced employing these combined technologies.
  • TABLE 11
    Complete Downstream Process Train with Protein A Capture -
    AR, HMW and HCP reduction
    Yield % AR % HMW
    Process (%) reduction reduction HCP LRF
    Clarified Harvest 97.0% n/a n/a n/a
    Prt-A Eluate Pool 89.6% 0.06 1.87
    Viral Inactivated 99.7% No reduction 0.07 0.39
    Filtrate
    MM FT pool 91.9% 2.26 0.83 1.63
    HIC (B/E) Eluate 90.1% 0.40 0.22 1.41
    Nanofiltrate Filtrate 90.7% No reduction No reduction 0.15
    BDS (B/E) 102.0% No reduction No reduction 0.22
    HIC FT-pool 98.5% 0.16 0.23 0.46
    VF (FT) Filtrate 96.1% No reduction No reduction 0.10
    BDS (FT) 103.8% No reduction No reduction No reduction
  • As is evident from the above example, the MM method further reduced the AR levels, by 2.26%. Therefore upstream technologies for reduction can be combined with downstream technologies to achieve AR levels/AR reduction.
  • The present invention is not to be limited in scope by the specific embodiments described herein. Indeed, various modifications of the invention in addition to those described herein will become apparent to those skilled in the art from the foregoing description and the accompanying figures. Such modifications are intended to fall within the scope of the appended claims.
  • Patents, patent applications, publications, product descriptions, GenBank Accession Numbers, and protocols that may be cited throughout this application, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties for all purposes. For example, but not by way of limitation, the following U.S. patent applications designated by the following U.S. patent applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties for all purposes: U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 13/803,808, 13/829,989, 13/830,976, 13/831,181, and 13/804,220.

Claims (30)

What is claimed is:
1. A composition comprising adalimumab, wherein the composition comprises less than 10% total acidic species of adalimumab,
wherein the acidic species of adalimumab do not include process-related impurities selected from the group consisting of host cells and lysed host cells, and
wherein the acidic species of adalimumab correspond to the peaks that elute earlier than the main peak in a WCX-10 HPLC chromatogram of adalimumab.
2. The composition of claim 1, wherein the WCX-10 HPLC chromatogram is generated using a first mobile phase of 10 mM Sodium Phosphate dibasic (pH 7.5) and a second mobile phase of 10 mM Sodium Phosphate dibasic, 500 mM Sodium Chloride (pH 5.5), and wherein the WCX-10 HPLC chromatogram is generated using detection at 280 nm.
3. The composition of claim 1, wherein the acidic species of adalimumab comprise a first acidic region (AR1) and a second acidic region (AR2).
4. The composition of claim 1, wherein the composition comprises 9% or less acidic species of adalimumab.
5. The composition of claim 1, wherein the composition comprises 6%-8% acidic species of adalimumab.
6. The composition of claim 1, wherein the adalimumab is produced in a mammalian host cell grown in cell culture.
7. The composition of claim 6, wherein the mammalian host cell is selected from the group consisting of a CHO cell, an NSO cell, a COS cell, and an SP2 cell.
8. The composition of claim 7, wherein the mammalian host cell is a CHO cell.
9. The composition of claim 8, wherein the composition is lyophilized.
10. A pharmaceutical composition suitable for administration to a subject comprising the composition of claim 8 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
11. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 10, wherein adalimumab is present in the pharmaceutical composition at a concentration of 0.1-250 mg/ml.
12. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 10, wherein the pharmaceutical composition comprises one or more excipient.
13. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 12, wherein the one or more excipient is selected from the group consisting of a buffer, an isotonic agent, a surfactant or a combination thereof.
14. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 13, wherein the pharmaceutical composition comprises the surfactant polysorbate 80.
15. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 13, wherein the pharmaceutical composition comprises an amino acid buffer.
16. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 15, wherein the amino acid is histidine.
17. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 13, wherein the pharmaceutical composition comprises the isotonic agent mannitol.
18. A method for treating a subject in need thereof, comprising administering to the subject the pharmaceutical composition of claim 10, thereby treating the subject.
19. A composition comprising adalimumab, wherein the composition comprises less than 10% total acidic species of adalimumab,
wherein the acidic species of adalimumab do not include process-related impurities selected from the group consisting of host cells and lysed host cells,
wherein the acidic species of adalimumab correspond to the peaks that elute earlier than the main peak in a WCX-10 HPLC chromatogram of adalimumab, and wherein the WCX-10 HPLC chromatogram is generated using a first mobile phase of 10 mM Sodium Phosphate dibasic (pH 7.5) and a second mobile phase of 10 mM Sodium Phosphate dibasic, 500 mM Sodium Chloride (pH 5.5), and wherein the WCX-10 HPLC chromatogram is generated using detection at 280 nm.
20. The composition of claim 19, wherein the acidic species of adalimumab comprise a first acidic region (AR1) and a second acidic region (AR2).
21. The composition of claim 19, wherein the composition comprises 9% or less acidic species of adalimumab.
22. The composition of claim 19, wherein the composition comprises 6%-8% acidic species of adalimumab.
23. The composition of claim 19, wherein the adalimumab is produced in a mammalian host cell grown in cell culture.
24. The composition of claim 23, wherein the mammalian host cell is selected from the group consisting of a CHO cell, an NSO cell, a COS cell, and an SP2 cell.
25. The composition of claim 24, wherein the mammalian host cell is a CHO cell.
26. A pharmaceutical composition suitable for administration to a subject comprising the composition of claim 25 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
27. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 26, wherein adalimumab is present in the pharmaceutical composition at a concentration of 0.1-250 mg/ml.
28. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 26, wherein the pharmaceutical composition comprises one or more excipient.
29. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 28, wherein the one or more excipient is selected from the group consisting of a buffer, an isotonic agent, a surfactant or a combination thereof.
30. A method for treating a subject in need thereof, comprising administering to the subject the pharmaceutical composition of claim 26, thereby treating the subject.
US15/601,945 2012-04-20 2017-05-22 Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species Abandoned US20170355761A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US15/601,945 US20170355761A1 (en) 2012-04-20 2017-05-22 Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201261636493P 2012-04-20 2012-04-20
US13/830,583 US9150645B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2013-03-14 Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species
US14/842,933 US9359434B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2015-09-02 Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species
US15/008,895 US9683033B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2016-01-28 Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species
US15/601,945 US20170355761A1 (en) 2012-04-20 2017-05-22 Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/008,895 Continuation US9683033B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2016-01-28 Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20170355761A1 true US20170355761A1 (en) 2017-12-14

Family

ID=48045072

Family Applications (8)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/829,989 Active 2033-10-12 US9334319B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2013-03-14 Low acidic species compositions
US13/830,583 Active 2033-05-13 US9150645B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2013-03-14 Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species
US14/584,492 Active US9346879B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2014-12-29 Protein purification methods to reduce acidic species
US14/842,933 Active US9359434B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2015-09-02 Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species
US15/008,895 Active US9683033B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2016-01-28 Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species
US15/149,898 Active 2033-07-22 US9957318B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2016-05-09 Protein purification methods to reduce acidic species
US15/601,945 Abandoned US20170355761A1 (en) 2012-04-20 2017-05-22 Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species
US15/951,560 Abandoned US20190062419A1 (en) 2012-04-20 2018-04-12 Protein purification methods to reduce acidic species

Family Applications Before (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/829,989 Active 2033-10-12 US9334319B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2013-03-14 Low acidic species compositions
US13/830,583 Active 2033-05-13 US9150645B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2013-03-14 Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species
US14/584,492 Active US9346879B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2014-12-29 Protein purification methods to reduce acidic species
US14/842,933 Active US9359434B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2015-09-02 Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species
US15/008,895 Active US9683033B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2016-01-28 Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species
US15/149,898 Active 2033-07-22 US9957318B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2016-05-09 Protein purification methods to reduce acidic species

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/951,560 Abandoned US20190062419A1 (en) 2012-04-20 2018-04-12 Protein purification methods to reduce acidic species

Country Status (2)

Country Link
US (8) US9334319B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2013158279A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (67)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
MX2011004200A (en) * 2008-10-20 2011-05-24 Abbott Lab Isolation and purification of antibodies using protein a affinity chromatography.
US9062106B2 (en) 2011-04-27 2015-06-23 Abbvie Inc. Methods for controlling the galactosylation profile of recombinantly-expressed proteins
US9475858B2 (en) 2011-07-08 2016-10-25 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Cell culture process
BR112014022240A2 (en) 2012-03-09 2017-08-01 Csl Behring Ag compositions comprising secretory-like immunoglobulins
EP2636681A1 (en) * 2012-03-09 2013-09-11 CSL Behring AG Process for enriching IgA
EP2636684A1 (en) 2012-03-09 2013-09-11 CSL Behring AG Prevention of infection
WO2013158279A1 (en) 2012-04-20 2013-10-24 Abbvie Inc. Protein purification methods to reduce acidic species
US9067990B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2015-06-30 Abbvie, Inc. Protein purification using displacement chromatography
WO2013158273A1 (en) 2012-04-20 2013-10-24 Abbvie Inc. Methods to modulate c-terminal lysine variant distribution
US9249182B2 (en) 2012-05-24 2016-02-02 Abbvie, Inc. Purification of antibodies using hydrophobic interaction chromatography
US9512214B2 (en) 2012-09-02 2016-12-06 Abbvie, Inc. Methods to control protein heterogeneity
BR112015004467A2 (en) 2012-09-02 2017-03-21 Abbvie Inc method for controlling protein heterogeneity
SG11201505460WA (en) * 2013-02-06 2015-08-28 Agency Science Tech & Res Methods for reducing aggregate levels in protein preparations by treatment with thio-heterocyclic cations
AU2013381687A1 (en) 2013-03-12 2015-09-24 Abbvie Inc. Human antibodies that bind human TNF-alpha and methods of preparing the same
US10023608B1 (en) 2013-03-13 2018-07-17 Amgen Inc. Protein purification methods to remove impurities
EP2970916B1 (en) 2013-03-13 2021-04-14 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Adapted lepidopteran insect cells for the production of recombinant proteins
WO2014158231A1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2014-10-02 Abbvie Inc. Low acidic species compositions and methods for producing and using the same
WO2014159579A1 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-10-02 Abbvie Inc. MUTATED ANTI-TNFα ANTIBODIES AND METHODS OF THEIR USE
WO2014151878A2 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-09-25 Abbvie Inc. Methods for modulating protein glycosylation profiles of recombinant protein therapeutics using monosaccharides and oligosacharides
US9017687B1 (en) 2013-10-18 2015-04-28 Abbvie, Inc. Low acidic species compositions and methods for producing and using the same using displacement chromatography
DK2970378T3 (en) 2013-03-15 2021-08-23 Biogen Ma Inc HYDROPHOB INTERACTION PROTEIN CHROMATOGRAPHY UNDER SALT-FREE CONDITIONS
AR095196A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-09-30 Regeneron Pharma SERUM FREE CELL CULTIVATION MEDIA
KR101569783B1 (en) * 2013-06-05 2015-11-19 한화케미칼 주식회사 A Method of Antibody Purification
WO2015051293A2 (en) 2013-10-04 2015-04-09 Abbvie, Inc. Use of metal ions for modulation of protein glycosylation profiles of recombinant proteins
WO2015057910A1 (en) 2013-10-16 2015-04-23 Oncobiologics, Inc. Buffer formulations for enhanced antibody stability
US9085618B2 (en) 2013-10-18 2015-07-21 Abbvie, Inc. Low acidic species compositions and methods for producing and using the same
US9181337B2 (en) 2013-10-18 2015-11-10 Abbvie, Inc. Modulated lysine variant species compositions and methods for producing and using the same
US8946395B1 (en) 2013-10-18 2015-02-03 Abbvie Inc. Purification of proteins using hydrophobic interaction chromatography
EP3066123A1 (en) * 2013-11-07 2016-09-14 AbbVie Inc. Isolation and purification of antibodies
US20150139988A1 (en) 2013-11-15 2015-05-21 Abbvie, Inc. Glycoengineered binding protein compositions
US20170183376A1 (en) 2014-06-24 2017-06-29 Insight Biopharmaceuticals Ltd. Methods of purifying antibodies
AR102198A1 (en) 2014-10-09 2017-02-08 Regeneron Pharma PROCESS TO REDUCE SUBVISIBLE PARTICLES IN A PHARMACEUTICAL FORMULATION
US20160115225A1 (en) * 2014-10-24 2016-04-28 Abbvie Inc. Methods of Reducing Methylglyoxal (MGO) Modification of Recombinant Proteins in Cell Culture
JP6845139B2 (en) * 2014-12-15 2021-03-17 メルク パテント ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツングMerck Patent Gesellschaft mit beschraenkter Haftung Capture target molecules from crude solution
WO2016118707A1 (en) * 2015-01-21 2016-07-28 Oncobiologics, Inc. Modulation of charge variants in a monoclonal antibody composition
GB2539420B (en) * 2015-06-16 2021-01-13 Cytiva Sweden Ab Determination of chromatography conditions
TW202330904A (en) 2015-08-04 2023-08-01 美商再生元醫藥公司 Taurine supplemented cell culture medium and methods of use
CN106496302B (en) * 2015-09-08 2021-12-10 三生国健药业(上海)股份有限公司 Method for purifying protein by ion exchange chromatography
CN108350027A (en) * 2015-11-18 2018-07-31 默克专利股份公司 Opposite pH- salt gradients for improved Separation of Proteins
WO2017084737A1 (en) * 2015-11-18 2017-05-26 Merck Patent Gmbh Improved protein separation in ion exchange chromatography
US11285210B2 (en) 2016-02-03 2022-03-29 Outlook Therapeutics, Inc. Buffer formulations for enhanced antibody stability
CN109069592B (en) * 2016-03-16 2023-03-07 菲尼克斯组织修复公司 Method for purifying collagen 7
KR102369014B1 (en) 2016-08-16 2022-03-02 리제너론 파아마슈티컬스, 인크. Methods for quantifying individual antibodies from mixtures
KR20230119729A (en) 2016-10-25 2023-08-16 리제너론 파아마슈티컬스, 인크. Methods and systems for chromatography data analysis
MX2019006123A (en) * 2016-12-21 2019-08-12 Hoffmann La Roche Method for in vitro glycoengineering of antibodies.
GB201703116D0 (en) * 2017-02-27 2017-04-12 Ge Healthcare Bioprocess R&D Ab A seperation matrix and a method of seperating antibodies
WO2018170488A1 (en) * 2017-03-17 2018-09-20 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Method of purifying an antibody
JP2020511516A (en) * 2017-03-24 2020-04-16 カウンスィル オブ サイエンティフィック アンド インダストリアル リサーチCouncil Of Scientific & Industrial Research Method for purifying recombinant antibody fragment
WO2018224673A1 (en) 2017-06-08 2018-12-13 Zaklady Farmaceutyczne Polpharma S.A. Improved methods of cell culture
BR112020005335A2 (en) 2017-09-19 2020-09-24 Regeneron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. methods to reduce the formation of particles and compositions formed by them
AU2019246983A1 (en) 2018-04-02 2020-10-29 Amgen Inc. Erenumab compositions and uses thereof
SG11202009521YA (en) * 2018-04-06 2020-10-29 Aquaporin As Process for producing a membrane protein
PL3781943T3 (en) * 2018-04-20 2022-08-01 Janssen Biotech, Inc Chromatography column qualification in manufacturing methods for producing anti-il12/il23 antibody compositions
US11884698B2 (en) 2018-07-02 2024-01-30 Regeneron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Systems and methods for preparing a polypeptide from a mixture
EP3826743A4 (en) * 2018-07-25 2022-09-14 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Methods of separating host cell lipases from a production protein in chromatographic processes
CN111153993B (en) * 2018-11-07 2024-06-28 正大天晴药业集团南京顺欣制药有限公司 Preparation method of anti-TNF-alpha monoclonal antibody
EP3921652A4 (en) * 2019-02-08 2022-11-02 Tanvex Biopharma Usa, Inc. Data extraction for biopharmaceutical analysis
CN111013656B (en) * 2019-12-27 2021-05-28 河南农业大学 Synthetic method of tetrazine hypercrosslinked porous photocatalyst
WO2021139720A1 (en) * 2020-01-08 2021-07-15 信达生物制药(苏州)有限公司 Purification method for adalimumab and stable composition thereof
CN113563469A (en) * 2020-04-28 2021-10-29 江苏中新医药有限公司 Method for purifying adalimumab with high recovery rate
US20230166201A1 (en) * 2020-05-01 2023-06-01 Kashiv Biosciences, Llc An improved process of affinity chromatography
US20230166200A1 (en) * 2020-05-01 2023-06-01 Kashiv Biosciences, Llc An improved process of purification of protein
WO2022154762A1 (en) * 2021-01-18 2022-07-21 Turgut İlaçlari A.Ş. Method of producing adalimumab
US12031151B2 (en) 2021-01-20 2024-07-09 Regeneron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of improving protein titer in cell culture
WO2023053031A1 (en) * 2021-09-28 2023-04-06 Kashiv Biosciences, Llc An improved process of purification of fusion protein
CA3233419A1 (en) * 2021-09-28 2023-04-06 Kashiv Biosciences, Llc An improved process for purification of protein
AU2023223660A1 (en) * 2022-02-25 2024-08-01 Kashiv Biosciences, Llc A process for improving polypeptide expression in mammalian cell culture

Family Cites Families (551)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3887430A (en) 1972-02-24 1975-06-03 Dow Chemical Co Culture medium for tissue culture techniques
USRE30985E (en) 1978-01-01 1982-06-29 Serum-free cell culture media
US4634665A (en) 1980-02-25 1987-01-06 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Processes for inserting DNA into eucaryotic cells and for producing proteinaceous materials
US5179017A (en) 1980-02-25 1993-01-12 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Processes for inserting DNA into eucaryotic cells and for producing proteinaceous materials
US4399216A (en) 1980-02-25 1983-08-16 The Trustees Of Columbia University Processes for inserting DNA into eucaryotic cells and for producing proteinaceous materials
DE3280462T2 (en) 1981-09-08 1995-04-20 The Rockefeller University, New York, N.Y. Antibodies to a composition with mediator activity and its use in a pharmaceutical composition.
US4510245A (en) 1982-11-18 1985-04-09 Chiron Corporation Adenovirus promoter system
US4560655A (en) 1982-12-16 1985-12-24 Immunex Corporation Serum-free cell culture medium and process for making same
US4657866A (en) 1982-12-21 1987-04-14 Sudhir Kumar Serum-free, synthetic, completely chemically defined tissue culture media
GB8308235D0 (en) 1983-03-25 1983-05-05 Celltech Ltd Polypeptides
US4534972A (en) 1983-03-29 1985-08-13 Miles Laboratories, Inc. Protein compositions substantially free from infectious agents
US4816567A (en) 1983-04-08 1989-03-28 Genentech, Inc. Recombinant immunoglobin preparations
DD266710A3 (en) 1983-06-06 1989-04-12 Ve Forschungszentrum Biotechnologie Process for the biotechnical production of alkaline phosphatase
US4767704A (en) 1983-10-07 1988-08-30 Columbia University In The City Of New York Protein-free culture medium
DE3572982D1 (en) 1984-03-06 1989-10-19 Takeda Chemical Industries Ltd Chemically modified lymphokine and production thereof
US4704366A (en) 1984-06-22 1987-11-03 Bio-Rad Laboratories, Inc. Process for binding IgG to protein A
US5672347A (en) 1984-07-05 1997-09-30 Genentech, Inc. Tumor necrosis factor antagonists and their use
DE3431140A1 (en) 1984-08-24 1986-03-06 Behringwerke Ag, 3550 Marburg ENHANCER FOR EUKARYOTIC EXPRESSION SYSTEMS
US4879231A (en) 1984-10-30 1989-11-07 Phillips Petroleum Company Transformation of yeasts of the genus pichia
IL73883A (en) 1984-12-20 1990-12-23 Yeda Res & Dev Monoclonal antibodies against tnf-alpha,hybridomas producing them and method for the purification of tnf-alpha
US5168062A (en) 1985-01-30 1992-12-01 University Of Iowa Research Foundation Transfer vectors and microorganisms containing human cytomegalovirus immediate-early promoter-regulatory DNA sequence
GB8516415D0 (en) 1985-06-28 1985-07-31 Celltech Ltd Culture of animal cells
US5672502A (en) 1985-06-28 1997-09-30 Celltech Therapeutics Limited Animal cell culture
ATE114673T1 (en) 1985-08-16 1994-12-15 Univ Rockefeller ANABOLIC ACTIVITY MODULATOR AND ITS USES.
IT206190Z2 (en) 1985-12-17 1987-07-13 Iveco Fiat IMPROVING THE BODYWORK OF A HEAVY VEHICLE
US4968615A (en) 1985-12-18 1990-11-06 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Deoxyribonucleic acid segment from a virus
US4925796A (en) 1986-03-07 1990-05-15 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Method for enhancing glycoprotein stability
US5681718A (en) 1986-03-14 1997-10-28 Celltech Limited Methods for enhanced production of tissue plasminogen activator in cell culture using alkanoic acids or salts thereof
US5225539A (en) 1986-03-27 1993-07-06 Medical Research Council Recombinant altered antibodies and methods of making altered antibodies
US4927762A (en) 1986-04-01 1990-05-22 Cell Enterprises, Inc. Cell culture medium with antioxidant
GB8610600D0 (en) 1986-04-30 1986-06-04 Novo Industri As Transformation of trichoderma
DE3631229A1 (en) 1986-09-13 1988-03-24 Basf Ag MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES AGAINST HUMAN TUMORNESCROSE FACTOR (TNF) AND THEIR USE
US4801687A (en) 1986-10-27 1989-01-31 Bioprobe International, Inc. Monoclonal antibody purification process using protein A
US5045468A (en) 1986-12-12 1991-09-03 Cell Enterprises, Inc. Protein-free culture medium which promotes hybridoma growth
US4877608A (en) 1987-11-09 1989-10-31 Rorer Pharmaceutical Corporation Pharmaceutical plasma protein formulations in low ionic strength media
US6238891B1 (en) 1987-11-18 2001-05-29 Cetus Oncology Corporation Method of increasing product expression through solute stress
US5118796A (en) 1987-12-09 1992-06-02 Centocor, Incorporated Efficient large-scale purification of immunoglobulins and derivatives
US5476996A (en) 1988-06-14 1995-12-19 Lidak Pharmaceuticals Human immune system in non-human animal
WO1990000902A1 (en) 1988-07-18 1990-02-08 Chiron Corporation Monoclonal antibodies reactive with cachectin
US5223409A (en) 1988-09-02 1993-06-29 Protein Engineering Corp. Directed evolution of novel binding proteins
US6048728A (en) 1988-09-23 2000-04-11 Chiron Corporation Cell culture medium for enhanced cell growth, culture longevity, and product expression
ATE135397T1 (en) 1988-09-23 1996-03-15 Cetus Oncology Corp CELL CULTIVATION MEDIUM FOR INCREASED CELL GROWTH, TO INCREASE THE LONGEVITY AND EXPRESSION OF THE PRODUCTS
US5126250A (en) 1988-09-28 1992-06-30 Eli Lilly And Company Method for the reduction of heterogeneity of monoclonal antibodies
GB8823869D0 (en) 1988-10-12 1988-11-16 Medical Res Council Production of antibodies
EP0366043B1 (en) 1988-10-24 1994-03-30 Otsuka Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Monoclonal antibody
EP0368684B2 (en) 1988-11-11 2004-09-29 Medical Research Council Cloning immunoglobulin variable domain sequences.
ES2096553T3 (en) 1988-12-19 1997-03-16 American Cyanamid Co METHOD FOR THE TREATMENT OF ENDOTOXIC SHOCK IN A MAMMAL ANIMAL.
US5047335A (en) 1988-12-21 1991-09-10 The Regents Of The University Of Calif. Process for controlling intracellular glycosylation of proteins
CA2006596C (en) 1988-12-22 2000-09-05 Rika Ishikawa Chemically-modified g-csf
US5530101A (en) 1988-12-28 1996-06-25 Protein Design Labs, Inc. Humanized immunoglobulins
DE4009603A1 (en) 1989-03-30 1990-10-04 Leybold Ag Lock chamber for substrate
US4933435A (en) 1989-04-05 1990-06-12 Bioprobe International Antibody purification process
US5169936A (en) 1989-04-14 1992-12-08 Biogen, Inc. Protein purification on immobilized metal affinity resins effected by elution using a weak ligand
EP0402226A1 (en) 1989-06-06 1990-12-12 Institut National De La Recherche Agronomique Transformation vectors for yeast yarrowia
US5959087A (en) 1989-08-07 1999-09-28 Peptide Technology, Ltd. Tumour necrosis factor binding ligands
US6451983B2 (en) 1989-08-07 2002-09-17 Peptech Limited Tumor necrosis factor antibodies
DE69027121T3 (en) 1989-08-07 2001-08-30 Peptech Ltd., Dee Why BINDING LANDING FOR TUMORNROCROSIS FACTOR
GB8921123D0 (en) 1989-09-19 1989-11-08 Millar Ann B Treatment of ards
US5859205A (en) 1989-12-21 1999-01-12 Celltech Limited Humanised antibodies
GB8928874D0 (en) 1989-12-21 1990-02-28 Celltech Ltd Humanised antibodies
US6075181A (en) 1990-01-12 2000-06-13 Abgenix, Inc. Human antibodies derived from immunized xenomice
US6150584A (en) 1990-01-12 2000-11-21 Abgenix, Inc. Human antibodies derived from immunized xenomice
US6673986B1 (en) 1990-01-12 2004-01-06 Abgenix, Inc. Generation of xenogeneic antibodies
US5945098A (en) 1990-02-01 1999-08-31 Baxter International Inc. Stable intravenously-administrable immune globulin preparation
DE4037604A1 (en) 1990-04-25 1991-10-31 Bayer Ag Use of anti-TNF antibodies to treat ischaemia and its sequelae - esp. to increase survival rate after myocardial infarct and transplants
US5427908A (en) 1990-05-01 1995-06-27 Affymax Technologies N.V. Recombinant library screening methods
US5378612A (en) 1990-05-11 1995-01-03 Juridical Foundation The Chemo-Sero-Therapeutic Research Institute Culture medium for production of recombinant protein
US5110913A (en) 1990-05-25 1992-05-05 Miles Inc. Antibody purification method
US5096816A (en) 1990-06-05 1992-03-17 Cetus Corporation In vitro management of ammonia's effect on glycosylation of cell products through pH control
GB9014932D0 (en) 1990-07-05 1990-08-22 Celltech Ltd Recombinant dna product and method
JPH06508511A (en) 1990-07-10 1994-09-29 ケンブリッジ アンティボディー テクノロジー リミティド Method for producing specific binding pair members
GB9015198D0 (en) 1990-07-10 1990-08-29 Brien Caroline J O Binding substance
US5625126A (en) 1990-08-29 1997-04-29 Genpharm International, Inc. Transgenic non-human animals for producing heterologous antibodies
US6255458B1 (en) 1990-08-29 2001-07-03 Genpharm International High affinity human antibodies and human antibodies against digoxin
US5633425A (en) 1990-08-29 1997-05-27 Genpharm International, Inc. Transgenic non-human animals capable of producing heterologous antibodies
US7084260B1 (en) 1996-10-10 2006-08-01 Genpharm International, Inc. High affinity human antibodies and human antibodies against human antigens
US5545806A (en) 1990-08-29 1996-08-13 Genpharm International, Inc. Ransgenic non-human animals for producing heterologous antibodies
US5661016A (en) 1990-08-29 1997-08-26 Genpharm International Inc. Transgenic non-human animals capable of producing heterologous antibodies of various isotypes
US5789650A (en) 1990-08-29 1998-08-04 Genpharm International, Inc. Transgenic non-human animals for producing heterologous antibodies
DK0814159T3 (en) 1990-08-29 2005-10-24 Genpharm Int Transgenic, non-human animals capable of forming heterologous antibodies
US5770429A (en) 1990-08-29 1998-06-23 Genpharm International, Inc. Transgenic non-human animals capable of producing heterologous antibodies
US6300129B1 (en) 1990-08-29 2001-10-09 Genpharm International Transgenic non-human animals for producing heterologous antibodies
US5122469A (en) 1990-10-03 1992-06-16 Genentech, Inc. Method for culturing Chinese hamster ovary cells to improve production of recombinant proteins
GB9022547D0 (en) 1990-10-17 1990-11-28 Wellcome Found Purified immunoglobulin
GB9022545D0 (en) 1990-10-17 1990-11-28 Wellcome Found Culture medium
GB9022543D0 (en) 1990-10-17 1990-11-28 Wellcome Found Antibody production
WO1992009690A2 (en) 1990-12-03 1992-06-11 Genentech, Inc. Enrichment method for variant proteins with altered binding properties
GB2279077B (en) 1990-12-21 1995-06-14 Celltech Ltd Therapeutic compositions comprising recombinant antibodies specific for the TNFalpha
US5994510A (en) 1990-12-21 1999-11-30 Celltech Therapeutics Limited Recombinant antibodies specific for TNFα
GB9109645D0 (en) 1991-05-03 1991-06-26 Celltech Ltd Recombinant antibodies
GB9028123D0 (en) 1990-12-28 1991-02-13 Erba Carlo Spa Monoclonal antibodies against human tumor necrosis factor alpha
DK1279731T3 (en) 1991-03-01 2007-09-24 Dyax Corp Process for the development of binding mini-proteins
SG47099A1 (en) 1991-03-15 1998-03-20 Amgen Boulder Inc Pegylation of polypeptides
US6277969B1 (en) 1991-03-18 2001-08-21 New York University Anti-TNF antibodies and peptides of human tumor necrosis factor
US20060246073A1 (en) 1991-03-18 2006-11-02 Knight David M Anti-TNF antibodies and peptides of human tumor necrosis factor
US20040120952A1 (en) 2000-08-07 2004-06-24 Centocor, Inc Anti-TNF antibodies and peptides of human tumor necrosis factor
US7192584B2 (en) 1991-03-18 2007-03-20 Centocor, Inc. Methods of treating psoriasis with anti-TNF antibodies
US5656272A (en) 1991-03-18 1997-08-12 New York University Medical Center Methods of treating TNF-α-mediated Crohn's disease using chimeric anti-TNF antibodies
US5698195A (en) 1991-03-18 1997-12-16 New York University Medical Center Methods of treating rheumatoid arthritis using chimeric anti-TNF antibodies
US20070298040A1 (en) 1991-03-18 2007-12-27 Centocor, Inc. Methods of treating seronegative arthropathy with anti-TNF antibodies
EP1681305A3 (en) 1991-03-18 2008-02-27 New York University Monoclonal and chimeric antibodies specific for human tumor necrosis factor
DE69130262T2 (en) 1991-03-29 1999-03-18 Immunex Corp., Seattle, Wash. ISOLATED VIRAL PROTEINS AS CYTOKINANTAGONISTS
DK1471142T3 (en) 1991-04-10 2009-03-09 Scripps Research Inst Heterodimeric receptor libraries using phagemids
DE4122599C2 (en) 1991-07-08 1993-11-11 Deutsches Krebsforsch Phagemid for screening antibodies
US5328985A (en) 1991-07-12 1994-07-12 The Regents Of The University Of California Recombinant streptavidin-protein chimeras useful for conjugation of molecules in the immune system
AU662752B2 (en) 1991-07-15 1995-09-14 Wellcome Foundation Limited, The Production of antibodies
DE69229477T2 (en) 1991-09-23 1999-12-09 Cambridge Antibody Technology Ltd., Melbourn Methods for the production of humanized antibodies
GB9122820D0 (en) 1991-10-28 1991-12-11 Wellcome Found Stabilised antibodies
AU3244693A (en) 1991-12-17 1993-07-19 Schering Corporation Use of the combination of anti-tumor necrosis factor plus interleukin-6 to treat septic shock
WO1993019751A1 (en) 1992-04-02 1993-10-14 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Compounds useful for treating inflammatory diseases and inhibiting production of tumor necrosis factor
CA2140638C (en) 1992-07-24 2010-05-04 Raju Kucherlapati Generation of xenogeneic antibodies
FI91535C (en) 1992-07-28 1994-07-11 Hurme Consulting Oy Method of denaturing road salt, and denaturing road salt
DE69321909T2 (en) 1992-08-28 1999-04-01 Bayer Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa. Use of anti-TNF monoclonal antibodies for the treatment of bacterial meningitis
US6270766B1 (en) 1992-10-08 2001-08-07 The Kennedy Institute Of Rheumatology Anti-TNF antibodies and methotrexate in the treatment of arthritis and crohn's disease
CA2146647C (en) 1992-10-08 2009-05-05 Marc Feldmann Treatment of autoimmune and inflammatory disorders
JPH08509203A (en) 1992-10-15 1996-10-01 ダナ−ファーバー キャンサー インステテュート インコーポレイテッド Treatment of obesity-related diabetes type II insulin resistance with antagonists of TNF-α action
JPH06292592A (en) 1993-02-09 1994-10-21 Snow Brand Milk Prod Co Ltd Production of glycoprotein
DE122009000074I1 (en) 1993-03-05 2011-12-01 Bayer Healthcare Ag Human monoclonal anti-TNF alpha antibody.
DE4307508A1 (en) 1993-03-10 1994-09-15 Knoll Ag Use of anti-TNF antibodies as a medicine in the treatment of heart failure (heart muscle weakness)
CA2161351C (en) 1993-04-26 2010-12-21 Nils Lonberg Transgenic non-human animals capable of producing heterologous antibodies
AU6912294A (en) 1993-05-12 1994-12-12 Xoma Corporation Immunotoxins comprising ribosome-inactivating proteins
US6193969B1 (en) 1993-06-03 2001-02-27 Protherics Inc. Antibody fragments in therapy
US6261558B1 (en) 1993-10-19 2001-07-17 The Scripps Research Institute Synthetic human neutralizing monoclonal antibodies to human immunodeficiency virus
EP0659766A1 (en) 1993-11-23 1995-06-28 Schering-Plough Human monoclonal antibodies against human cytokines and methods of making and using such antibodies
NZ278607A (en) 1994-02-07 1999-05-28 Knoll Ag Use of tnf antagonists for treating disorders involving elevated serum levels of il-6 wherein the serum levels are 500pg/ml or above
EP0666312A1 (en) 1994-02-08 1995-08-09 Wolfgang A. Renner Process for the improvement of mammalian cell growth
US5429746A (en) 1994-02-22 1995-07-04 Smith Kline Beecham Corporation Antibody purification
EP0748338A4 (en) 1994-03-04 2001-03-28 Merck & Co Inc In vitro antibody affinity maturation using alanine scanning mutagenesis
US5856179A (en) 1994-03-10 1999-01-05 Genentech, Inc. Polypeptide production in animal cell culture
JPH07289288A (en) 1994-04-27 1995-11-07 L T T Kenkyusho:Kk Method for evaluating effect of antirheumatic medicine
US5945311A (en) 1994-06-03 1999-08-31 GSF--Forschungszentrumfur Umweltund Gesundheit Method for producing heterologous bi-specific antibodies
CA2192821A1 (en) 1994-06-24 1996-01-04 Wayne R. Gombotz Controlled release polypeptide compositions and methods of treating inflammatory bowel disease
ZA955642B (en) 1994-07-07 1997-05-06 Ortho Pharma Corp Lyophilized imaging agent formulation
US5561053A (en) 1994-08-05 1996-10-01 Genentech, Inc. Method for selecting high-expressing host cells
US5616487A (en) 1994-09-15 1997-04-01 Aastrom Biosciences, Inc. Stabilized retrovirus compositions
SE503424C2 (en) 1994-11-14 1996-06-10 Pharmacia Ab Process for purification of recombinant coagulation factor VIII
US5641870A (en) 1995-04-20 1997-06-24 Genentech, Inc. Low pH hydrophobic interaction chromatography for antibody purification
EP1709970A1 (en) 1995-04-27 2006-10-11 Abgenix, Inc. Human antibodies against EGFR, derived from immunized xenomice
AU2466895A (en) 1995-04-28 1996-11-18 Abgenix, Inc. Human antibodies derived from immunized xenomice
US5721121A (en) 1995-06-06 1998-02-24 Genentech, Inc. Mammalian cell culture process for producing a tumor necrosis factor receptor immunoglobulin chimeric protein
US5705364A (en) 1995-06-06 1998-01-06 Genentech, Inc. Mammalian cell culture process
US6656466B1 (en) 1995-06-06 2003-12-02 Genetech, Inc. Human tumor necrosis factor—immunoglobulin(TNFR1-IgG1) chimera composition
US6113898A (en) 1995-06-07 2000-09-05 Idec Pharmaceuticals Corporation Human B7.1-specific primatized antibodies and transfectomas expressing said antibodies
SI2275119T1 (en) 1995-07-27 2013-12-31 Genentech, Inc. Stable isotonic lyophilized protein formulation
JP4306813B2 (en) 1995-09-19 2009-08-05 アスビオファーマ株式会社 New method for culturing animal cells
US5989830A (en) 1995-10-16 1999-11-23 Unilever Patent Holdings Bv Bifunctional or bivalent antibody fragment analogue
US6090382A (en) 1996-02-09 2000-07-18 Basf Aktiengesellschaft Human antibodies that bind human TNFα
AR005035A1 (en) 1995-12-11 1999-04-07 Merck Patent Ges Mit Beschränkter Haftung PROCEDURE TO PREPARE RECOMBINANT PROTEINS IN E. COLI, BY FERMENTATION WITH GREAT CONCENTRATION OF CELLS.
NZ512006A (en) 1996-02-09 2005-05-27 Abbott Biotech Ltd Medical treatment with human TNF-alpha antibodies
EP0802257B1 (en) 1996-04-19 2002-08-21 Societe Des Produits Nestle S.A. Human colon epithelial immortalized cell lines
GB9610992D0 (en) 1996-05-24 1996-07-31 Glaxo Group Ltd Concentrated antibody preparation
TW491855B (en) 1996-08-07 2002-06-21 Csl Ltd Purification of immunoglobulins
WO1998008934A1 (en) 1996-08-30 1998-03-05 Life Technologies, Inc. Serum-free mammalian cell culture medium, and uses thereof
US20040171152A1 (en) 1996-10-10 2004-09-02 Invitrogen Corporation Animal cell culture media comprising non-animal or plant-derived nutrients
SI0950067T1 (en) 1996-11-27 2007-12-31 Genentech Inc Affinity purification of polypeptide on protein a matrix
CA2273194C (en) 1996-12-03 2011-02-01 Abgenix, Inc. Transgenic mammals having human ig loci including plural vh and vk regions and antibodies produced therefrom
GB9625175D0 (en) 1996-12-04 1997-01-22 Medi Cult As Serum-free cell culture media
FR2759585B1 (en) 1997-02-17 1999-06-11 Sanofi Sa PHARMACEUTICAL FORMULATIONS PRESENTED IN A DRY FORM FOR THE ORAL ADMINISTRATION OF A CYCLIC QUATERNARY AMMONIUM COMPOUND
US5804420A (en) 1997-04-18 1998-09-08 Bayer Corporation Preparation of recombinant Factor VIII in a protein free medium
EA002149B1 (en) 1997-04-28 2001-12-24 Эли Лилли Энд Компани Improved methods for processing activated protein c
US6235883B1 (en) 1997-05-05 2001-05-22 Abgenix, Inc. Human monoclonal antibodies to epidermal growth factor receptor
ES2190087T3 (en) 1997-06-13 2003-07-16 Genentech Inc STABILIZED FORMULATION OF AN ANTIBODY.
US6171586B1 (en) 1997-06-13 2001-01-09 Genentech, Inc. Antibody formulation
US6475725B1 (en) 1997-06-20 2002-11-05 Baxter Aktiengesellschaft Recombinant cell clones having increased stability and methods of making and using the same
ATE296315T1 (en) 1997-06-24 2005-06-15 Genentech Inc COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING GALACTOSYLATED GLYCOPROTEINS AND METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF
US20040191256A1 (en) 1997-06-24 2004-09-30 Genentech, Inc. Methods and compositions for galactosylated glycoproteins
US20020045207A1 (en) 1997-10-31 2002-04-18 Lynne A. Krummen Glycoprotein production process
EP1028751B1 (en) 1997-10-31 2008-12-31 Genentech, Inc. Methods and compositions comprising glycoprotein glycoforms
US20040136986A1 (en) 1997-10-31 2004-07-15 Genentech, Inc. Methods and compositions comprising glycoprotein glycoforms
ATE309350T1 (en) 1997-12-03 2005-11-15 Roche Diagnostics Gmbh METHOD FOR PRODUCING POLYPEPTIDES WITH SUITABLE GLYCOSYLATION
AU1663599A (en) 1997-12-19 1999-07-12 Novo Nordisk A/S Method for producing heterologous proteins in eukaryotic cells on an industrial scale using nucleotide-manipulating agents
US20030175884A1 (en) 2001-08-03 2003-09-18 Pablo Umana Antibody glycosylation variants having increased antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity
AU3657899A (en) 1998-04-20 1999-11-08 James E. Bailey Glycosylation engineering of antibodies for improving antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity
WO1999057246A1 (en) 1998-05-01 1999-11-11 Life Technologies, Inc. Animal cell culture media comprising non-animal or plant-derived nutrients
DK1308455T3 (en) 1998-05-06 2006-07-31 Genentech Inc Composition comprising anti-HER2 antibodies
DK1308456T3 (en) 1998-05-06 2007-12-27 Genentech Inc Antibody purification by ion exchange chromatography
DE19821933C1 (en) 1998-05-15 1999-11-11 Disetronic Licensing Ag Device for administering an injectable product
DE19822031C2 (en) 1998-05-15 2000-03-23 Disetronic Licensing Ag Auto injection device
US6528286B1 (en) 1998-05-29 2003-03-04 Genentech, Inc. Mammalian cell culture process for producing glycoproteins
US6406909B1 (en) 1998-07-10 2002-06-18 Chugai Seiyaku Kabushiki Kaisha Serum-free medium for culturing animal cells
US7883704B2 (en) 1999-03-25 2011-02-08 Abbott Gmbh & Co. Kg Methods for inhibiting the activity of the P40 subunit of human IL-12
US6914128B1 (en) 1999-03-25 2005-07-05 Abbott Gmbh & Co. Kg Human antibodies that bind human IL-12 and methods for producing
AU3633000A (en) 1999-03-26 2000-10-16 Human Genome Sciences, Inc. Neutrokine-alpha binding proteins and methods based thereon
ES2571230T3 (en) 1999-04-09 2016-05-24 Kyowa Hakko Kirin Co Ltd Procedure to control the activity of an immunofunctional molecule
US7297680B2 (en) 1999-04-15 2007-11-20 Crucell Holland B.V. Compositions of erythropoietin isoforms comprising Lewis-X structures and high sialic acid content
EP1171615B1 (en) 1999-04-26 2006-12-13 Genentech, Inc. Cell culture process for glycoproteins
AU4314900A (en) 1999-04-28 2000-11-17 Yamanouchi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Parenteral medicinal composition containing humanized monoclonal antibody fragment and method for stabilizing the same
AT409379B (en) 1999-06-02 2002-07-25 Baxter Ag MEDIUM FOR PROTEIN- AND SERUM-FREE CELL CULTURE
IL147861A (en) 1999-07-30 2005-08-31 Genentech Inc Charged filtration membranes and uses thereof
PT1650307E (en) 1999-09-27 2010-10-21 Genentech Inc Methods for making recombinant proteins using apoptosis inhibitors
JP2001120262A (en) 1999-10-26 2001-05-08 Welfide Corp Method for enhancing production of physiologically active substance
AR026743A1 (en) 1999-12-09 2003-02-26 Pharmacia Ab PRODUCTION OF PEPTIDES
KR20010056451A (en) 1999-12-15 2001-07-04 윤재승 Arginine-enriched medium used for mass-producing recombinant protein in animal cell culture
US20030124119A1 (en) 1999-12-28 2003-07-03 Tadao Yamazaki Stable antibody compositions and injection preparations
US20030211573A1 (en) 2000-02-08 2003-11-13 Thomas Ryll Galactosylation of recombinant glycoproteins
EP1257585A2 (en) 2000-02-10 2002-11-20 Basf Aktiengesellschaft Antibodies that bind human interleukin-18 and methods of making and using
GB0003231D0 (en) 2000-02-11 2000-04-05 Medi Cult As Cell culture media
JP2001218840A (en) 2000-02-14 2001-08-14 Kanegafuchi Chem Ind Co Ltd Adsorbent for transforming growth factor. beta, adsorbing/removing method, and adsorber
WO2001077362A1 (en) 2000-04-06 2001-10-18 Chugai Seiyaku Kabushiki Kaisha Immunoassay of anti-hm1.24 antibody
CA2405557C (en) 2000-04-12 2013-09-24 Human Genome Sciences, Inc. Albumin fusion proteins
US7598055B2 (en) 2000-06-28 2009-10-06 Glycofi, Inc. N-acetylglucosaminyltransferase III expression in lower eukaryotes
DK1522590T3 (en) 2000-06-28 2009-12-21 Glycofi Inc Process for Preparation of Modified Glycoproteins
US7449308B2 (en) 2000-06-28 2008-11-11 Glycofi, Inc. Combinatorial DNA library for producing modified N-glycans in lower eukaryotes
EP1298217A4 (en) 2000-07-05 2004-09-08 Mitsubishi Pharma Corp Process for producing glycoprotein
EP1336410A4 (en) 2000-08-04 2005-10-12 Chugai Pharmaceutical Co Ltd Protein injection preparations
UA81743C2 (en) 2000-08-07 2008-02-11 Центокор, Инк. HUMAN MONOCLONAL ANTIBODY WHICH SPECIFICALLY BINDS TUMOR NECROSIS FACTOR ALFA (TNFα), PHARMACEUTICAL MIXTURE CONTAINING THEREOF, AND METHOD FOR TREATING ARTHRITIS
US7288390B2 (en) 2000-08-07 2007-10-30 Centocor, Inc. Anti-dual integrin antibodies, compositions, methods and uses
US20050249735A1 (en) 2000-08-07 2005-11-10 Centocor, Inc. Methods of treating ankylosing spondylitis using anti-TNF antibodies and peptides of human tumor necrosis factor
US20060018907A1 (en) 2000-08-07 2006-01-26 Centocor, Inc. Anti-TNF antibodies and peptides of human tumor necrosis factor
AU2001294520A1 (en) 2000-08-21 2002-03-04 Clonex Development, Inc. Methods and compositions for increasing protein yield from a cell culture
WO2002029083A2 (en) 2000-10-02 2002-04-11 Novo Nordisk A/S Industrial-scale serum-free production of recombinant proteins in mammalian cells
US20090151023A1 (en) 2000-11-13 2009-06-11 Viktor Kuvshinov Transformation system for Camelina sativa
WO2002066603A2 (en) 2001-02-15 2002-08-29 Centocor, Inc. Chemically defined medium for cultured mammalian cells
AU2002256005A1 (en) 2001-03-27 2002-10-08 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Control of glycoforms in igg
US20030096414A1 (en) 2001-03-27 2003-05-22 Invitrogen Corporation Culture medium for cell growth and transfection
KR100583331B1 (en) 2001-05-11 2006-05-26 기린 비루 가부시키가이샤 Artificial Human Chromosome Containing Human Antibody λ Light Chain Gene
EP1401870A4 (en) 2001-05-24 2006-04-19 Human Genome Sciences Antibodies against tumor necrosis factor delta (april)
WO2002096461A1 (en) 2001-05-25 2002-12-05 Abbott Gmbh & Co. Kg Use of anti-tnf antibodies as drugs in treating septic disorders of anemic patients
CA2817619A1 (en) 2001-06-08 2002-12-08 Abbott Laboratories (Bermuda) Ltd. Methods of administering anti-tnf.alpha. antibodies
CA2447791A1 (en) 2001-06-13 2002-12-19 Neslihan Delacruz Methods of culturing animal cells and polypeptide production in animal cells
TR201809008T4 (en) 2001-06-26 2018-07-23 Amgen Fremont Inc Antibodies against opgl.
GB0119520D0 (en) 2001-08-10 2001-10-03 Owen Mumford Ltd Improvements relating to injection devices
EP1434857B1 (en) 2001-10-02 2007-08-01 Novo Nordisk Health Care AG Method for production of recombinant proteins in eukaryote cells
US7125843B2 (en) 2001-10-19 2006-10-24 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycoconjugates including more than one peptide
HUP0600342A3 (en) 2001-10-25 2011-03-28 Genentech Inc Glycoprotein compositions
AU2002340787B2 (en) 2001-11-12 2009-09-17 Monash University Peptide purification by means of metal ion affinity chromatography
IL161909A0 (en) 2001-11-28 2005-11-20 Sandoz Ag Method for producing a recombinant polypeptide
WO2003045995A2 (en) 2001-11-28 2003-06-05 Sandoz Gmbh Cell culture process
US7473680B2 (en) 2001-11-28 2009-01-06 Neose Technologies, Inc. Remodeling and glycoconjugation of peptides
WO2003046162A2 (en) 2001-11-28 2003-06-05 Polymun Scientific Immunbiologische Forschung Gmbh Process for the production of polypeptides in mammalian cell cultures
WO2003059935A2 (en) 2001-12-21 2003-07-24 Immunex Corporation Methods for purifying protein
AU2003210802B2 (en) 2002-02-05 2009-09-10 Genentech Inc. Protein purification
US20030161828A1 (en) 2002-02-19 2003-08-28 Abbott Gmbh & Co. Kg Use of TNF antagonists as drugs for the treatment of patients with an inflammatory reaction and without suffering from total organ failure
CA2417689C (en) 2002-03-05 2006-05-09 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Improved methods for growing mammalian cells in vitro
ES2557741T3 (en) 2002-03-27 2016-01-28 Immunex Corporation Procedures to increase polypeptide production
US20030190710A1 (en) 2002-03-28 2003-10-09 Devries Ruth L. Control of glycoforms in IgG
WO2003085118A1 (en) 2002-04-09 2003-10-16 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd. Process for producing antibody composition
US20040009172A1 (en) 2002-04-26 2004-01-15 Steven Fischkoff Use of anti-TNFalpha antibodies and another drug
KR100788093B1 (en) 2002-04-26 2007-12-21 제넨테크, 인크. Non-affinity Purification of Proteins
US20030206898A1 (en) 2002-04-26 2003-11-06 Steven Fischkoff Use of anti-TNFalpha antibodies and another drug
US20040029229A1 (en) 2002-05-20 2004-02-12 Reeves Philip J. High level protein expression system
PT1543106E (en) 2002-07-15 2007-05-31 Immunex Corp Methods and media for controlling sialylation of proteins produced by mammalian cells
EP2371859A3 (en) 2002-07-19 2011-12-28 Abbott Biotechnology Ltd Treatment of TNF alpha related disorders
US20090280065A1 (en) 2006-04-10 2009-11-12 Willian Mary K Uses and Compositions for Treatment of Psoriasis
US20040033228A1 (en) 2002-08-16 2004-02-19 Hans-Juergen Krause Formulation of human antibodies for treating TNF-alpha associated disorders
US6924124B1 (en) 2002-08-23 2005-08-02 Immunex Corporation Feeding strategies for cell culture
US7067279B1 (en) 2002-08-23 2006-06-27 Immunex Corporation Cell culture performance with betaine
US6974681B1 (en) 2002-08-23 2005-12-13 Immunex Corporation Cell culture performance with vanadate
WO2004026891A2 (en) 2002-09-18 2004-04-01 Genencor International, Inc. Protein purification
US6890736B1 (en) 2002-09-20 2005-05-10 Immunex Corporation Methods for producing proteins in cultured cells
MY150740A (en) 2002-10-24 2014-02-28 Abbvie Biotechnology Ltd Low dose methods for treating disorders in which tnf? activity is detrimental
DE60326012D1 (en) 2002-11-01 2009-03-12 Bayer Healthcare Llc Method for concentration of proteins
US20040086532A1 (en) 2002-11-05 2004-05-06 Allergan, Inc., Botulinum toxin formulations for oral administration
US20040101939A1 (en) 2002-11-22 2004-05-27 Santora Ling C. Method for reducing or preventing modification of a polypeptide in solution
US20040162414A1 (en) 2002-11-22 2004-08-19 Santora Ling C. Method for reducing or preventing modification of a polypeptide in solution
US20040191243A1 (en) 2002-12-13 2004-09-30 Bei Chen System and method for stabilizing antibodies with histidine
AU2003303394B2 (en) 2002-12-23 2009-02-19 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Product quality enhancement in mammalian cell culture processes for protein production
JP4541157B2 (en) 2002-12-23 2010-09-08 ブリストル−マイヤーズ スクイブ カンパニー Mammalian cell culture methods for producing proteins
AU2004215653B2 (en) 2003-02-28 2011-03-17 Lonza Biologics Plc. Antibody purification by protein A and ion exchange chromatography
JP2006525015A (en) 2003-05-01 2006-11-09 ディーエスエム アイピー アセッツ ビー.ブイ. Method for producing biological material by perfusion culture of suspended animal cells
ES2344789T5 (en) 2003-05-15 2017-06-14 Wyeth Llc Restricted glucose feeding for animal cell culture
GB2404665B (en) 2003-08-08 2005-07-06 Cambridge Antibody Tech Cell culture
ES2565077T3 (en) 2003-10-10 2016-03-31 Novo Nordisk Health Care Ag Method for large-scale production of a polypeptide in eukaryotic cells
FR2861080B1 (en) 2003-10-20 2006-02-17 Lab Francais Du Fractionnement ANTIBODIES HAVING AN OPTIMIZED FUCOSE AND GALACTOSE RATE
CA2542951C (en) 2003-10-24 2016-08-30 Abhinav A. Shukla Process for purifying proteins in a hydrophobic interaction chromatography flow-through fraction
US20050100965A1 (en) 2003-11-12 2005-05-12 Tariq Ghayur IL-18 binding proteins
DE10355251A1 (en) 2003-11-26 2005-06-23 Merck Patent Gmbh Water-based pharmaceutical preparation for treatment of tumors has active ingredient effective against receptor of endothelial growth factor receptor
US7622113B2 (en) 2003-12-08 2009-11-24 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Monoclonal antibodies that bind or neutralize dengue virus
HUE064610T2 (en) 2003-12-23 2024-04-28 Genentech Inc Novel anti-il 13 antibodies and uses thereof
WO2005063813A2 (en) 2003-12-23 2005-07-14 Applied Research Systems Ars Holding N.V. Process for the production of tumor necrosis factor-binding proteins
WO2005077130A2 (en) 2004-02-11 2005-08-25 Tanox, Inc. A method for the removal of aggregate proteins from recombinant samples using ion exchange chromatography
CN1953768B (en) 2004-02-12 2010-10-13 默克专利有限公司 Highly concentrated liquid formulations of anti-EGFR antibodies
NZ548126A (en) 2004-02-27 2009-10-30 Ge Healthcare Bio Sciences Ab A process for the purification of antibodies involving addition of a second resin
CN1234725C (en) 2004-04-07 2006-01-04 陈志南 High performance quick purifying method for preparing piecewise antibody
TWI556829B (en) 2004-04-09 2016-11-11 艾伯維生物技術有限責任公司 Multiple-variable dose regimen for treating tnfα-related disorders
CN104611245A (en) 2004-04-15 2015-05-13 格利科菲公司 Production of galactosylated glycoproteins in lower eukaryotes
US20060127950A1 (en) 2004-04-15 2006-06-15 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Methods and products related to the improved analysis of carbohydrates
US20060057638A1 (en) 2004-04-15 2006-03-16 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Methods and products related to the improved analysis of carbohydrates
RU2006138181A (en) 2004-05-04 2008-06-10 Ново Нордиск Хелс Кеа Аг (Ch) O-RELATED Glycoforms of Polypeptides and a Method for Their Production
WO2006014683A2 (en) 2004-07-21 2006-02-09 Glycofi, Inc. Immunoglobulins comprising predominantly a gal2glcnac2man3glcnac2 glycoform
US20060223147A1 (en) 2004-08-05 2006-10-05 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd., Process for producing glycoprotein composition
TWI384069B (en) 2004-08-27 2013-02-01 Pfizer Ireland Pharmaceuticals Production of polypeptides
WO2006039588A2 (en) 2004-09-30 2006-04-13 Bayer Healthcare Llc Devices and methods for integrated continuous manufacturing of biological molecules
US20060083741A1 (en) 2004-10-08 2006-04-20 Hoffman Rebecca S Treatment of respiratory syncytial virus (RSV) infection
US20060194301A1 (en) 2004-10-09 2006-08-31 Doctor Bhupendra P Large-scale production of human serum butyrylcholinesterase as a bioscavenger
KR101243425B1 (en) 2004-10-21 2013-03-13 지이 헬스케어 바이오-사이언시스 에이비 A method of antibody purification
US20060094104A1 (en) 2004-10-29 2006-05-04 Leopold Grillberger Animal protein-free media for cultivation of cells
JP2008529495A (en) 2005-02-04 2008-08-07 グラクソ グループ リミテッド Optimization of heterologous polypeptide expression
CN101155913B (en) 2005-02-11 2011-07-06 新加坡科技研究局 Methods of proliferating stem cells
EP1851305B1 (en) 2005-02-11 2012-01-18 Novo Nordisk Health Care AG Production of a polypeptide in a serum-free cell culture liquid containing plant protein hydrolysate
ES2797480T3 (en) 2005-03-11 2020-12-02 Wyeth Llc A weak partition chromatography procedure
WO2006107990A2 (en) 2005-04-05 2006-10-12 The Johns Hopkins University Improving protein n-glycosylation of eukaryotic cells using dolichol-linked oligosaccharide synthesis pathway, other n-gylosylation-increasing methods, and engineered hosts expressing products with increased n-glycosylation
NZ562949A (en) 2005-04-11 2009-05-31 Medarex Inc Protein purification using HCIC and ion exchange chromatography
US9963510B2 (en) 2005-04-15 2018-05-08 Macrogenics, Inc. Covalent diabodies and uses thereof
US20090203055A1 (en) 2005-04-18 2009-08-13 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Compositions and methods for RNA interference with sialidase expression and uses thereof
CA2606270A1 (en) 2005-04-19 2006-10-26 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Amphiphilic polymers and methods of use thereof
AU2006246721B2 (en) 2005-05-16 2012-12-13 Abbvie Biotechnology Ltd Use of TNF inhibitor for treatment of erosive polyarthritis
AU2006254217A1 (en) 2005-06-03 2006-12-07 Biovitrum Ab (Publ) Process for cultivating animal cells comprising the feeding of plant-derived peptones
EP1888638A2 (en) 2005-06-03 2008-02-20 Genentech, Inc. Method of producing antibodies with modified fucosylation level
DK1896071T3 (en) 2005-06-30 2015-05-26 Janssen Biotech Inc Methods and compositions with increased therapeutic activity
SG10201508995QA (en) 2005-07-26 2015-11-27 Sangamo Biosciences Inc Targeted integration and expression of exogenous nucleic acid sequences
US7612181B2 (en) 2005-08-19 2009-11-03 Abbott Laboratories Dual variable domain immunoglobulin and uses thereof
US20070041905A1 (en) 2005-08-19 2007-02-22 Hoffman Rebecca S Method of treating depression using a TNF-alpha antibody
US20070041979A1 (en) 2005-08-19 2007-02-22 Raju T S Proteolysis resistant antibody preparations
HUE038947T2 (en) 2005-08-26 2018-12-28 Ares Trading Sa Process for the preparation of glycosylated interferon beta
EP1942935A4 (en) 2005-09-02 2009-12-23 Glycofi Inc Immunoglobulins comprising predominantly a glcnacman3glcnac2 glycoform
AR058140A1 (en) 2005-10-24 2008-01-23 Wyeth Corp PROTEIN PRODUCTION METHOD USING ANTI-SENESCENCE COMPOUNDS
US7919264B2 (en) 2005-11-01 2011-04-05 Abbott Biotechnology Ltd. Methods and compositions for determining the efficacy of a treatment for ankylosing spondylitis using biomarkers
WO2007055916A2 (en) 2005-11-07 2007-05-18 The Rockefeller University Reagents, methods and systems for selecting a cytotoxic antibody or variant thereof
US8470318B2 (en) 2005-11-07 2013-06-25 The Rockefeller University Polypeptides with enhanced anti-inflammatory and decreased cytotoxic properties and relating methods
US20080206246A1 (en) 2006-04-05 2008-08-28 Ravetch Jeffrey V Polypeptides with enhanced anti-inflammatory and decreased cytotoxic properties and relating methods
EP2495308A1 (en) 2005-12-08 2012-09-05 Amgen Inc. Improved production of glycoproteins using manganese
KR101423344B1 (en) 2006-01-04 2014-07-30 백스터 인터내셔널 인코포레이티드 A Method Of Expressing A Protein Using Oligopeptide-Free Cell Culture Media
US20070190057A1 (en) 2006-01-23 2007-08-16 Jian Wu Methods for modulating mannose content of recombinant proteins
US20070202051A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2007-08-30 Pari Gmbh Aerosols for sinunasal drug delivery
KR20150006085A (en) 2006-04-05 2015-01-15 애브비 바이오테크놀로지 리미티드 Antibody purification
EP3456351A1 (en) 2006-04-05 2019-03-20 The Rockefeller University Polypeptides with enhanced anti-inflammatory and decreased cytotoxic properties and relating methods
US20080118496A1 (en) 2006-04-10 2008-05-22 Medich John R Uses and compositions for treatment of juvenile rheumatoid arthritis
US20090317399A1 (en) 2006-04-10 2009-12-24 Pollack Paul F Uses and compositions for treatment of CROHN'S disease
US9624295B2 (en) 2006-04-10 2017-04-18 Abbvie Biotechnology Ltd. Uses and compositions for treatment of psoriatic arthritis
US9399061B2 (en) 2006-04-10 2016-07-26 Abbvie Biotechnology Ltd Methods for determining efficacy of TNF-α inhibitors for treatment of rheumatoid arthritis
US9605064B2 (en) 2006-04-10 2017-03-28 Abbvie Biotechnology Ltd Methods and compositions for treatment of skin disorders
WO2007120626A2 (en) 2006-04-10 2007-10-25 Abbott Biotechnology Ltd. Uses and compositions for treatment of ankylosing spondylitis
US7846724B2 (en) 2006-04-11 2010-12-07 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Method for selecting CHO cell for production of glycosylated antibodies
US20080131374A1 (en) 2006-04-19 2008-06-05 Medich John R Uses and compositions for treatment of rheumatoid arthritis
JP5406710B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2014-02-05 グライコフィ, インコーポレイテッド Erythropoietin composition
US20080311043A1 (en) 2006-06-08 2008-12-18 Hoffman Rebecca S Uses and compositions for treatment of psoriatic arthritis
US20100021451A1 (en) 2006-06-08 2010-01-28 Wong Robert L Uses and compositions for treatment of ankylosing spondylitis
JP2010510963A (en) 2006-06-14 2010-04-08 グラクソスミスクライン・リミテッド・ライアビリティ・カンパニー Antibody purification method using ceramic hydroxyapatite
CN101484199B (en) 2006-06-30 2014-06-25 艾伯维生物技术有限公司 Automatic injection device
ES2668212T3 (en) 2006-07-13 2018-05-17 Wyeth Llc Production of coagulation factor IX with improved glycosylation pattern
WO2008028974A1 (en) 2006-09-08 2008-03-13 Novo Nordisk A/S Methods of optimizing chromatographic separation of polypeptides
KR101603632B1 (en) 2006-09-10 2016-03-16 글리코토페 게엠베하 Use of human cells of myeloid leukaemia origin for expression of antibodies
EP2500414A1 (en) 2006-09-13 2012-09-19 Abbott Laboratories Cell culture improvements
SG10201510384UA (en) 2006-09-13 2016-01-28 Abbvie Inc Cell culture improvements
US8911964B2 (en) 2006-09-13 2014-12-16 Abbvie Inc. Fed-batch method of making human anti-TNF-alpha antibody
WO2008036600A2 (en) 2006-09-18 2008-03-27 Genentech, Inc. Methods of protein production
WO2008045373A2 (en) 2006-10-06 2008-04-17 Amgen Inc. Stable antibody formulations
AU2007317755A1 (en) 2006-10-27 2008-05-15 The Rockefeller University Polypeptides with enhanced anti-inflammatory and decreased cytotoxic properties and relating methods
BRPI0717335A2 (en) 2006-10-27 2013-12-10 Abbott Biotech Ltd CRYSTALINE ANTI-HTNFALFA ANTIBODIES
CA2666317C (en) 2006-11-03 2013-08-06 Wyeth Glycolysis-inhibiting substances in cell culture
JP5065391B2 (en) 2006-12-06 2012-10-31 日本ケミカルリサーチ株式会社 Method for producing human erythropoietin
US20100015627A1 (en) 2006-12-22 2010-01-21 Vincent Beuger Selection method
US20080226635A1 (en) 2006-12-22 2008-09-18 Hans Koll Antibodies against insulin-like growth factor I receptor and uses thereof
US8540992B2 (en) 2006-12-28 2013-09-24 Michael Naso Methods and vectors for generating asialylated immunoglobulins
US7691980B2 (en) 2007-01-09 2010-04-06 Bio-Rad Laboratories, Inc. Enhanced capacity and purification of antibodies by mixed mode chromatography in the presence of aqueous-soluble nonionic organic polymers
EP2114984A2 (en) 2007-01-17 2009-11-11 Merck Serono S.A. Process for the purification of fc-containing proteins
RU2009132986A (en) 2007-03-02 2011-04-10 Уайт (Us) APPLICATION OF COPPER AND GLUTAMATE IN CULTURE OF CELLS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF POLYPEPTIDES
WO2008120570A1 (en) 2007-03-19 2008-10-09 National University Corporation Okayama University Culture medium for production of protein or proliferation of virus
KR20100014674A (en) 2007-03-29 2010-02-10 아보트 러보러터리즈 Crystalline anti-human il-12 antibodies
US20110130544A1 (en) 2007-03-30 2011-06-02 Medimmune, Llc Antibodies with decreased deamidation profiles
SG177941A1 (en) 2007-04-03 2012-02-28 Oxyrane Uk Ltd Glycosylation of molecules
US20120264927A1 (en) 2007-04-16 2012-10-18 Ian Christopher Parsons Methods for labeling glycans
EP2135090A1 (en) 2007-04-16 2009-12-23 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Proteolytic release of glycans
JP2010524467A (en) 2007-04-16 2010-07-22 モメンタ ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Defined glycoprotein products and related methods
WO2008128222A1 (en) 2007-04-16 2008-10-23 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Analysis of phosphorylated glycans, glycopeptides or glycoproteins by imac
PT2135091E (en) 2007-04-16 2011-09-01 Momenta Pharmaceuticals Inc Ms methods to evaluate glycans
WO2008128230A1 (en) 2007-04-16 2008-10-23 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Reference glycoprotein products and related methods
WO2008128219A1 (en) 2007-04-16 2008-10-23 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Comparative analysis of protein conformations by using 2d noesy nmr spectra
WO2008128228A1 (en) 2007-04-16 2008-10-23 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods related to cell surface glycosylation
ES2626080T3 (en) 2007-04-16 2017-07-21 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Characterization of N-glycans using exoglycosidases
US8304250B2 (en) 2007-04-16 2012-11-06 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Multi-dimensional chromatographic methods for separating N-glycans
US20110213137A1 (en) 2007-04-16 2011-09-01 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Isotopically-labeled glycans
AU2008240071A1 (en) 2007-04-16 2008-10-23 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Characterization of N-glycan mixtures by nuclear magnetic resonance
TW200902708A (en) 2007-04-23 2009-01-16 Wyeth Corp Methods of protein production using anti-senescence compounds
EP1988101A1 (en) 2007-05-04 2008-11-05 Novo Nordisk A/S Improvement of factor VIII polypeptide titers in cell cultures
WO2008135498A2 (en) 2007-05-04 2008-11-13 Novo Nordisk A/S Prevention of protein degradation in mammalian cell cultures
EP2152856B1 (en) 2007-05-11 2012-08-29 Amgen Inc. Improved feed media
EP2679996A1 (en) 2007-05-31 2014-01-01 AbbVie Inc. Biomarkers predictive of the responsiveness to TNF-alfa inhibitors in autoimmune disorders
EP2152318A4 (en) 2007-06-01 2011-12-07 Abbott Biotech Ltd Uses and compositions for treatment of psoriasis and crohn's disease
WO2008154543A2 (en) 2007-06-11 2008-12-18 Abbott Biotechnology Ltd. Methods for treating juvenile idiopathic arthritis
US20100221823A1 (en) 2007-06-11 2010-09-02 Amgen Inc. Method for culturing mammalian cells to improve recombinant protein production
US20090053786A1 (en) 2007-07-09 2009-02-26 Yung-Hsiang Kao Prevention of disulfide bond reduction during recombinant production of polypeptides
WO2009011782A2 (en) 2007-07-13 2009-01-22 Abbott Biotechnology Ltd. METHODS AND COMPOSITIONS FOR PULMONARY ADMINISTRATION OF A TNFa INHIBITOR
KR100897159B1 (en) 2007-07-26 2009-05-14 보령제약 주식회사 A plant recombinant human CTLA4Ig and a method for producing the same
CA2697163A1 (en) 2007-08-08 2009-02-12 Abbott Laboratories Compositions and methods for crystallizing antibodies
US20090042253A1 (en) 2007-08-09 2009-02-12 Wyeth Use of perfusion to enhance production of fed-batch cell culture in bioreactors
WO2009032128A1 (en) 2007-08-28 2009-03-12 Abbott Biotechnology Ltd. Compositions and methods comprising binding proteins for adalimumab
EP2031064A1 (en) 2007-08-29 2009-03-04 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma GmbH & Co. KG Method for increasing protein titres
RU2010112236A (en) 2007-08-31 2011-10-10 Ф.Хоффманн-Ля Рош Аг (Ch) Glycosylation Profile Analysis
WO2009049284A2 (en) 2007-10-12 2009-04-16 Sigma-Aldrich Co. Compositions and methods for improved glycoprotein sialylation
EP2050764A1 (en) 2007-10-15 2009-04-22 sanofi-aventis Novel polyvalent bispecific antibody format and uses thereof
US9329169B2 (en) 2007-10-29 2016-05-03 University Of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc Vivo isotopic labeling method for quantitative glycomics
WO2009058769A1 (en) 2007-10-30 2009-05-07 Schering Corporation Purification of antibodies containing hydrophobic variants
CN101969971A (en) 2007-11-30 2011-02-09 雅培制药有限公司 Protein formulations and methods of making same
US8883146B2 (en) 2007-11-30 2014-11-11 Abbvie Inc. Protein formulations and methods of making same
US20130195888A1 (en) 2007-11-30 2013-08-01 Abbvie Ultrafiltration and diafiltration formulation methods for protein processing
PT2235197T (en) 2007-12-27 2017-10-11 Baxalta Inc Cell culture processes
US8399627B2 (en) 2007-12-31 2013-03-19 Bayer Pharma AG Antibodies to TNFα
CA2710333A1 (en) 2008-01-03 2009-07-09 Abbott Biotechnology Ltd. Predicting long-term efficacy of a compound in the treatment of psoriasis
CN107119095B (en) 2008-01-03 2022-07-05 康乃尔研究基金会有限公司 Glycosylated protein expression in prokaryotes
NZ601913A (en) 2008-01-15 2014-02-28 Abbott Gmbh & Co Kg Powdered protein compositions and methods of making same
JP5635912B2 (en) 2008-01-15 2014-12-03 アッヴィ・インコーポレイテッド Improved mammalian expression vectors and uses thereof
TWI472339B (en) 2008-01-30 2015-02-11 Genentech Inc Composition comprising antibody that binds to domain ii of her2 and acidic variants thereof
JP2011511777A (en) 2008-01-30 2011-04-14 アボット・ラボラトリーズ Compositions and methods for crystallizing antibody fragments
NZ587511A (en) 2008-02-29 2012-08-31 Biogen Idec Inc Purified lymphotoxin-beta-receptor immunoglobulin fusion proteins and methods of their purification
JP2011512875A (en) 2008-03-11 2011-04-28 ジェネンテック, インコーポレイテッド Antibody with enhanced ADCC function
JP2011517672A (en) 2008-03-24 2011-06-16 アボツト・バイオテクノロジー・リミテツド Methods and compositions for treating bone loss
AU2009233906A1 (en) 2008-04-08 2009-10-15 Amyris, Inc. Expression of heterologous sequences
CA2723197C (en) 2008-05-02 2017-09-19 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Methods and compositions for making antibodies and antibody derivatives with reduced core fucosylation
WO2009135656A1 (en) 2008-05-06 2009-11-12 Lonza Biologics Plc. A method for the purification of antibodies using displacement chromatography
EP2297209A4 (en) 2008-06-03 2012-08-01 Abbott Lab Dual variable domain immunoglobulins and uses thereof
US8318416B2 (en) 2008-08-08 2012-11-27 Biogen Idec Ma Inc. Nutrient monitoring and feedback control for increased bioproduct production
DK2848625T3 (en) 2008-08-14 2019-10-07 Genentech Inc Methods of removing a contaminant using ion exchange membrane chromatography with displacement of naturally occurring proteins
US20100069617A1 (en) 2008-09-12 2010-03-18 Ge Healthcare Bio-Sciences Ab Enhanced protein aggregate removal by mixed mode chromatography on hydrophobic interaction media in the presence of protein-excluded zwitterions
JP2012503656A (en) 2008-09-26 2012-02-09 エウレカ セラピューティクス,インコーポレイテッド Cell lines and proteins with mutant glycosylation patterns
WO2010043703A1 (en) 2008-10-17 2010-04-22 Dsm Ip Assets B.V. Removal of host cell proteins
MX2011004200A (en) 2008-10-20 2011-05-24 Abbott Lab Isolation and purification of antibodies using protein a affinity chromatography.
CN102257007A (en) 2008-10-20 2011-11-23 雅培制药有限公司 Antibodies that bind to il-18 and methods of purifying the same
WO2010048192A2 (en) 2008-10-20 2010-04-29 Abbott Laboratories Viral inactivation during purification of antibodies
GB0821100D0 (en) 2008-11-18 2008-12-24 Hansa Medical Ab Antibodies
US9103821B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2015-08-11 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods related to modified glycans
WO2010071817A2 (en) 2008-12-19 2010-06-24 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Characterization of o-linked glycans
US8614297B2 (en) 2008-12-22 2013-12-24 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Anti-idiotype antibody against an antibody against the amyloid β peptide
CN102272144B (en) 2009-01-08 2014-09-17 通用电气健康护理生物科学股份公司 Separation process using single polymer phase system
CN102292640B (en) 2009-01-22 2014-07-02 动量制药公司 Galactose-Alpha-1, 3-galactose-containing N-glycans in glycoprotein products derived from CHO cells
US20100292443A1 (en) 2009-02-26 2010-11-18 Sabbadini Roger A Humanized platelet activating factor antibody design using anti-lipid antibody templates
CA2752393C (en) 2009-03-05 2020-01-14 Biogen Idec Ma Inc. Purification of immunoglobulins
EP2233499A1 (en) 2009-03-26 2010-09-29 CSL Behring AG Antibody composition with altered Fab sialylation
SI2420572T1 (en) 2009-04-01 2015-10-30 Evec Incorporated Monoclonal antibody capable of binding to specific discontinuous epitope occurring in ad1 region of human cytomegalovirus gb glycoprotein, and antigen-binding fragment thereof
AU2010240569A1 (en) 2009-04-20 2011-10-20 Pfizer Inc. Control of protein glycosylation and compositions and methods relating thereto
CN102458517B (en) 2009-04-29 2014-07-23 阿布维生物技术有限公司 Automatic injection device
US20120282654A1 (en) 2009-04-29 2012-11-08 Schering Corporation Antibody purification
US20100278822A1 (en) 2009-05-04 2010-11-04 Abbott Biotechnology, Ltd. Stable high protein concentration formulations of human anti-tnf-alpha-antibodies
WO2010138502A2 (en) 2009-05-26 2010-12-02 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Production of glycoproteins
US8969043B2 (en) 2009-05-28 2015-03-03 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Method for a rational cell culturing process
WO2010136209A1 (en) 2009-05-28 2010-12-02 ETH Zürich N-glycan core beta-galactosyltransferase and uses thereof
CA2763164A1 (en) 2009-06-05 2010-12-09 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of modulating fucosylation of glycoproteins
EP2451936B1 (en) 2009-07-06 2019-08-28 F.Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Method of culturing eukaryotic cells
AU2010275774B2 (en) 2009-07-24 2016-03-31 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Optimizing the production of antibodies
US8945895B2 (en) 2009-07-31 2015-02-03 Baxter International Inc. Methods of purifying recombinant ADAMTS13 and other proteins and compositions thereof
WO2011015926A1 (en) 2009-08-03 2011-02-10 Avesthagen Limited A process of fermentation, purification and production of recombinant soluble tumour necrosis factor alfa receptor (tnfr) - human igg fc fusion protein
US20110039300A1 (en) 2009-08-10 2011-02-17 Robert Bayer Antibodies with enhanced adcc functions
LT2464725T (en) 2009-08-11 2020-06-10 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Production of proteins in glutamine-free cell culture media
WO2011019622A1 (en) 2009-08-14 2011-02-17 Genentech, Inc. Cell culture methods to make antibodies with enhanced adcc function
WO2011024025A1 (en) 2009-08-28 2011-03-03 Avesthagen Limited An erythropoietin analogue and a method thereof
US9540426B2 (en) 2009-10-06 2017-01-10 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Mammalian cell culture processes for protein production
US8470552B2 (en) 2009-10-12 2013-06-25 Keck Graduate Institute Strategy to reduce lactic acid production and control PH in animal cell culture
EP2325296A1 (en) 2009-11-20 2011-05-25 LEK Pharmaceuticals d.d. Production of glycoproteins with low N-glycolylneuraminic acid (Neu5Gc) content
US9096879B2 (en) 2009-11-24 2015-08-04 Biogen Ma Inc. Method of supplementing culture media to prevent undesirable amino acid substitutions
US10087236B2 (en) 2009-12-02 2018-10-02 Academia Sinica Methods for modifying human antibodies by glycan engineering
WO2011069056A2 (en) 2009-12-04 2011-06-09 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antennary fucosylation in glycoproteins from cho cells
EP4328305A3 (en) * 2009-12-18 2024-08-14 CSL Ltd. Method of purifying polypeptides
WO2011090719A2 (en) 2009-12-29 2011-07-28 Dr. Reddy's Laboratories Ltd. Protein purification by ion exchange
CN102959088A (en) 2010-02-02 2013-03-06 艾博特生物技术有限公司 Methods and compositions for predicting responsiveness to treatment with TNF-a inhibitor
US20120309056A1 (en) 2010-02-04 2012-12-06 Leon Arnaud Fed-batch process using concentrated cell culture medium for the efficient production of biologics in eb66 cells
US20130131318A1 (en) 2010-02-12 2013-05-23 Diderik Reinder Kremer Single unit antibody purification
CN102791726B (en) 2010-03-10 2016-02-03 弗·哈夫曼-拉罗切有限公司 The method of purifying immunoglobulin solution
EP4108668A1 (en) 2010-03-12 2022-12-28 PureCircle USA Inc. High-purity steviol glycosides
MX2012011648A (en) 2010-04-07 2012-11-29 Momenta Pharmaceuticals Inc High mannose glycans.
ES2617777T5 (en) * 2010-04-23 2022-10-13 Hoffmann La Roche Production of heteromultimeric proteins
US20110262965A1 (en) 2010-04-23 2011-10-27 Life Technologies Corporation Cell culture medium comprising small peptides
PL2563904T3 (en) 2010-04-26 2015-06-30 Novartis Ag Improved cell culture medium
CN107254499B (en) 2010-04-26 2021-09-17 诺华股份有限公司 Improved cell culture process
EP2576580B1 (en) 2010-05-28 2016-09-14 F.Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Decreasing lactate level and increasing polypeptide production by downregulating the expression of lactate dehydrogenase and pyruvate dehydrogenase kinase
MX2012014080A (en) 2010-06-03 2013-05-01 Abbvie Biotechnology Ltd Uses and compositions for treatment of hidradenitis suppurativa (hs).
CA2808116C (en) 2010-07-30 2016-06-07 Pfizer Inc. Tandem purification of proteins
EP2601287B1 (en) 2010-08-05 2015-01-07 Amgen Inc. Dipeptides to enhance yield and viability from cell cultures
DE102010038990A1 (en) 2010-08-06 2012-02-09 Robert Bosch Gmbh Shaft bearing device for a hand tool
WO2012030512A1 (en) 2010-09-03 2012-03-08 Percivia Llc. Flow-through protein purification process
EP2616814A1 (en) 2010-09-17 2013-07-24 AbbVie Inc. Raman spectroscopy for bioprocess operations
KR20130114143A (en) 2010-09-20 2013-10-16 애브비 인코포레이티드 Purification of antibodies using simulated moving bed chromatography
US20120258496A1 (en) 2010-09-27 2012-10-11 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Production of low fucose antibodies in h4-ii-e rat cells
AU2011311189B2 (en) 2010-10-08 2015-10-08 Cadila Healthcare Limited Expression vector for high level expression of recombinant proteins
US20120264920A1 (en) 2010-10-11 2012-10-18 Abbott Laboratories Processes for purification of proteins
JP5918697B2 (en) 2010-10-15 2016-05-18 Jcrファーマ株式会社 Method for producing a glycoprotein in which the non-reducing end of the sugar chain is a mannose residue
EP2450375A1 (en) 2010-11-09 2012-05-09 Sandoz Gmbh Cell culture medium and process for protein expression, said medium and process comprising a PAM inhibitor
CN105854016A (en) 2010-11-11 2016-08-17 艾伯维生物技术有限公司 Improved high concentration anti-TNF[alpha] antibody liquid formulations
US20130331554A1 (en) 2010-11-15 2013-12-12 Biogen Idec Inc. Enrichment and concentration of select product isoforms by overloaded bind and elute chromatography
US20120149878A1 (en) 2010-12-08 2012-06-14 Gillespie Ronald Protein purification
AU2011350456B2 (en) 2010-12-28 2016-05-26 Chugai Seiyaku Kabushiki Kaisha Animal cell culturing method
TW201242976A (en) 2011-01-07 2012-11-01 Abbott Lab Anti-IL-12/IL-23 antibodies and uses thereof
TW201309330A (en) 2011-01-28 2013-03-01 Abbott Lab Compositions containing glycosylated antibodies and uses thereof
AR085302A1 (en) 2011-02-24 2013-09-18 Sanofi Sa METHOD OF PRODUCTION OF STIRATED ANTIBODIES
US9574003B2 (en) 2011-03-06 2017-02-21 Merck Serono S.A. Low fucose cell lines and uses thereof
US20120230913A1 (en) 2011-03-10 2012-09-13 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Protein nanoparticle dispersions
US20120238730A1 (en) 2011-03-15 2012-09-20 Abbott Laboratories Integrated approach to the isolation and purification of antibodies
TWI838039B (en) 2011-03-28 2024-04-01 法商賽諾菲公司 Dual variable region antibody-like binding proteins having cross-over binding region orientation
EP2511293A1 (en) 2011-04-13 2012-10-17 LEK Pharmaceuticals d.d. A method for controlling the main complex N-glycan structures and the acidic variants and variability in bioprocesses producing recombinant proteins
US9133493B2 (en) 2011-04-21 2015-09-15 Amgen Inc. Method for culturing mammalian cells to improve recombinant protein production
US9062106B2 (en) 2011-04-27 2015-06-23 Abbvie Inc. Methods for controlling the galactosylation profile of recombinantly-expressed proteins
EP2702143B1 (en) 2011-04-29 2018-06-06 Biocon Research Limited Methods for reducing accumulation of lactate during culturing and method for producing polypeptide
WO2012149393A2 (en) 2011-04-29 2012-11-01 Selecta Biosciences, Inc. Tolerogenic synthetic nanocarriers for antigen-specific deletion of t effector cells
ES2560470T3 (en) 2011-04-29 2016-02-19 Biocon Research Limited A method to reduce the heterogeneity of antibodies and a production process of said antibodies
US20140108084A1 (en) 2012-10-12 2014-04-17 Crestron Electronics, Inc. Initiating Schedule Management Via Radio Frequency Beacons
WO2012158551A1 (en) 2011-05-13 2012-11-22 Biogen Idec Ma Inc. Methods of preventing and removing trisulfide bonds
LT2837680T (en) 2011-07-01 2020-07-10 Amgen Inc. Mammalian cell culture
WO2013006461A1 (en) 2011-07-01 2013-01-10 Biogen Idec Ma Inc. Cholesterol-based media supplementals for cell culture
US10323081B2 (en) 2011-07-06 2019-06-18 Genmag A/S Modulation of complement-dependent cytotoxicity through modifications of the C-terminus of antibody heavy chains
US9475858B2 (en) 2011-07-08 2016-10-25 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Cell culture process
GB201112429D0 (en) 2011-07-19 2011-08-31 Glaxo Group Ltd Antigen-binding proteins with increased FcRn binding
WO2013013013A2 (en) 2011-07-21 2013-01-24 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for producing modified glycoproteins
EP2741769B1 (en) 2011-08-10 2019-01-02 Laboratoire Français du Fractionnement et des Biotechnologies Highly galactosylated antibodies
WO2013095738A2 (en) 2011-09-27 2013-06-27 Mapp Biopharmaceutical, Inc. Monoclonal antibodies with altered affinities for human fcyri, fcyrllla, and c1q proteins
WO2013066707A1 (en) 2011-10-31 2013-05-10 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Chromatography process for resolving heterogeneous antibody aggregates
BR112014010406A2 (en) 2011-11-02 2017-04-25 Genentech Inc overload and elute chromatography
BR112014014549A2 (en) 2011-12-19 2020-09-24 The Rockefeller University non-sialylated popipeptide anti-inflammatory
EP3912639A1 (en) 2012-03-07 2021-11-24 Cadila Healthcare Limited Pharmaceutical formulations of tnf-alpha antibodies
SG10201701224UA (en) 2012-03-12 2017-04-27 Merck Patent Gmbh Removal of protein aggregates from biopharmaceutical preparations in a flowthrough mode
WO2013158275A1 (en) 2012-04-20 2013-10-24 Abbvie Inc. Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species
WO2013158273A1 (en) 2012-04-20 2013-10-24 Abbvie Inc. Methods to modulate c-terminal lysine variant distribution
US9067990B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2015-06-30 Abbvie, Inc. Protein purification using displacement chromatography
WO2013158279A1 (en) 2012-04-20 2013-10-24 Abbvie Inc. Protein purification methods to reduce acidic species
US20130281355A1 (en) 2012-04-24 2013-10-24 Genentech, Inc. Cell culture compositions and methods for polypeptide production
TW201348246A (en) 2012-05-21 2013-12-01 Abbvie Inc Novel purification of human, humanized, or chimeric antibodies using protein a affinity chromatography
US20140154270A1 (en) 2012-05-21 2014-06-05 Chen Wang Purification of non-human antibodies using kosmotropic salt enhanced protein a affinity chromatography
US9249182B2 (en) 2012-05-24 2016-02-02 Abbvie, Inc. Purification of antibodies using hydrophobic interaction chromatography
EP2855745A4 (en) 2012-06-01 2016-01-20 Momenta Pharmaceuticals Inc Methods related to adalimumab
EP2863951A1 (en) 2012-06-12 2015-04-29 Boehringer Ingelheim International GmbH Pharmaceutical formulation for a therapeutic antibody
WO2014018747A2 (en) 2012-07-26 2014-01-30 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glycoproteins with anti-inflammatory properties
EP2885639B1 (en) 2012-08-17 2019-04-10 MorphoSys AG Complex-specific antibodies and antibody fragments and their use
US9512214B2 (en) 2012-09-02 2016-12-06 Abbvie, Inc. Methods to control protein heterogeneity
BR112015004467A2 (en) 2012-09-02 2017-03-21 Abbvie Inc method for controlling protein heterogeneity
EA201791717A1 (en) 2012-09-07 2018-03-30 Кохерус Байосайенсис, Инк. STABLE WATER COMPOSITIONS ADALIMUMAB
US20150252108A1 (en) 2012-09-26 2015-09-10 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glycoprotein preparations
CA2894225A1 (en) 2012-12-17 2014-06-26 Laboratoire Francais Du Fractionnement Et Des Biotechnologies Use of monoclonal antibodies for the treatment of inflammation and bacterial infections
US9844594B2 (en) 2012-12-18 2017-12-19 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Liquid formulations for an anti-TNF α antibody
EP3594231A1 (en) 2013-02-13 2020-01-15 Laboratoire Français du Fractionnement et des Biotechnologies Highly galactosylated anti-tnf-alpha antibodies and uses thereof
AU2014225272B2 (en) 2013-03-08 2015-10-22 Neuclone Biologics Pty Ltd A cell expression system
US20140271633A1 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-09-18 Abbvie Inc. Mammalian cell culture performance through surfactant supplementation of feed media
US9677105B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-06-13 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of cell culture
US9017687B1 (en) 2013-10-18 2015-04-28 Abbvie, Inc. Low acidic species compositions and methods for producing and using the same using displacement chromatography
WO2014158231A1 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-10-02 Abbvie Inc. Low acidic species compositions and methods for producing and using the same
US9217168B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2015-12-22 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of cell culture
US20140271622A1 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-09-18 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of cell culture
WO2014151878A2 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-09-25 Abbvie Inc. Methods for modulating protein glycosylation profiles of recombinant protein therapeutics using monosaccharides and oligosacharides
US8956830B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2015-02-17 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of cell culture
WO2014159579A1 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-10-02 Abbvie Inc. MUTATED ANTI-TNFα ANTIBODIES AND METHODS OF THEIR USE
EP3754012A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-12-23 Alder Biopharmaceuticals, Inc. Antibody purification and purity monitoring
SI2970980T1 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-11-30 Janssen Biotech, Inc. Manufacturing methods to control c-terminal lysine, galactose and sialic acid content in recombinant proteins
WO2014179601A2 (en) 2013-05-02 2014-11-06 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Sialylated glycoproteins
KR101569783B1 (en) 2013-06-05 2015-11-19 한화케미칼 주식회사 A Method of Antibody Purification
TWI596107B (en) 2013-06-25 2017-08-21 卡地拉保健有限公司 Novel purification process for monoclonal antibodies
IN2013MU02285A (en) 2013-07-06 2015-06-19 Cadila Healthcare Ltd
SI3021833T2 (en) 2013-07-19 2022-08-31 Hexal Aktiengesellschaft Methods and formulations which allow the modulation of immune responses related to the administration of a biopharmaceutical drug
WO2015017305A1 (en) 2013-07-31 2015-02-05 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp Inhibitors of the renal outer medullary potassium channel
PL3036320T5 (en) 2013-08-19 2024-06-10 Biogen Ma Inc. Control of protein glycosylation by culture medium supplementation and cell culture process parameters
US10196601B2 (en) 2013-08-20 2019-02-05 Lek Pharmaceuticals D.D. Cell culture medium and process for controlling α-amidation and/or C-terminal amino acid cleavage of polypeptides
WO2015051293A2 (en) 2013-10-04 2015-04-09 Abbvie, Inc. Use of metal ions for modulation of protein glycosylation profiles of recombinant proteins
US9085618B2 (en) 2013-10-18 2015-07-21 Abbvie, Inc. Low acidic species compositions and methods for producing and using the same
US8946395B1 (en) 2013-10-18 2015-02-03 Abbvie Inc. Purification of proteins using hydrophobic interaction chromatography
US9181337B2 (en) 2013-10-18 2015-11-10 Abbvie, Inc. Modulated lysine variant species compositions and methods for producing and using the same
US20150139988A1 (en) 2013-11-15 2015-05-21 Abbvie, Inc. Glycoengineered binding protein compositions
RU2642285C1 (en) 2014-01-29 2018-01-24 ЭлДжи КЕМ, ЛТД. Method for production of target antibody with modulated galactosylation (versions) and method for modulation of target antibody galactosylation (versions) by culture medium optimisation
WO2016007764A1 (en) 2014-07-09 2016-01-14 Abbvie Inc. Methods for modulating the glycosylation profile of recombinant proteins using non-commonly used sugars
US20160039924A1 (en) 2014-08-05 2016-02-11 Abbvie Inc. Methods for modulating the glycosylation profile of recombinant proteins using dissolved oxygen
EP3237432B1 (en) 2014-12-22 2023-09-06 UCB Biopharma SRL Protein manufacture
CN105777895A (en) 2015-03-19 2016-07-20 广东东阳光药业有限公司 Application of sodium phenylbutyrate in purification of antibody acidic peak
CN105777896B (en) 2015-03-19 2019-08-16 广东东阳光药业有限公司 A kind of purification process at antibody acidity peak
US20160280767A1 (en) 2015-03-23 2016-09-29 Lonza Ltd. Methods for controlling protein glycosylation
CN105777904B (en) 2015-03-23 2019-12-10 广东东阳光药业有限公司 cation exchange chromatography purification method of anti-TNF alpha monoclonal antibody

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20140161815A9 (en) 2014-06-12
US9150645B2 (en) 2015-10-06
US20160145331A1 (en) 2016-05-26
US9957318B2 (en) 2018-05-01
WO2013158279A1 (en) 2013-10-24
US20130344084A1 (en) 2013-12-26
US20160251425A1 (en) 2016-09-01
US9359434B2 (en) 2016-06-07
US20190062419A1 (en) 2019-02-28
US9346879B2 (en) 2016-05-24
US9683033B2 (en) 2017-06-20
US20150141623A1 (en) 2015-05-21
US20160039925A1 (en) 2016-02-11
US9334319B2 (en) 2016-05-10
US20130338344A1 (en) 2013-12-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9683033B2 (en) Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species
US9708400B2 (en) Methods to modulate lysine variant distribution
WO2013158275A1 (en) Cell culture methods to reduce acidic species
US9708399B2 (en) Protein purification using displacement chromatography
US9249182B2 (en) Purification of antibodies using hydrophobic interaction chromatography
US20130336957A1 (en) Novel purification of human, humanized, or chimeric antibodies using protein a affinity chromatography
US9181337B2 (en) Modulated lysine variant species compositions and methods for producing and using the same
US20220281914A1 (en) Protein compositions and methods for producing and using the same
WO2014142882A1 (en) Protein purification using displacement chromatography

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: ABBVIE INC., ILLINOIS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:SUBRAMANIAN, KARTIK;ZENG, XIAOBEI;DONG, DIANE D.;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20131212 TO 20140903;REEL/FRAME:042755/0959

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION